GTCL Draft Specification Master Working Copy Latest

BIDDING DOCUMENT
For
Procurement of
DESIGN, BUILD AND TURNKEY ENGINEERING, PROCUREMENT,

CONSTRUCTION (EPC) & COMMISSIONING OF SCADA SYSTEM
Project: Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing Supervisory Control and
Data Acquisition (SCADA) System of national gas grid under GTCL
(Component-B of Bheramara Combined Cycle Power Plant Development Project)
Country: BANGLADESH
IFB No. : GTCL/SCADA/EPC/01
Date: ----April, 2015
JICA Loan No.: BD-P71
Part 2 of 3
GAS TRANSMISSION COMPANY LIMITED (GTCL)

(A Company of Petrobangla)
RED CRESCENT BORAK TOWER (LEVEL 2-6&8)
71-72 OLD ELEPHANT ROAD, ESKATON
DHAKA-1000, BANGLADESH
Gas Transmission Company Limited

(GTCL)
Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

(SCADA) of national gas grid under GTCL (Component-B of Bheramara Combined
Cycle Power Plant Development Project)
Table of Contents
Invitation for Bids: Following Prequalification
Single Stage Two Envelope Bidding
PART 1 - Bidding Procedures
Section I. Instruction to Bidders
Section II. Bid Data Sheet
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (Following Pre-qualification)
Section IV. Bidding Forms
Section V. Eligible Source Countries of Japanese ODA Loans
PART 2 Employers Requirements
Section VI. Employers Requirements
PART 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
Section VII. General Conditions (GC)
Section VIII. Particular Conditions
Section IX. Contract Forms
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION : PART 2

SECTION VI. EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

PART - 2
Section VI; Employers Requirements
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABBREVIATIONS & DEFINITIONS
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................... 1
1.1
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2
BACKGROUND INFORMATION................................................................................................. 1
1.3
PROJECT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1
Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.2
Design Outline................................................................................................................ 2
1.3.3
Design Philosophy .......................................................................................................... 3
1.3.4
Project Geography .......................................................................................................... 5
1.3.5
Petrobangla and the Employer........................................................................................ 6
1.3.6
Operating Companies ..................................................................................................... 6
1.3.7
The National Gas Grid ................................................................................................... 8
1.3.8
Site Description .............................................................................................................. 8
1.3.9
Gas Pipeline Operation Philosophy ................................................................................ 9

INTENDED PURPOSE OF THE NEW SYSTEM ........................................................................... 10
1.4
1.4.1
SCADA System............................................................................................................ 10
1.4.2
Communication System ............................................................................................... 10
1.4.3
Instrumentation............................................................................................................. 11
1.4.4
Valve Automation and Pressure Monitoring ................................................................ 13
1.4.5
Cabling ......................................................................................................................... 13
1.5
2.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE NEW SYSTEM ........................................................................... 13
1.5.1
The SCADA System .................................................................................................... 13
1.5.2
The Communication System ........................................................................................ 14
1.5.3
Interface of the SCADA System .................................................................................. 15
1.6
APPLICABLE STANDARDS ..................................................................................................... 16
1.7
UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 22
1.8
SITE CONDITIONS AND AREA CLASSIFICATION ................................................................... 22
SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................................... 24

2.1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 24
[1]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)
2.2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................... 28
2.3
SITE INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................ 29
2.4
ENGINEERING AND DETAILED DESIGN ................................................................................. 30
2.5
MANUFACTURE .................................................................................................................... 31
2.6
FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) ................................................................................... 31
2.7
PRE-INSTALLATION SITE WORKS ......................................................................................... 31
2.8
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 31
2.9
SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) ............................................................................................ 32
2.10
COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................... 32
2.11
SYSTEM TAKING-OVER ........................................................................................................ 32
2.12
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT .......................................................................... 32
2.13
TRAINING .............................................................................................................................. 32
2.14
TEMPORARY SITE FACILITIES............................................................................................... 32
2.14.1
General ......................................................................................................................... 32
2.14.2
Local Site Facilities ...................................................................................................... 33
2.14.3
Office Facilities ............................................................................................................ 33
2.14.4
Living and Messing Accommodation .......................................................................... 35
2.14.5
Supply of Electricity and Water ................................................................................... 36
2.14.6
Inspection Equipment ................................................................................................... 36
2.14.7
Communication Facilities:............................................................................................ 37
2.14.8
Vehicles ........................................................................................................................ 37
2.14.9
Assistance ..................................................................................................................... 38
2.14.10
CD-VAT Charges on Imported Items ...................................................................... 38
THE EMPLOYER'S SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................... 39
2.15
3.

CONTRACTOR'S KEY MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................. 40

3.1
ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS ................................................................................................. 40
3.1.1
Co-operation ................................................................................................................. 40
3.1.2
Contractor's Documents ............................................................................................... 40
3.1.3
Design Submissions ..................................................................................................... 42
3.1.4
As-Built Documents ..................................................................................................... 43
3.1.5
Operation and Maintenance Manuals ........................................................................... 44
3.1.6
Provision of Standards.................................................................................................. 45
3.1.7
Drawings and Specifications ........................................................................................ 45
3.1.8
Method Statements ....................................................................................................... 46

[2]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)
3.1.9
Systems Design Methodology ...................................................................................... 46
3.1.10
Meetings ....................................................................................................................... 47
3.1.11
Coordination with Other Persons and Organizations ................................................... 48
3.1.12
Liaison with Authorities ............................................................................................... 48
3.1.13
Reporting ...................................................................................................................... 48
PROGRAMMING AND PLANNING ........................................................................................... 49
3.2
3.2.1
Planning ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.2.2
Programming ................................................................................................................ 50
3.3
5.
6.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (QMS)............................................................................ 51
3.3.1
Principles ...................................................................................................................... 51
3.3.2
Quality Control and Verification of the Works ............................................................ 52
3.3.3
System Monitoring and Performance Improvement .................................................... 53
3.3.4
QMS Reporting ............................................................................................................ 53
3.3.5
QMS Documentation .................................................................................................... 54
3.3.6
HEALTH & SAFETY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HSMS) ................................................. 54
3.4
4.

VARIATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................... 55
DESIGN GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 56

4.1
SYSTEM ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 56
4.2
RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ......................................................................................... 56
4.3
MAINTAINABILITY ................................................................................................................ 56
4.4
EXPANDABILITY ................................................................................................................... 57
4.5
SPARE CAPACITY .................................................................................................................. 57
PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

58
5.1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 58
5.2
PROCUREMENT ..................................................................................................................... 58
5.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION ......................................... 58
5.4
SITE ACCESS AND CLEANLINESS .......................................................................................... 59
5.5
HAZARDOUS AREAS AND DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES .......................................................... 59
SCADA SYSTEM........................................................................................................................ 60
6.1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 60
6.1.1
MCC ............................................................................................................................. 60
6.1.2
ACC .............................................................................................................................. 61
6.1.3
RTU .............................................................................................................................. 61
[3]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)
Operating Company Terminal (OCT) .......................................................................... 61
6.1.4
6.2

SCADA SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 62
6.2.1
General ......................................................................................................................... 62
6.2.2
Scalability: .................................................................................................................... 63
6.2.3
Data Acquisition and Control ....................................................................................... 63
6.2.4
Custom Graphic Display .............................................................................................. 63
6.2.5
Alarms and Event Management ................................................................................... 65
6.2.6
Historical Data .............................................................................................................. 66
6.2.7
Printer Management ..................................................................................................... 67
6.2.8
Simulation and Training Function ................................................................................ 67
6.2.9
System Security ............................................................................................................ 68
6.2.10
Data Validation............................................................................................................. 68
6.2.11
Report Generation ........................................................................................................ 69
6.2.12
Trending ....................................................................................................................... 69
6.2.13
Human Machine Interface ............................................................................................ 70
6.2.14
System Time Adjustment ............................................................................................. 71
6.2.15
Interface to Other System ............................................................................................. 71
6.2.16
Integration with other applications ............................................................................... 71
6.2.17
Cyber-security .............................................................................................................. 71
6.2.18
Pipeline Operations Application Software ................................................................... 72
6.3
SCADA SYSTEM EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 72
6.3.1
Server............................................................................................................................ 73
6.3.2
HMI Workstations ........................................................................................................ 74
6.3.3
Printers.......................................................................................................................... 75
6.3.4
WEB SERVER ............................................................................................................. 75
6.3.5
LAN .............................................................................................................................. 75
6.3.6
Large Screen Monitor / Large Format Display (LFD) ................................................. 78
6.3.7
UPS at Operating Company Terminal Site................................................................... 79
6.4
RTU EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 79
6.4.1
General ......................................................................................................................... 79
6.4.2
RTU Subsystem............................................................................................................ 80
6.4.3
Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................ 81
6.4.4
Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................. 81
6.4.5
Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................... 81

[4]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)
7.

6.4.6
Analog Outputs............................................................................................................. 82
6.4.7
Pulse Inputs .................................................................................................................. 82
6.4.8
Communications ........................................................................................................... 82
6.4.9
RTU Features ............................................................................................................... 83
6.4.10
RTU Enclosure ............................................................................................................. 90
6.4.11
Insulation and Isolation Requirements ......................................................................... 91
6.4.12
Labelling....................................................................................................................... 91
6.4.13
Terminations and Input / Output Wiring ...................................................................... 91
6.4.14
I/O Connections ............................................................................................................ 92
6.4.15
Status Input Requirements............................................................................................ 93
6.4.16
RTU Software Requirements ....................................................................................... 93
6.4.17
Electric Power .............................................................................................................. 94
6.4.18
IS Barrier and Lightning Protection ............................................................................. 94
6.4.19
Dew Condensation Prevention ..................................................................................... 94
6.4.20
I/O Interface ................................................................................................................. 95
6.4.21
AGA Report Standard Compatible ............................................................................... 95
6.4.22
Data Link to Other Systems Using Serial Links........................................................... 95
6.4.23
Display Monitor for Process Data Monitoring ............................................................. 95
6.4.24
Data Storage during Server Communication Failure ................................................... 96
6.4.25
Electric Outlet for Maintenance ................................................................................... 96
6.4.26
DC Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................. 96
6.4.27
RTU Maintenance Terminal ......................................................................................... 96
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 97

7.1
System Configuration Requirements................................................................................ 97
7.1.1
General ........................................................................................................................ 97
7.1.2
System Configuration............................................................................................... 100
7.2
Telecommunication Equipment Supply Details ............................................................ 105
7.3
Telecommunication Equipment Service Details ............................................................ 106
7.4
Terminal Points and Scope Details ................................................................................. 107
7.5
Communication System Equipment Requirements ...................................................... 110
7.5.1
Radio Propagation Study ......................................................................................... 110
7.5.2
IP Radio Equipment ................................................................................................. 111
7.5.3
Telemetry Radio Equipment ................................................................................... 113
7.5.4
GPRS RADIO MODEM .......................................................................................... 115

[5]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)
8.
7.5.5
IP PBX Equipment ................................................................................................... 118
7.5.6
Network System ........................................................................................................ 122
7.5.7
Video Conferencing System ..................................................................................... 128
7.5.7.1
General Requirements ................................................................................................. 128
7.5.7.2
Technical Specification ................................................................................................ 129
7.5.8
STM-1 SDH Equipment ........................................................................................... 135
7.5.9
Software..................................................................................................................... 137
7.5.9.1
Integration..................................................................................................................... 137
7.5.9.2
Overall Software Requirements .................................................................................. 138
7.5.9.3
Operating System Software ......................................................................................... 138
7.5.9.4
Applications Software .................................................................................................. 138
7.5.9.5
Software Upgrades ....................................................................................................... 138
7.5.9.6
Maintenance Utilities ................................................................................................... 139
7.5.9.7
Software Quality Factors ............................................................................................. 139
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 140

8.1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 140
8.2
GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 140
8.3
PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS ................................................................................................. 140
8.4
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS .......................................................................................... 142
8.4.1
Thermowells ............................................................................................................... 142
8.4.2
Temperature Transmitter ............................................................................................ 142
8.5
PICK UP SIGNAL FROM THE EXISTING TURBINE METER .................................................... 145
8.6
FLOW COMPUTER ............................................................................................................... 146
8.7
LIMIT SWITCH ..................................................................................................................... 150
8.8
SOLENOID VALVE ............................................................................................................... 150
8.9
TUBING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 150
8.10
ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX .............................................................................................. 151
8.11
INSTRUMENT STAND WITH SUNSHADE ............................................................................... 152
8.12
INSTRUMENT CABLING ....................................................................................................... 152
8.12.1
9.

Serial Link or Control Bus Cable ............................................................................... 153
8.13
CABLE GLANDS .................................................................................................................. 153
8.14
INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................... 153
ELECTRICAL WORKS REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 156

9.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 156

[6]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

POWER SUPPLY FROM EXISTING / NEW POWER SOURCE .............................................. 156
9.2
9.2.1
Master Control Centre (MCC) and Auxiliary Control Centre (ACC) ........................ 156
9.2.2
RTUs .......................................................................................................................... 157
9.2.3
UPS for the Operating Company Terminal ................................................................ 158
9.2.4
Communications Equipment ...................................................................................... 158
9.3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 159
9.3.1
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for MCC & ACC and Demra SCADA Office 159
9.3.2
Backup Battery ........................................................................................................... 161
9.3.3
Solar Panel with Battery ............................................................................................. 163
9.3.4
UPS for Computers installed at the Operating Company ........................................... 163
9.3.5
Generator at Demra and Ashuganj ............................................................................. 164
9.3.6
Emergency Generator ................................................................................................. 164
9.3.7
Portable Generator for Maintenance .......................................................................... 165
9.3.8
MCB Box ................................................................................................................... 165
9.3.9
Cables ......................................................................................................................... 165
9.3.10
Cable Laying and Cable support ................................................................................ 166
9.3.11
Lightning Protection and Tower Earthing .................................................................. 167
9.3.12
Aircraft Warning Light ............................................................................................... 167
9.3.13
Earthing ...................................................................................................................... 167
9.3.14
Cable Terminals ......................................................................................................... 168
9.4
ELECTRIC WORKS AT MCC, AGARGAON, DHAKA, ACC, ASHUGANJ, DEMRA SCADA
OFFICE (OLD MCC) AND OTHER MTS AND RTU SITES ............................................................ 168
9.4.1
Standard Codes and Regulations ................................................................................ 169
9.4.2
Workmanship and Materials....................................................................................... 169
9.4.3
Samples .......................................................................................................................... 169
9.4.4
Progress of Work .......................................................................................................... 170
9.5
Material Specification ...................................................................................................... 170
9.5.1
PVC Conduit ................................................................................................................. 170
9.5.2
Galvanized Iron (GI) Pipe ........................................................................................... 170
9.5.3
Junction, Pull and Circular Boxes .............................................................................. 171
9.5.4
Conduit/GI Pipe Bends ................................................................................................ 171
9.5.5
Conduit/GI Pipe Termination and Fittings ................................................................ 172
9.5.6
Conduit/GI Pipe in Floor ............................................................................................. 173
9.5.7
Cable work .................................................................................................................... 173

[7]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

9.5.8
Material specification ................................................................................................... 173
9.5.9
Cable Laying ................................................................................................................. 175
9.5.10
Cable Trunking............................................................................................................. 177
9.5.11
EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR .................................................................... 177
9.5.12
LIGHT FITTINGS ....................................................................................................... 178
9.5.13
EXHAUST FAN ........................................................................................................... 178
9.5.14
DISTRIBUTION BOARD ........................................................................................... 179
9.5.15
SWITCH BOARD ........................................................................................................ 180
9.5.16
SOCKET/MCB/MCCB OUTLETS ............................................................................ 180
9.5.17
LIGHTNING PROTECTION..................................................................................... 181
9.5.18
Air Terminal ................................................................................................................. 181
9.5.19
Roof Conductor and Down Lead ................................................................................ 182
9.5.20
Joints .............................................................................................................................. 182
9.5.21
Test Point....................................................................................................................... 182
9.6
SYSTEM AND SUBSTATION EARTHING ................................................................ 183
9.6.1
General ...................................................................................................................... 183
9.6.2
Earthing System ....................................................................................................... 183
9.6.3
Earthing Mesh and Lead ......................................................................................... 184
9.6.4
Earthing Block .......................................................................................................... 184
9.6.5
Earth Inspection Pit ................................................................................................. 184
9.6.6
Earth Electrode......................................................................................................... 184
9.6.7
Maximum Earth Loop Resistance .......................................................................... 185

Control Panel ................................................................................................................. 186
9.7
9.7.1
Construction.............................................................................................................. 186
9.7.2
Control Panel - Internals ......................................................................................... 186
9.7.3
Control Panel - Front Face ...................................................................................... 186
9.7.4
Control Panel - Lamp Indications........................................................................... 187
9.7.5
Control Panel - Audible Alarm ............................................................................... 187
9.7.6
Overall Testing ......................................................................................................... 188
INSPECTION ................................................................................................................... 188
9.8
9.8.1
General ...................................................................................................................... 188
9.8.2
Visual Inspection ...................................................................................................... 188
9.9
9.9.1
TESTING .......................................................................................................................... 188

General ...................................................................................................................... 188
[8]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

9.9.2
Continuity of Final Circuit ...................................................................................... 189
9.9.3
Continuity of Protective Conductors ...................................................................... 189
9.9.4
Earth Electrode Resistance ...................................................................................... 189
9.9.5
Insulation Resistance ................................................................................................ 189
9.9.6
Insulation of Site-Built Assemblies ......................................................................... 190
9.9.7
Electrical Separation of Circuits ............................................................................. 191
9.9.8
Protection Against Direct Contact by Barriers or Enclosures ............................. 191
9.9.9
Insulation of Non-Conducting Floors and Walls ................................................... 191
9.9.10
Polarity ...................................................................................................................... 192
9.9.11
Earth Fault Loop Impedance .................................................................................. 192
9.9.12
Earth Continuity Conductor ................................................................................... 192
9.9.13
Operation of Residual Current Operated Devices ................................................ 192
9.10
Air Condition Unit............................................................................................................ 192

CIVIL WORKS REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 194
10.
10.1
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................... 194
10.1.1
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 194
10.1.2
Scope of Work ............................................................................................................ 194
10.1.3
General Requirements ................................................................................................ 195
10.2
FOUNDATIONS & SUNSHADES FOR EQUIPMENT ................................................................. 196
10.2.1
General ....................................................................................................................... 196
10.2.2
Requirements .............................................................................................................. 197
10.3
REFURBISHMENT OF RADIO ROOMS / BUILDINGS .............................................................. 197
10.3.1
General ...................................................................................................................... 197
10.3.2
Requirements ............................................................................................................ 199
10.4
CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS OF MCC............................................................................ 200
10.4.1
The specifications for civil works of MCC shall be as under: ................................... 200
10.4.2
Civil Works for MCC............................................................................................... 200
10.4.3
Civil Works for ACC and Demra SCADA Office (Old MCC)............................. 202
10.4.4
Air Conditioning Works for MCC,ACC and Demra SCADA Office .................. 203
10.4.5
Office Furniture and Equipment of MCC ,ACC and Demra SCADA Office .... 203
10.4.6
Electrical Works ....................................................................................................... 208
10.4.6.1
10.5
General ................................................................................................................. 208
REFURBISHMENT OF CONTROL CENTERS ........................................................................... 210
10.6.1
General ...................................................................................................................... 210

[9]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

Requirements ............................................................................................................ 210
10.5.2
REFURBISHMENT OF THE ANTENNA MASTS / TOWERS ...................................................... 211
10.6
10.6.1
General ...................................................................................................................... 211
10.6.2
Painting...................................................................................................................... 211
10.6.3
Requirements ............................................................................................................ 211

Tower/ Mast Foundations ............................................................................................ 212
10.7
Civil Works for Foundations ................................................................................... 212
10.7.1
10.7.1.1
Earthing................................................................................................................. 213
10.7.1.2
Tests ....................................................................................................................... 213
10.8
RADIO /RTU ROOMS .......................................................................................................... 214
10.8.1
General ...................................................................................................................... 214
INSPECTION AND TESTING ............................................................................................. 216
11.
11.1
GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 216
11.2
TEST EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES ..................................................................................... 217
11.3
TESTS .................................................................................................................................. 217
11.3.1
Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) ................................................................................. 217
11.3.2
Site Acceptance Test (SAT) ....................................................................................... 218
11.3.3
Commissioning Test ................................................................................................... 219
11.3.4
Final System Test ....................................................................................................... 219
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT AND SPARE ........................................ 221
12.
12.1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 221
12.2
OPERATION SUPPORT ......................................................................................................... 221
12.2.1
General ....................................................................................................................... 221
12.2.2
Qualifications and Experience.................................................................................... 221
12.3
MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY .............................................................................................. 221
12.4
DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................. 222
12.5
SPARE PARTS ...................................................................................................................... 222
12.6
MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS............................................................................................... 224
13.
12.6.1
General ....................................................................................................................... 224
12.6.2
Routine Maintenance .................................................................................................. 224
12.6.3
Hardware Remedial Maintenance .............................................................................. 225
12.6.4
Software Remedial Maintenance................................................................................ 225
12.6.5
Consumables .............................................................................................................. 226
IDENTIFICATION, MARKING, PACKING AND STORING ........................................... 227

[10]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

TRAINING............................................................................................................................. 228
14.
14.1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 228
14.2
GENERAL COURSE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 228
14.3
CATEGORIES OF PERSONNEL REQUIRING TRAINING .......................................................... 228
14.3.1
General ....................................................................................................................... 228
14.3.2
Managers .................................................................................................................... 228
14.3.3
Engineers .................................................................................................................... 228
14.3.4
Operators .................................................................................................................... 229
14.3.5
Technicians................................................................................................................. 229
14.3.6
Trainers....................................................................................................................... 229
14.4
14.4.1
Free Maintenance Training on all equipment covered: .............................................. 229
14.4.2
Training Schedule: ..................................................................................................... 230
14.4.3
Training course Requirement: .................................................................................... 230
14.4.4
Data base and Display building course: ..................................................................... 230
14.4.5
SCADA & RTU Course: ............................................................................................ 230
14.5
15.
TRAINING & SUPPORT SERVICES ..................................................................................... 229
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 231
14.5.1
Location and Methodology......................................................................................... 231
14.5.2
Training Course during Installation and Commissioning........................................... 231
14.5.3
Training Course Structure for Operation & Maintenance .......................................... 231
PRICE BREAK UP AND EQUIPMENT LIST ..................................................................... 235

[11]
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(GTCL)

ATTACHMENT : BID PROPOSAL SHEETS - TECHNICAL

Appendix 1 : Site List of Microwave and Telemetry links
Appendix 2 : Void
Appendix 3 : RTU List
Appendix 4 : RTU I/O List
Appendix 5 : Instrument List
Appendix 6 : Project Implementation Schedule
Appendix 7 : Existing SCADA System
Drawings :
Fig 1.1 : GTCL SCADA System-Location Layout Drawing
Fig 1.2 : Proposed SCADA System Architecture Drawing
Fig 1.3 : Typical GPRS Radio Modem Link Primary Communication Network
Fig 1.4 : Communication Link between Chevron Compressor System at Muchai and
GTCL SCADA Server at MCC & ACC
Fig 1.5 : Typical Communication link between GTCL SCADA Server and Operating
Company Terminal
Fig 1.6 : Access link between GTCL SCADA Server and Compressor system at Elenga /
Ashugonj
Fig 1.7 : Communication link between Bakhrabad Siddhirganj SCADA and GTCL
SCADA
Fig 1.8 : Communication link between GTCL SCADA Server and GTCL ERP System
Fig 1.9 : Communication link between Western Zone SCADA System at Elenga and MCC /
ACC
Fig 1.10 : Void
Fig 1.11 : FOC based Access link between MTS and Access Points
Fig 1.12 : Access link between MTS and Access Point based on Radio
Fig 7.1 : Leased E1 Circuits
Fig 7.2 : SCADA Backbone Diagram
Fig 7.3 : Typical Telemetry Radio Link Secondary Communication Network
Fig 7.4 : IP PBX System
Fig 9.1 to Fig 9.4 : Power Supply Single Line Diagrams
Fig 10.1 : Instrument Stand with Foundation and Sunshade

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

(GTCL)


Abbreviations
ACC
Auxiliary Control Center
ADB
Asian Development Bank
BGFCL
Bangladesh Gas Field Co., Ltd.
BGDSL
Bakhrabad Gas Distribution System Ltd.
CGS
City Gate Station
DRS
District Regulating Station
FAT
Factory Acceptance Test
FF
Fertilizer Factory
GMS
Gas Manifold Station
GTCL
Gas Transmission Co. Ltd.
HO
Head Office
IP-PBX
Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange
IOC
Independent Operating Companies
JICA
Japan International Cooperation Agency
JGTDSL
Jalalabad Gas Transmission & Distribution System Limited
KGDCL
Karnaphuli Gas Distribution Company Limited
MCC
Main Control Center
MS
Metering Station
MTS
Master Telemetry Station
NMS
Network Monitoring System
OCT
Operation Company Terminal
PS
Power Station
RMS
Regulating & Metering Station
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit
SAT
Site Acceptance Test
SCADA
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SGFL
Sylhet Gas Field Limited
STS
Slave Telemetry Station
TBS
Town Bordering Station
TGTDCL
Titas Gas Transmission & Distribution Co. Ltd.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
VS
Valve Station
WB
World Bank


(GTCL)

Definitions
Access Point
Providers network station where Master Telemetry Station of the

New System shall be linked with.
Additional Site
Existing site which is currently not covered by The Existing System

but shall be covered by the New System.
Employer
Gas Transmission Company Limited (GTCL)
Future Site
Upcoming site which is planned to be added into The New System

after the completion of the Project.
Master Telemetry Station
The radio station which communicate with its associated New

RTU(s) and Control Centre as relay station.
Original Site
Existing site which has been covered by The Existing System, and
shall be covered by The New System.
Project
Detail
design,
procurement,
construction,
installation,
commissioning and training for the rehabilitation and expansion of
The Existing System.
Site
Place where gas pipeline related facilities are or will be situated.
Slave Telemetry Station
The local radio station installed with New RTU that communicates
with Master Telemetry Station.
Study
All activities by experts selected by JICA to examine the

requirement for the rehabilitation and expansion of The Existing
System and to formulate a detailed future investment plan for the
efficient gas transmission inclusive of training for transfer of
technical know-how.
The Engineer
Consultant to supervise the tendering stage and the implementation

of the Project, as representative of Employer.
The Existing System
Existing SCADA and Telecommunication System which had been

previously installed and shall be rehabilitated during the Project.
The New System
New SCADA and Communication System which shall be

established in the Project.


(GTCL)

1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.2
(1)
This document is the Functional and Performance Specification for 'Gas SCADA
System Rehabilitation and Expansion Project' for GTCL in Bangladesh and form Part-2,
Section-VI of the Invitation to Tender for the said Project.
(2)
Gas Transmission Company Ltd. (GTCL), Bangladesh is the Employer for this Contract
who own, control, operate and maintain the high pressure gas transmission trunk
pipelines that shall be covered by New SCADA and Communication System.
(3)
The purpose and objective of the project for Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) of GTCL is to revamp, modernize
and expand the SCADA system of the country-wide GTCL gas pipeline network to
build an integrated SCADA-Communication system as a functional organ of Employer
to monitor and ensure a stable gas supply system and to secure efficient and effective
gas distribution to the whole country.
(4)
The Project is implemented under Japan's ODA (Official Development Assistance) loan.
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
The existing gas SCADA-Telecommunication system operated by GTCL was installed under
DFID (Department for International Development, UK Government) assistance during 19962003 for the efficient operation and monitoring of gas supply in Bangladesh. However, it is
currently malfunctioning due to the following major problems.
(1)
Since the installation of the Existing System, there has been a significant growth in the
gas sector. New gas fields have started production and new gas off-take points have
been connected. However, no expansion of the Existing System has taken place and all
newly developed gas sites have remained outside the coverage of the Existing System.
(2)
Due to the lack of maintenance support from the Contractor after the expiry of operation
& maintenance support service period, the Existing System has become old and
dilapidated.
(3)
Microwave analog communication system of TGTDCL, which was used as the

backbone of the Bramaputra Basin pipeline from Monohordi to Elenga and Tarakandi,
has become antiquated.
(4)
Existing System, designed in 1995, is fast approaching the final stage of its lifetime. The
equipment / parts used for the system have become generation/s older and the
procurement of spare parts has become difficult, affecting maintenance work seriously.
(5)
Existing SCADA and Telecommunication system was designed, manufactured and

implemented by Schrack Control and Granger telecommunication.
Bangladesh gas sector has since expanded to achieve the vision of 2025 with many
expansion / extension gas pipeline projects, to meet the strong future gas demand
forecast.
In tune with the above, an integrated SCADA telecommunication system will be built up
through Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition (SCADA) system of GTCL which in turn will realize the effective and
-1-

(GTCL)

sustainable gas supply to the whole country.

1.3
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.3.1
Introduction
(1)
This chapter provides information on the Project, the Employer, other operating
companies and the sites at which new SCADA and Communication System are to be
installed.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide new SCADA and Communication System through
rehabilitation and expansion of the existing SCADA and Telecommunication System
for effective operation / control of the nationwide gas pipeline network.
(3)
The New System shall be implemented through a turnkey EPC (Engineering,

Procurement and Construction) Contract according to the requirements specified in this
document.
(4)
The New System shall consist of new RTUs & new SCADA Systems, new
Communication systems, new UPS systems, new Battery & Charger systems, new solar
systems for non AC powered sites, new field Instruments etc. specified in this
document.
(5)
The New System shall provide the Employer with a unified voice and data
communications system to support their operations including but not limited to the
following:
(6)
1.3.2
a)
Monitoring of gas parameters at specified sites.
b)
On-off Control of automatic gas flow control valves either remotely or in local
manual mode.
c)
Planning of optimum and strategic use of gas in accordance with gas production
and consumption.
d)
Fault identification and diagnosis of the gas network.
The Specification has been based on conceptual design to allow the requirements to be
adequately addressed by EPC Contractor. The detail design in terms of the System
architecture and configuration shall be the responsibility of Contractor in accordance
with the functional and performance requirements described in the Specifications.
Design Outline
The new SCADA system shall allow information to be easily shared between computer
systems and applications through open system design architecture. The system shall also
make it possible to support modular applications such as graphical display, alarming, logical
functions, analysis and data handling operations and shall communicate with enterprise or
external systems over network. Sharing of data should be permissible through web based
browsers as well as standard client viewers.
Design of the new SCADA system shall incorporate the state-of-the-art technologies for
enhanced performance and / or to maximize the reliability and availability of the system with
flexibility to ensure ease, safe operation and maintenance.
-2-

(GTCL)
1.3.3

Design Philosophy
(1)
The scope of the Project will include but shall not be limited to the following:
a)
To manufacture, procure, supply, install, and commission an integrated SCADA,

Communication and Field Instruments system including associated Civil and
Electrical works for GTCL Gas Transmission Pipeline Network as follows:
i]
Removal and Replacement of the SCADA-Communication system, Field

instruments, Process hook up materials and all other associated accessories
& erection materials of existing systems by Contractors new equipment &
materials.
Existing MTS Towers and existing field instrumentation cables, structures,
shed/shelter (for Instruments & RTUs etc.), foundations, radio rooms (for
MTS, Instruments & RTUs) are structurally in good condition, however
painting, earthing, refurbishment of shelter, refurbishment of foundation,
and any other refurbishment works as required shall have to be provided.
New cables shall be employed to replace defective cables, if any, and to
meet requirement for new sites.
b)
ii]
Dismantling of existing RTUs, SCADA system

Communication systems equipment and Field instruments.
equipment,
iii]
Provide new systems into existing sites which were not covered by the
Existing System. In such case, all necessary items, to meet complete
functional requirement of SCADA-Communication system, instrument,
cables & accessories, shed / shelter construction, other associated civil and
Electrical works required for new system, shall be provided.
iv]
Expanding the system to include upcoming sites such as those under

construction or being planned. In this case, similar to case (iii) above, all
items to meet complete requirement of SCADA-Communication system,
instrument, cables & accessories, shed / shelter construction, other
associated civil and Electrical works as required for new system shall be
provided.
v]
Interface & connections to other zonal gas SCADA Systems, third party
ERP systems of GTCL and to other Automation system operated by IOCs.
To assist GTCL with the establishment of a sustainable Operation and

Maintenance (O&M) system by :
i]
Imparting Training on the development of skills and expertise for GTCL

related personnel for smooth commencement of the New System and its
sustainable O&M including framing of an Annual Maintenance Contract.
ii]
Prepare and submit the O&M manuals and O&M schedules.
(2)
The New System will be designed in accordance with the same operational philosophy
for pipelines as the one currently being used for the Existing System.
(3)
The New System shall support the following functional requirements :

a)
Centralized control and operation of the pipelines based on latest communication

technology with upward up-gradation path.

-3-

(GTCL)

b)
Management of the countrys gas resources and security of supply to consumers.
c)
Improvement of the safety of operation of the pipelines.
d)
Development of the skills and expertise of GTCL personnel.
e)
Support the future expansion of the pipeline network.
(4)
All main components of the Existing System, such as servers, workstations, RTUs,
communication equipment, field instruments etc. are to be replaced with new one. The
existing field cabling, junction boxes and power supply cabling to RTU may be reused
where these are found to be in good condition.
(5)
All the existing Fifty four (54) Remote Terminal Units of GTCL need total replacement
by new generation sleek, smart and fast RTUs. In addition Thirty two (32) new RTUs
need to be installed for the additional new nodes that are yet to be brought into the
coverage of the SCADA network. Also, two (2) new RTUs are to be kept in readiness
for upcoming future sites. Over the existing capacity the SCADA network shall be
designed with higher capacity and traffic to accept future nodes.
(6)
The SCADA system and communication network shall be of state-of-the-art design

with the scope of upward advancement.
(7)
Air conditioners installed in the Control room, Equipment room and UPS & Battery
room in MCC and ACC are of split architecture design. Air conditioner for Radio room
shall be window type. All the above air conditioners shall be replaced.
(8)
All design and construction works shall be prepared and carried out in accordance with
British Standards & codes of practice or any other recognized equivalent national
standards like ANSI, ASME, IEC, IEEE, ISO, DIN approved by the Engineer. Any
departure from these standards and codes shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Contractor shall be able to present the copies of the referred standard and codes of
practice at the request of the Engineer.
(9)
All works shall be carried out in accordance with recognized standards of Environment,
Health & Safety (EHS) British Standards / American Concrete Institute (ACI) Codes /
Bangladesh National Building Code (BNBC) or equivalent. The Engineer shall have the
power to instruct the Contractors EHS officer to comply with the codes requirements.
(10) EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design and design check of the
Works which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(11) The Contractor shall ensure that the submitted design is adequate in all respects for
proper functioning of the System.
(12) The Contractor shall submit the Method Statement for the works that describes the
method & sequence of the construction work, work plan, quality assurance, referred
standards and codes of practice etc. for the approval of the Engineer.
(13) For any deviation from the approved specification and quality, the Engineer will have
the authority to instruct the Contractor to reinstate such work to the required standard.

-4-

(GTCL)

(14) The Contractor shall arrange suitably qualified competent Engineers at site to supervise
the work and shall ensure that the quality and progress of the works is achieved and
maintained. The site engineers shall be responsible for liaising with the Engineer.
(15) As a part of the Quality assurance and Quality check, Contractor's engineers shall
inspect and test the works to ensure that all works are done as per approved design,
standard and specification and shall submit the records of such inspections and tests to
the Engineer for approval.
(16) The Contractor shall also ensure that progress is maintained in accordance with the
work schedule.
(17) The Contractor shall coordinate with all agencies including the operating companies of
gas facilities where Contractor's works shall be carried out and ensure no disturbance to
the operations of existing gas facilities and also ensure no damage to the existing gas
facilities.
1.3.4
Project Geography
(1)
Gas development in Bangladesh is mostly restricted to the eastern half of the country.
(2)
Bangladesh is a predominantly a flat country with the presence of hilly areas being in
the Sylhet region starting at Hobigonj and in the south-east of Chittagong.
(3)
Prominent natural resource is water. The lands are being dominated by rivers and deltas.
Many parts of the Bangladesh are a flood prone zone.
(4)
Other geographical features are the high probability of extreme climatic and
meteorological conditions including prolonged periods of high temperature and
humidity, thunder storms and cyclones and a monsoon season.
(5)
Bangladesh has three seasons; winter, between November and February which is dry
and cool, the pre-monsoon season between March and May which exhibits increasing
temperatures and periodic thunderstorms and increasing rainfall and the monsoon
season itself from June to October which is warm and humid and in which more than
80% of the annual rainfall occurs.
(6)
Bangladesh has a typical monsoon climate characterized by rain-bearing winds,

moderately warm temperatures and high humidity. In general, maximum temperatures
are recorded in the summer months, from April to September, averaging 90 deg. F (30
deg.C). April is the warmest month in most parts. The range of temperatures in the
winter months, from November to March, is lesser than in the summer months. January
is the coolest month, with temperatures averaging 70 deg.F (20deg.C).
(7)
The conditions of lowest atmospheric pressure occur in Bangladesh in June and July, the
storm season. Winds are mostly from the north and northeast in winter, blowing gently
in northern and central areas and somewhat more aggressively near the coast. During
the period of the northwesters (strong winds from the northwest) from March to May,
however, wind speed may rise to 40 miles (65 km) per hour.
(8)
Bangladesh receives heavy rainfall; except for some parts in the west, it generally
exceeds 60 inches (1,500 mm) annually. Large areas of the south, southeast, north, and
northeast typically receive from 80 to 100 inches (2,000 to 2,500 mm), and the northern
-5-

(GTCL)

and northwestern parts of the Sylhet area usually receive from 150 to 200 inches
(~3,800 to 5,000 mm). The maximum rainfall occurs during the monsoon period, from
June to September or early October.
(9)
Such conditions have a direct impact on the transport infrastructure within Bangladesh
with some roads becoming temporarily impassable or washed away in sections.
(10) The Contractor shall study the geographic and climatic conditions of Bangladesh and
address them in all areas of the System design.
(11) The Contractor shall consider the geographical, meteorological and environmental
conditions in the Project Plan and demonstrate that sufficient contingency has been
included to ensure the program is both realistic and achievable.
(12) All the equipment supplied under contract shall be suitable for continuous operation
under the environmental conditions prevailing at site. The equipment shall be suitable
for transportation under proper packed conditions by road, air, sea, conforming to
standards. The equipment shall also be resistant to termite, fungus, rodents and salty
environment. The equipment shall withstand continuous ambient temperature up to 60
deg. Centigrade, and humidity from 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing). All enclosed
equipment shall be constructed to allow free air flow for proper heat dissipation, and
ventilation grill shall not obstruct operation and maintenance of equipment. All
equipment shall withstand international standards for vibration under industrial
operation.
1.3.5
1.3.6
Petrobangla and the Employer

(1)
The gas sector in Bangladesh is a public utility and run semi-autonomously by

Petrobangla under Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral Resources. Petrobangla's
Head Office is located in Dhaka.
(2)
The Employer, GTCL, is an operating company of Petrobangla which owns and

operates the Bangladesh National Gas Grid and responsible for the transmission of gas
from gas fields to distributors.
Operating Companies
There are several Operating Companies. Sites of those companies are to be monitored
by the New System and their main activities are described below.
(1)
(2)
Bakhrabad Gas Systems Limited (BGSL)

a)
BGSL is a company of Petrobangla and is engaged in the gas distribution within

the southeastern part of Bangladesh covering Chittagong Division excluding
Brahmanbaria District.
b)
The Employer supplies gas to BGSL sites.
c)
BGSL's head office is located in Comilla where new OCT and extension
telephone shall be installed.
Jalalabad Gas Transmission and Distribution Company Limited (JGTDCL)

-6-

(GTCL)
(3)
(4)
(5)

a)
JGTDSL is a company of Petrobangla and is engaged in the gas transmission and

distribution within the northeastern part of Bangladesh covering Sylhet Division.
b)
The Employer supplies gas to JGTOSL sites.
c)
JGTDSL's head office is located in the commercial building on the outskirts of

Sylhet where a new OCT and extension telephone shall be installed.
Titas Gas Transmission and Distribution Company Limited (TGTDCL)

a)
TGTDCL is a company of Petrobangla and is engaged in the gas transmission and

distribution within the central and northern part of Bangladesh covering Dhaka
Division and Brahmanbaria District.
b)
The Employer supplies gas to TGTDCL sites.
c)
TGTDCL's head office is located in Dhaka where a new OCT and extension
Bangladesh Gas Field Company Limited (BGFCL)

a)
BGFCL is a company of Petrobangla who owns and operates several gas fields in
the districts of Brahmanbaria, Comilla, Hobigonj, Narsingdi and Gazupur. Gas is
supplied to the Employer and also directly to TGTDCL.
b)
BGFCL's head office is located in Brahmanbaria where a new OCT and extension
Sylhet Gas Fields Limited (SGFL)

a)
SGFL is a company of Petrobangla who owns and operates several gas fields in
Sylhed Division. Gas is supplied to the Employer.
b)
SGFLs head office is located at Horipur gas field, Sylhet where a new OCT and
extension telephone shall be installed.
(6)
BAPEX: A Company of Petrobangla responsible for drilling gas fields and operation of
several gas fields.
(7)
Karnafuli Gas Distribution Company Ltd. (KGDCL)

KGDCL is a company of Petrobangla and is engaged in the Gas distribution covering
Chitagong.
(8)
Other Companies
There are some other companies operating or constructing gas facilities which shall be
covered by the new SCADA System such as
a)
Chevron : International Oil Company operating three gas fields in Sylhet

Division.
b)
Tullow : International oil company operating a gas field in Comilla District.

-7-

(GTCL)
1.3.7
The National Gas Grid

(1)
1.3.8

Sections of the national gas grid that shall be covered by The New System are indicated
in Figure l.
Site Description
(1)
Introduction
There are several classifications of sites which are defined below. The Site List
(Appendix-1) identifies the classification of each site to be included in The New
System.
(2)
(3)
Control Center (CC)

a)
Master Control Centre (MCC): MCC will be located at GTCL Head office,
Agargaon, Dhaka.
b)
Auxiliary Control Centre (ACC): The Auxiliary Control Center (ACC) of the
New System is located at Ashuganj approximately 90 km northeast of Dhaka.
c)
Demra SCADA Office: Demra SCADA office is located at about 20 km south

east of Dhaka. Master Control Center (MCC) of the earlier SCADA System was
installed here. Now HMI Engineering work station and OCT will be installed here
under the new SCADA system. Servers of Bakrabad-Siddirgonj, SCADA back-up
Server of Western zone SCADA and back-up server of ERP system of GTCL are
located here.
d)
Both Control Centers enable the Employer to supervise and control the entire gas
pipeline network converged by the New System.
Master Telemetry Station (MTS)

There are 20 Master Telemetry Stations out of which 11 stations will be operational and
will communicate with their associated New RTU(s) and Control Center as relay
station. The existing radio equipment rooms and towers shall be utilized for MTS.
(4)
Gas Metering and Regulating Station

a)
There are dozens of gas metering & regulating stations to be monitored by the
New System under different classifications as below.
GMS
Gas Manifold Station
CGS
City Gate Station
TBS
Town Bordering Station
RMS
Regulating & Metering Station
DRS
District Regulating Station
CMS
Customer Metering Station
MS
Metering Station

-8-

(GTCL)
b)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

The New System shall monitor the gas flow volume at these sites.
Gas Field
a)
There are 20 Gas fields to be incorporated in the New System.
b)
The New System shall monitor the inlet gas volume from these sites.
Bulk Consumers
a)
Power stations (PS) and fertilizer factories (FF), which are the largest consumers
of gas in the industrial sector, are defined as bulk consumers to be monitored by
the New System.
b)
The New System shall monitor the outlet gas volume feeding the bulk consumers.
Main Line Valve Stations (VS)

a)
There are dozens of main line valve stations (VS) to be monitored by the New
System.
b)
The New System shall monitor the open / close status of these valves. Further
control these valves shall be provided.
Petrobangla and Operating Companies' Head Office

The head office of Petrobangla and other major operating companies shall be equipped
with an Operating Company Terminal (OCT) and extension telephone for the
monitoring of the entire gas grid covered by the New System and for internal/direct
liaison.
1.3.9
Gas Pipeline Operation Philosophy

(1)
The Employer will receive requests from distribution companies for the supply of gas at
their designated sites on a periodical basis.
(2)
The Employer will also establish the levels of gas to be provided to the National Gas
Grid by production companies on a regular basis.
(3)
The Employer will plan for the transmission of gas through the National Gas Grid in
accordance with the demand as put forward by "distribution companies under their
contract with the production companies.
(4)
The Employer will provide figures for the quantity of gas flowing into and out of the
National Gas Grid to Petrobangla and the other Operating Companies to support billing
and payment for gas and other financial systems such as periodic accounts or planning.
(5)
Proposed SCADA system shall cover the following main transmission pipe lines:
a)
North - South Pipeline
b)
Rashidpur - Ashuganj
c)
Ashuganj - Bakhrabad pipeline

-9-

(GTCL)
(6)

d)
Bakhrabad - Demra pipeline
e)
Bakhrabad - Chittagong pipeline
f)
Norsignhdi-Demra
g)
Ashuganj - Monohordi - Elenga pipeline (BB Pipeline)
h)
Elenga - Tarakandi pipeline
i)
Dhanua - Ashulia Aminbazar
j)
Bibiyana-Dhanua pipeline
k)
Moheskhali-Anowara pipeline
Recently Bibiyana-Dhanua pipeline has been added to gas transmission network of

GTCL and some pipe lines like Asuganj - Bakhrabad-2 and Maheshkhali - Anawara will
be added very soon. In order to accommodate monitoring of those pipelines; few RTUs,
associated communication equipment and field instruments need to be arranged from
other sites which are of less priority.
1.4
INTENDED PURPOSE OF THE NEW SYSTEM
1.4.1
SCADA System
(1)
1.4.2
The intended purpose of the SCADA System is to ensure for GTCL that the natural gas
transmission pipeline is:
a)
Capable of being operated and maintained safely, effectively and efficiently.
b)
Equipped with operational interfaces that will enable the efficient monitoring and
control of the natural gas transmission pipeline from both of the Master Control
Center (MCC) and the Auxiliary Control Center (ACC).
(2)
The SCADA System shall permit data acquisition and control functions to be performed
at remote locations while providing the capability to monitor and control distributed
functions from MCC and ACC.
(3)
The Master Control Center (MCC) shall be the central operating center to monitor and
control the pipeline network.
(4)
The Auxiliary Control Center (ACC) shall be the hot-standby operating center with the
same functionality and operating capability as the MCC.
Communication System
The intended purpose of the Communication System is to:
(1)
Acquire data from remote sites and send the aggregated data to Master Control Centre
and Auxiliary Control Centre for monitoring and supervisory actions and for generating
outputs for management use.
(2)
Provide adequate communication ability, ensuring that the GTCL natural gas
transmission pipeline is capable of being operated and maintained safely, effectively
and efficiently.
- 10 -

(GTCL)
1.4.3

(3)
Provide properly integrated communication interfaces among all sites and operating
companies.
(4)
Make the operating staff aware of any abnormal operating conditions in a timely and
effective manner to enable them to minimize consequential damage.
(5)
Provide a voice network through a VOIP Exchange at ACC
(6)
Provide a Video Conferencing system for Demra, Ashuganj, Agargaon, Petrobangla HO

at Dhaka and Elenga.
Instrumentation
Instrumentation consists of :
(1)
Flow measurement (both orifice and turbine type)
(2)
Temperature measurement
(3)
Pressure measurement
(4)
Flow Computers
(5)
Level measurements
(6)
Monitoring of Valve Open / Close Status
(7)
Valve Automation / Control
Type of metering employed in the existing SCADA system for monitoring of process data are
as follows:
(i) Flow Measurement by Orifice
(ii) Flow Measurement by Turbine Flowmeter
(i) Flow measurement by Orifice
a)
Flow measurement by Orifice and Differential Pressure (DP) transmitters and

volume correction by Pressure Transmitter (PT) and Temperature Transmitter
(TT).
b)
The above transmitters are connected to Flow computers for orifice flow
measurements.
c)
In most of the sites separate temperature tapping points may not be available for
taking temperature signals for the new SCADA system. Therefore, it may be
required to use the existing tapping point for SCADA system and the flow
measuring devices of the operating companies. Hence, Temperature Transmitters
shall have dual 4-20 mA output so that one output can be used for flow computer
of the SCADA System and other for operating companies.
d)
The Flow Computers in turn will be connected to RTU.
Configurations of transmitters above are as follows:

a)
Original sites of GTCL where transmitters are directly installed on GTCL pipeline.

- 11 -

(GTCL)

b)
Original sites of Production and Distribution companies where GTCL transmitters are
already installed by constructing tee off on the impulse tube of measuring system of
Production and Distribution companies.
c)
There are some Original Sites that have undergone expansion and new streams have
been added with no instrumentation installed and therefore all instruments are to be
procured and installed at those sites.
d)
Additional sites of GTCL, Production and Distribution companies where no instruments

are at present installed.
e)
Only supply of instruments for future sites is required. These can be installed during
operation & maintenance period.
Functionality of Field transmitters already installed at sites could not be ascertained as the
SCADA system itself is not working for a long time and the instruments are lying idle for
about 15 years. Therefore, all the above transmitters shall be replaced by new smart type
transmitters.
(ii) Flow measurement by Turbine Flowmeter.
Turbine type flowmeters installed at original sites are mostly owned and maintained by the
operating companies.
Turbine type flow metering scheme are as follows:
a)
At some site installations the turbine flowmeter, pressure transmitter and temperature
transmitter signals are hardwired interfaced with the Flow computers installed on the
panels at Local Control Rooms.
b)
At some sites turbine flowmeter and volume corrector / flow computers are installed
outdoor on an instrument stand and it is connected to RTU.
Rehabilitation of all the turbine type flow meters under Operating companies will be carried
out by replacing / repairing of these meters by themselves.
a)
Contractor shall supply and install Flow computers including volume corrector for
Turbine meter. Flow computers shall be connected to RTU.
c)
Pulse signal for Turbine meter to Flow computers shall be taken from the existing
Turbine meter using dual pick up sensor to be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
d)
Pressure and Temperature signal shall be taken from the existing pressure and
temperature tap near the Turbine meter.
e)
In most of the sites temperature separate tapping points may not be available for taking
temperature signals for the SCADA system. Therefore, it may be required to use the
existing tapping point for SCADA system and the flow measuring devices of the
operating companies. Hence, Temperature Transmitters shall have dual 4-20 mA output
so that one output can be used for flow computer of the SCADA System and other for
operating companies.
f)
GTCL will assist to make provisions for the tapping points on the pipe lines, if required
at original sites and additional sites.

- 12 -

(GTCL)
1.4.4
1.4.5

Valve Automation and Pressure Monitoring

a)
Open / closed status of the main line valve shall be monitored and necessary accessories
for the purpose shall be supplied by the contractor.
b)
Some main line valves and flow control valves shall be controlled under this SCADA
system. Solenoid valves and necessary accessories shall be supplied and installed to
control the valves by the contractor.
c)
Pressure transmitters will be installed upstream of each valve station for monitoring of
pressure
d)
Pressure transmitters will be installed at the inlet of each metering station for
monitoring inlet pressure
Cabling
a)
New power cable, circuit breaker and accessories for RTU location shall be supplied
and installed by the contractor.
b)
Instrument cable from transmitter to junction box shall be replaced by the contractor.
c)
Communication cable from RTU to radio room shall be replaced by the contractor.
d)
Existing cabling from Junction Box to RTU can be reused unless these are internally
damaged.
e)
New power cable for Radio room power connection from existing distribution board in
the gas office to Radio room shall be supplied and installed by the contractor.
1.5
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE NEW SYSTEM
1.5.1
The SCADA System

The system shall be based around two Control Centers geographically separated for security
purposes, with identical facilities and a redundant server configuration for resilience and
additional security.
The Main Control Center (MCC) will be located at Dhaka and the Auxiliary Control Center
(ACC) is at Ashuganj, 90 km north-east of Dhaka. The database will be transferred via
communication network between the servers at MCC and ACC.
The servers shall support HMI workstations in the above control rooms and Operating
Company Terminals (OCTs) to be located at Gas Operating Company Head Offices to
provide the facilities for Gas Plant monitoring, pipeline operation management, maintenance
dispatch, production planning and training. Extended terminals will be located at Demra the
old MCC and at some selected locations.
An on-line modeling package shall be incorporated into the SCADA System to support gas
leak detection, load balancing and scheduling.
RTUs shall be installed at sites classified as below, throughout the existing gas pipeline
network covered by the Project, to retrieve data and transmit them to the MCC and the ACC.
(1)
At Original Sites

- 13 -

(GTCL)

All RTUs that are currently installed at original site shall be replaced with New RTU.
(2)
At Additional Sites
Currently no RTUs are installed at the Additional Sites, thus New RTUs shall be
installed.
(3)
At Future Sites
a)
GTCL and operating companies plan to construct some sites for gas transmission
operation. These planned sites may not be constructed during the completion of
the Project therefore RTUs shall be designed and supplied to the Employer.
b)
Batteries shall be installed in the RTU cabinet to provide power back up and
maintain equipment operation for a full 24 hours on loss of the public electricity
supply. Solar panels are equipped at some existing sites without public electricity
supply and these existing solar panels shall be replaced. At additional sites
without public electricity supply, solar panels shall be installed on the RTU
shelter roofs to provide the power necessary to energize the RTU equipment and
pipeline instrumentation.
c)
Field Instruments shall be installed for all the Additional Sites and Existing Sites.
d)
RTUs will be used for control and monitoring of pipeline parameters like flow,
pressure, temperature, valve open / close status, pig arrival indication through pig
signaler, electrical parameters etc. and update the MCC / ACC.
A schematic diagram of the SCADA System is shown in Drawing No. 13B15-DWG-I-0010.

1.5.2
The Communication System

(1)
(2)
The Communication System shall be composed of following network, links and other
subsystems:
a)
GPRS Radio Modem link between RTU site and Service Providers Access Point
and subsequent WAN communication backbone network to MCC and ACC and
other points as per the tender requirement.
b)
Telemetry Radio Link between MTS and Slave Telemetry Station (STS)
c)
IP Radio link and OFC link based on STM-1/Router between Provider's Access
Point (AP) and Master Telemetry Station (MTS)
d)
Leased EI circuits from Provider's Network, (BTCL's network is recommended.)
e)
IP PBX
f)
Network Monitoring System (NMS)
g)
Video Conferencing System
The GPRS Radio Modem shall collect the process data from RTU and will transmit the
same to Service Providers Access Point. The data will finally be transported to SCADA
- 14 -

(GTCL)

Server at MCC and ACC through Service Providers WAN network. This will be the
primary communication system.
(3)
As a secondary communication backbone for transmitting data for a few specific RTU
sites, the telemetry radio link shall be used to connect the MTS and the STS at those
RTU sites.
(4)
The leased E l circuits from the provider's network and an IP radio link shall form the
secondary SCADA backbone to connect the MTS and MCC/ACC so that in the event of
failure of the primary backbone, the secondary communication backbone shall deliver
the critical data from those sites to MCC and ACC.
(5)
Link from MSC of service provider to MCC and ACC: A leased bandwidth of
optical fiber operator / provider shall be used. Contractor is responsible to build up OFC
connectivity from MSC of service provider to nearest access point of the OFC network
of the third party. Again contractor shall establish connectivity from MCC and ACC to
nearest AP of OFC network of third party.
(6)
Demra SCADA office & WCC Elenga shall be connected to MCC Agargaon, Dhaka
through leased bandwidth of OFC network provided by third party. However contractor
shall establish connectivity using OFC from Demra SCADA office & WCC Elenga to
AP of OFC Network of the third party.
(7)
The IP PBX shall be located at ACC and shall connect the extension lines located at the
MCC, ACC, MTS and OCT through the SCADA backbone by using VoiP transmission.
(8)
The video conferencing system shall also be used for such purpose amongst the specific
user groups.
(9)
The network monitoring system shall monitor the equipment connected with the
network. A computer with adequate software for monitoring shall be installed at MCC
and ACC.
(10) A schematic diagram of the Communication System is shown in Figure 1.3.

1.5.3
Interface of the SCADA System

(1)
The intended SCADA system shall have connections to other SCADA systems operated
by IOCs or installed by other donors. The interface details with the other systems are
furnished as under. However, the information is tentative and shall be subject to
revisions at a later point of time.
(2)
Process data connectivity in between third party systems and the new SCADA system
are proposed as follows. Detail of communication link & protocol and hardware
requirement will be made final during detail engineering.
a)
For Chevron Gas fields (Moulabi Bazar, Bibiyana and Jalalabad):Selected plant data will be obtained through RTUs installed at respective Gas
Fields and from the Chevron web server at Dhaka through internet line.
b)
For the Western Zone Gas Pipeline SCADA system:

Process data will be obtained from GTCL own Western zone SCADA gateway /
server proposed to be installed at Elenga. As a backup 25 no GPRS Radio

- 15 -

(GTCL)

modem shall be supplied and installed in the RTU of the western zone SCADA
system.
c)
For Bangura Gas Field operated by Tullow Bangladesh Co. Ltd.:PLC based control system (Allen Bradley make) is installed for local control and
monitoring. Process data from this PLC to GTCL SCADA will be carried out by
installing a RTU near PLC location. Connectivity from PLC to this RTU will be
serial Modbus / DNP-3 or repeat hardwired signal. Communication from this
RTU to SCADA will be through GPRS Radio modem and telemetry link.
d)
For Interface with Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA System:Process data will be obtained from the GTCL own SCADA gateway / server of
Bakhrabad - Siddhirganj SCADA System to be installed at Demra.
e)
For Interface with GTCL ERP System:Communication link of proposed SCADA system shall be made available at
GTCL Dhaka office for ERP system.
f)
For interface with Compressor system at Muchai of Chevron

DCS based control system (Emerson make) is installed for local control and
monitoring. Process data from this DCS to GTCL SCADA will be carried out by
installing a RTU. Connectivity from DCS to this RTU will be serial Modbus /
DNP-3 or repeat hardwired signal from DCS. Communication from RTU to new
SCADA will be through GPRS Radio modem and telemetry link.
g)
For interface with Compressor system at Ashuganj

DCS based control system is installed for local control and monitoring. Process
data from this DCS to GTCL SCADA will be carried out by installing a RTU.
Connectivity from DCS to this RTU will be serial Modbus / DNP-3 or repeat
hardwired signal from DCS. Communication from RTU to new SCADA will be
through GPRS Radio modem and access link.
h)
For interface with Compressor system at Elenga

DCS based control system is installed for local control and monitoring. Process
data from this DCS to GTCL SCADA will be carried out by installing a RTU.
Connectivity from DCS to this RTU will be serial Modbus DNP-3 / or repeat
hardwired signal from DCS. Communication from RTU to new SCADA will be
through GPRS Radio modem and access link.
i)
For interface with Maheskhali-Anowara SCADA System

Process data will be obtained from the RTU of Maheskhali-Anowara SCADA
System to GTCL SCADA through GPRS Radio modem / access link.
j)
For interface with OCT

OCT and GTCL extended terminals will be installed at HO of Operating
companies and GTCL offices. Communication will be through web server and
internet.
1.6
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
(1)
A "standard" is a published specification that establishes a common language and

contains a technical specification or other precise criteria; it is designed to be used
consistently, as a rule, guideline or definition. For the purpose of the Contract the term
- 16 -

(GTCL)

"standard" also encompasses the expression code of practice and regulation.

(2)
The design, execution and completion of the Works shall be governed by, but not
limited to, the applicable standards and codes listed in the following table:
Table 1.1 List of Applicable Standards and Codes
REFERECE
PUBLICATION TITLE
AGA Report No. 3
Orifice Metering of Natural Gas (Part 2); specification and

installation requirements
AGA Report No. 7
Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters
AGA Report No.8
AGA Compression factor of Natural gas and Hydrocarbon

gas Report No.8
AGA Report No.9
Measurement of Gas by Multi-path Ultrasonic Meters
API1104
Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related Facilities
API 2530
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards
API 2534
Measurement Control Charts and Statistical Methods for

Petroleum Metering Systems
API RP 17A
Pipe Flanges and Pipe Fittings
API RP 500
Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations
API RP 550
Manual on installation of Refinery, Instruments and Control

Systems
API RP 551
Processing, Measurement, Instrumentation
API RP 554
Process Instrumentation and Control
API RP2003
Protection against Ignitions arising out of Static Lighting and

Stray Currents
API Spec 2B
Fabrication of Structural Steel Pipe
API RP 750
Management of Process Hazards
ASME B l .20.l
Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch
ASME 816.5
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASMEB16.9
Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings
ASME B16.10
Face to Face and End to End Dimension of Valves
ASME B16.11
Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B16.20
Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges, Ring Joint, Spiral Wound

and Jacketed
ASME B16.21
Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

- 17 -

(GTCL)

REFERECE
PUBLICATION TITLE
ASME B16.22
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings
ASME B16.25
Butt welding Ends
ASME B16.36
Orifice Flanges
ASME B18.2.1
Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series, including Hex
Cap Screws and Lag Screws
AS ME B18.2.2
Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B46.1
Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay)
ASME PTC 19.1
Measurement Uncertainty
BS 7430
Earthing
BS 6031
Code of practice for earth works
BS EN 1992-1-1:2004
BS EN 1993-11:2005
Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for

buildings
Design of steel structures. General rules and rules for
buildings
DIN 10204
Certification Requirements
EN 10204
European Standards - Certification Requirements
ERA 69-30
Current Rating Standards for Distribution Cables
GPA 2172
GPA 2261
Publication for Calculation of Gross Heating Value, Relative

Density and Compressibility Factor for Natural Gas Mixtures
from Compositional Analysis
Publication for Analysis for Natural Gas and Similar Gaseous
Mixtures by Gas Chromatography
IEC 76
Power Transformers
IEC 79
Equipment for Hazardous Areas
IEC 79-10
IEC 79-13
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres, Part 10;

Classification of Hazardous Area
International Electro Technical Commission-Construction
and Use of Rooms or Buildings Protected by Pressurization.
IEC 228
Conductors of Insulated Cables
IEC 331
Fire Resistant Cabling and Wiring
IEC 332
Flame Retardant Cabling and Wiring
IEC 364-5-54
Electrical Installations of Buildings Pan 5; Selection and

Erection of Electrical Equipment, Chapter 54; Eanhing

- 18 -

(GTCL)
REFERECE

PUBLICATION TITLE
Arrangements and Protective Conductors
IEC 446
IEC 502
IEC 529
Identification of Conductors by Colors or Numerals

Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Power Cables for Rated
Voltage for l KV up to 30 KV
Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by
Enclosures
IEC584
Thermocouples
IEC 605
Equipment Reliability Testing
IEC 654
Operating Conditions for Industrial Process Measurement and

Control Equipment
IEC 751
Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensors
IEC 754
IEC 801
IEC 1034
Test on Gases Evolved During Combustion Of Electric

Cables
Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial-Process
Measurement and Control Equipment
Measurement of Smoke Density of Electric Cables Burning
under Defined Conditions
IEC 60228
Plain annealed copper, stranded, class 2
IEC 60502-1
XLPE
IEC 60332-3 Cat A
Outer sheath
IEC 61508
IEC TC 65
Functional Safety of Electrical / Electronic / Programmable

Electronic Safety Related Systems
Software Safety (WG9) and Functional Safety-Generic
Aspects (WG I 0)
IEE Wiring
Regulations
Regulations for Electrical Installations
IEEE C37.90.1
Guide for Surge Withstand Capability Tests
ISA S5.I
Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
ISA S5.2
Binary logic Diagrams for Process Operations
ISA S5.3
Symbols
for
Distributed
Control/Shared
Instrumentation, Logic and Computer Symbols
ISA S5.4
Instrument Loop Diagrams
ISA S20
Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control

Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves

- 19 -
Display

(GTCL)

REFERECE
PUBLICATION TITLE
ISA S51.1
Process Instrumentation Terminology
ISA RP-5517
Hardware testing of Digital Process Computer Codes of

practice testing computer based system.
ISA S71.04
Environmental Conditions
ISA SP84/E/E
Programmable Electronic systems for Use in Safety

Applications
ISO 1519
Paint and Varnishes - Bed Test (Cylindrical Mandrel)
ISO 2632
Roughness Comparison, Specimens Spark Eroded, Shot

Blasted and Grit Blasted, Part II
IS0 2714
L1quid
hydrocarbons-Volumetric
Measurement
by
Displacement Meter Systems Other Than Dispensary Pumps
IS0 2808
Paint and Varnishes - Determination of Film Thickness
IS0 3170
Petroleum Products Liquid hydrocarbons Manual Sampling
IS0 3511
Process Measurements Control Functions Instrumentation

Representations
ITU-T G711-G729
Coding of voice and audio signals
ITU-T V35 serial
Wideband modems
ITU-TX21 serial
Interfaces
ITU-T X805
Security architecture for systems providing end-to-end

communications
MSS SP-9
Spot-Facing for Brorue, Iron and Steel Flanges
MSS SP-25
Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings Flanges and

Unions
MSS SP-44
Steel Pipe Line Flanges
MSS SP-45
By-pass and Drain Connections
MSS SP-53
MSS SP-54
Quality Standard for Steel Castings- Magnetic Pantcle

Method
Quality Standard for Steel Casting - Dry Particle Magnetic
Inspection
MSS SP-55
Quality Standard for Steel Castings- Visual Method
MSS SP-61
Hydrostatic Testing of Steel Valves

- 20 -

(GTCL)

REFERECE
PUBLICATION TITLE
MSS SP-80
Bronze Gate, Globe and Check Valves
MSS SP-82
Valve Pressure Testing Methods
MSS SP-92
Valve User Guide
NFPA 101
Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Building and Structures
NFPA 110
Emergency and Standby Power Systems
NFPA 321
NFPA 496
Standard on Basic Classification of Flammable and

Combustible Liquids
Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment
OSHA
Construction Standard for Excavations
RS-222-C
Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna

Supporting Structures
SAMA PMC 33.1C
Radio Frequencies Sensitivity Test
UTM
Universal Transverse Mercator
(3)
The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with all of the above standards and codes
at all stages of implementation of the Works. In the event of conflict between the
various listed standards, the stricter provisions shall prevail.
(4)
The Contractor shall comply with all Safety Legislation and Regulations prevailing in
Bangladesh insofar as they are applicable to the carrying out of the Works.
(5)
The Contractor shall be responsible for sourcing and obtaining copies of the latest
edition of all standards and codes, of which two copies of each shall be provided to the
Engineer.
(6)
The latest versions of the above standards and codes shall be applicable for
implementation purposes unless otherwise specifically stated elsewhere in this
document.
(7)
If circumstances are encountered in which the requirements of a standard or code cannot

be met, then a variation request shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the
Employer. The Contractor shall provide full technical justifications for such variation
request.
(8)
Where specific standards, codes of practice or industry norms are stated in this
document, the Contractor may however use any other standard that will result in the
quality of the Works being equivalent to or higher than the quality that would have
resulted through the application of the stated standard.

- 21 -

(GTCL)
(9)

All of the relevant standards are to be adhered to and used in the integrated and
interdependent manner in which the issuing body intended.
(10) In certain areas of science and engineering there are no published standards. In such
cases the Contractor is obliged to ensure that in the design, execution and completion of
the Works the Contractor has at all times complied with established "best practice". To
demonstrate compliance the Contractor may draw upon the latest technical references in
such areas and refer thereto in the preparation of the Design.
(11) The Contractors technical documents for their design, installation, commissioning and
testing shall identify the standards which are applied to.
1.7
UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS
The following units shall be used in this project:
Length
Mass
Temperature
Pressure
Differential Pressure
Flow rate - GAS
Flow rate - liquid (Large flows)
Flow rate - liquid (Small flows)
Flow rate - Gas & Air
Level
Viscosity
HC gas concentration
Toxic gas concentration
Velocity
Density
Area
Volume
Time
Gas Volume
1.8
Meters (m), millimeters (mm)

Kilograms (kg)
Degrees Celsius (c) & Degrees (F)
Bar(g) and PSIG
Bar, psig, mm WC
MMSCFH, MMSCFD
m3/hr
Liters / min.
mmscf d [@ 15 deg. C & 101.3 kPa (abs)]
Milli meters (mm) for storage tanks
% for process equipment
mPas , Cp
%LEL
ppm
m/s, fps
kg/m3
m2
m3
Sec
MMSCF
SITE CONDITIONS AND AREA CLASSIFICATION

Location
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
Hazardous Area
Onshore
Minimum 5 deg.C
Maximum 55 deg.C
Minimum 85 %
Maximum 90 %
Generally, Zone-1, Gr. IIA/B Temperature Class T3.
However, Contractor to verify the exact site conditions during detailed engineering and supply all
instruments and systems suitable for those site conditions and area classifications.
All enclosed equipment structures to be supplied shall be constructed to allow free airflow to
- 22 -

(GTCL)

dissipate heat generated. Construction shall be such that ventilation grills will not be obstructed
when equipment is mounted in its installed position.
All equipment to be supplied shall withstand international standards of vibration for industrial
application.

- 23 -

(GTCL)
2.
SCOPE OF WORK
2.1
INTRODUCTION

(1)
The Project shall be implemented by turnkey EPC (Engineering, Procurement,

Construction and Commissioning) Contract. The Contractor Scope of Works shall
include, but are not limited to, project management, field survey, engineering, detailed
design, manufacture, testing, supply, installation, construction, site testing, precommissioning, commissioning, training, quality systems and post-implementation
services.
(2)
The Contractor shall be liable for the correctness and completeness of design,
engineering, implementation and documentation in accordance with the requirements of
the EPC contract specifications and must demonstrate their ability to meet an acceptable
level of technical expertise, experience, and resources to provide a complete system.
(3)
The major Scope of Supply for SCADA and radio equipment shall include, but are not
limited to the following:
a)
b)
Rehabilitation of existing system which shall include the following :

1)
Supply of control equipment for 2 Control Centers MCC and ACC. Each
control center is equipped with Operating Terminals, Printers, Large size
monitor, Engineering stations, SCADA servers etc. and Application
servers for Load Balancing and Leak Detection.
2)
20 Telemetry Stations out of which 11 stations will be functional under the

proposed system
3)
54 new RTUs in place of existing RTUs
Expansion of the system which includes the following :1)
32 new RTUs are to be installed.
2)
2 RTUs for future gas sites
3)
10 Operating Company Terminal (OCT)
c)
Survey Work for Radio path propagation for wireless Access link
d)
Supply of all SCADA and Communication equipment
e)
Supply of Field Instrumentations such as Pressure Transmitter, Differential

Pressure Transmitters (for flow measurement), Temperature Transmitters,
Turbine type Flow meters, Flow computers and valve limit switches.
f)
Supply of GPS based Time System for synchronization of entire SCADA System
(4)
The Contractor shall supply all items / equipment, tools & test equipment, software,
installation materials etc. as required to integrate and install the new SCADA systems
complete in all respects.
(5)
Supply of Spare parts of all the supplied items.

- 24 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
(6)
(7)

EPC Contract Services defines the major scope of services to be undertaken by the EPC
Contractor for the engineering, procurement, construction, Pre-commissioning and
Commissioning of the Project.
Engineering
Procurement
Construction
Pre-Commissioning & Commissioning
Quality systems
All other Requirements for the EPC Work
The Contractor shall develop the Project Execution plans necessary for the
implementation of the project. These plans shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
Procurement including List of Sub-contractors.
Project Management.
Logistics and Transportation.
Construction.
Site Temporary facility.
Environment, Health and Safety Measure.
(8)
The Site Information & Scope of Work is based on a conceptual design and provides
basic information of each site and an overview of each site's scope of work. The
Contract is a turnkey EPC Contract therefore; the Site Information & Scope of Work
does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for any aspects of the design and
implementation, nor for allowing for any variation between the Site information &
Scope of Work and the specific aspects of implementing the Contract Works.
(9)
The Contractor's responsibility at site shall include all the activities necessary to be
performed to complete the entire job as per the contract requirements including the
following as a minimum.
a) Receipt of hardware, software and checking the adequacy and completeness of
supply.
b) Storage, safety, security of the equipment & other materials including software at
site.
c) Installation of the complete system including power supply, earthing, cable
terminations,
d) Calibration,
e) Civil and electrical works.
f) Checking of equipment installation.
g) Checking of interconnection and overall system functionality.
h) On line / Offline debugging of the system.
i)
Coordination
interfacing

(including
- 25 -
obtaining
relevant
details)
SCOPE OF WORK
with

(GTCL)

Instrumentation sub-Contractor, Cathodic Protection (CP) System & Electrical

contractor, Telecom sub-Contractor directly or through Employer for any disputes.
j)
On line testing and commissioning of SCADA system.
(10) The contractor shall complete all electrical works associated with the installation and
commissioning of the equipment, earthing of equipment at all sites. Powering of
equipment at all sites, termination of cables as required.
(11) The Contractor shall design and provide AC power and backup power supply for the
New SCADA System and New Communication System equipment. The existing rated
power supply is 230V AC single phase, 50 Hz.
(12) The Contractor shall carry out pre-installation civil works to provide foundations or to
prepare sites and buildings for the installation of the New System.
(13) The Contractor shall remove and dispose of unnecessary existing equipment for the
installation of the New System.
(14) The Contractor shall design and construct foundations and sunshades for new RTUs at
Additional Sites.
(15) The Contractor shall refurbish existing foundations and sunshades for the replacement
of existing RTUs at Original Sites, if necessary.
(16) The Contractor shall design and construct the instrument stands with foundations and
sunshades at sites where new instruments are installed.
(17) The Contractor shall refurbish existing instrument stands with foundations and
sunshades, if necessary, for the continuous use of existing instruments.
(18) The Contractor shall design and install antenna hoisting masts at RTU sites, as required.
(19) The Contractor shall refurbish existing equipment rooms to accommodate new SCADA
and Communication equipment according to the requirement.
(20) The Contractor shall carry out soil investigation BS 5930 or equivalent if it is required
for the design of foundations mentioned above.
(21) The Contractor shall furnish all documentation, drawings and other information required
by employer, operation & maintenance manuals, and handbook of inventory of all the
equipment supplied and installed in (hardcopy and softcopy) along with as built
documents, drawings and CDs of the complete project as per final EPC tender
requirements.
(22) The Contractor shall submit all necessary documents to indicate in details how he
proposes to plan, schedule, monitor and control progress of the work.
(23) The Contractor shall submit data related to execution plans, procedures and
organizational information dedicated to this project.
(24) The Contractor shall perform all drawings on appropriate CAD system and provide
GTCL with copies of the software utilized.

- 26 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

(25) The BID documents shall be submitted in form of hard copies and electronic copies (in
PDF File Format for the whole documents in addition to CAD File Format for all
drawings).
(26) Contractors are also requested to submit drawings which summarize all the existing
SCADA systems and the expected expansions and modifications.
(27) All documents developed by the Contractor shall be subject to timely and Pre-defined
periods of approval by GTCL, and shall be submitted in Hard and Soft copies.
Basic engineering package.
Master schedule.
Budget plan.
Alternative analysis report.
Functional design specification.
Engineering drawings.
Required bill of materials.
Resources allocation plan.
Investment requirement.
Cost Estimation.
Project execution plans.
EPC Tender Package.
Planning and procurement for good and services.
Mobilization plan.
Required purchases.
Any other necessary services.
(28) The Contractor shall develop status and maintain a complete deliverables list that
indicates the current status of the following:
Description of Deliverables
Schedule of execution of deliverables including reviews and approvals
Final project delivery date
(29) Upon award the contractor is requested to arrange a kick off meeting to initiate the
work, in addition to regular interim meetings to review and follow up the progress of
work, which shall preferably be carried out at various milestones of the work. Details of
discussion and the required information are to be mutually agreed in advance as
discussed in Cl. No. 3.1.10.
(30) In case statuary clearance / license is required for setting up / operating of the UHF
Telemetry radio system and IP Microwave radio system as well as leasing E1 lines, the
same shall be obtained by the contractor and all required liaison works shall be
undertaken by the Contractor. Necessary supporting documents and endorsement which
are essential for such procedures will be provided by the Employer.
- 27 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

(31) The Contractor will, during the time of detail engineering and installation of the quoted
system, interact and coordinate with any other agency regarding collection / retrieval of
inputs / information / data and all such works shall be under the scope of this
Contractor.
(32) Any additional plant, equipment, material, services which are not specifically mentioned
here, but are required to make the system complete in every respect in accordance with
the intent and technical specification and for safe operation and guaranteed
performance, shall be deemed to be covered under the scope of this specification.
2.2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
(1)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the Project Management, and nominate a single
Project Manager to be mainly based in Bangladesh. The Project Manager shall be the
point of contact during the Contract and shall be responsible for all aspects of the
Contractor's work including, but not limited to, program management, progress
reporting, finance, safety and technical compliance.
(2)
The Contractor shall produce a Project Plan as specified in Section 3.2.1. This shall
address both Bangladesh and overseas based activities.
(3)
The Contractor shall monitor performance against the Project Plan and produce monthly
reports detailing progress, activities undertaken, problems and future activities.
(4)
The Contractor must have following personnel as minimum to be posted in Bangladesh

for proper execution of this project.
Sl. Position /
No. Discipline
1
Project Manager
Number of
Engineers
One (1)
Project Engineer
Two (2)
SCADA Engineers
Two (2)
Instrumentation
and Control
Engineers
Two (2)

Qualification
Experience
(Minimum)
Graduate Engineer 12 years experience
or equivalent
in Project Execution
Work, out of which 6
years in SCADA /
Telecommunication /
Instrumentation /
Automation System
Graduate Engineer 6 years experience
or equivalent
in the field of
SCADA /
Telecommunication /
Instrumentation /
Automation System
Graduate in
4 years experience
Electrical /
in Design /
Electronics /
Installation /
Telecommunication Commissioning of
/ Computer
SCADA System
Engineering or
equivalent
Graduate in
4 years experience
Electrical /
in Design /
Electronics /
Installation /
Mechanical /
Commissioning of
- 28 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

Telecommunication Two (2)

Engineers
Electrical Engineer
One (1)
Civil Engineer
One (1)
Health & Safety

Officer
One (1)
QA / QC Engineer
One (1)
10
Material controller
One (1)
Instrumentation /
Automation
Engineering or
equivalent
Graduate in
Electrical /
Electronics /
Telecommunication
/ Computer
Engineering or
equivalent
Graduate in
Electrical
Engineering
Graduate / Diploma
in Civil
Engineering
Graduate / Diploma
in Fire & Safety
Graduate Engineer
or equivalent
Diploma in
materials
management or
equivalent
Instrumentation &
Control System
4 years experience
in Design /
Installation /
Commissioning of
Telecommunication
System
4 years experience
in Electrical Works
4 years experience
in Civil Works
4 years experience
in Fire & Safety
works.
4 years experience
in QA / QC Works
4 years experience
in warehouse
management.
Contractor shall submit their organizational set-up and a list of key management and
specialist position for this project. The Contractor must also have suitably qualified
engineers in their design office for the above mentioned disciplines for complete detail /
design engineering of the SCADA project.
(5)
The Contractor shall monitor performance against the Project Schedule and produce
Weekly, Monthly & Quarterly reports detailing progress, activities undertaken,
problems and future activities. Contractor shall also prepare & submit any other reports
deemed necessary for proper execution of the project.
(6)
Contractor shall have materials management division for proper handling & storing of
materials.
(7)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit health, safety plan & programs. He shall ensure
that the construction work is carried out according to the safety plan as well as the
safety measures prescribed in the Safety Program.
The format and the contents of the reports must be approved by GTCL.
2.3
SITE INVESTIGATION
(1)
The Contractor shall be responsible for defining and implementing all necessary Site
investigations, including a sampling and testing program.
(2)
The purpose of the Site investigations shall be to identify and quantify those
- 29 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

characteristics or properties of the materials found on or under the Site for use in the
design and execution of the Works. The definition of what investigation is required shall
take into account the data provided at the bid stage and any assumptions or conclusions
drawn from such data with respect to the characteristics or properties of materials.
2.4
ENGINEERING AND DETAILED DESIGN

(1)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the engineering and detailed design of the New
System in accordance with the requirements specified in this document. All drawings &
documents shall have Engineer approval.
(2)
Contractor shall prepare and submit basic and detail engineering drawings & documents
as required for the project. Drawing & Document deliverables shall not be limited to
submission of
a)
Inception report,
b)
Design basis report,
c)
Radio path propagation report of wireless access link,
d)
System Configuration and Architecture drawings,
e)
Layout plan for all locations
f)
Power supply distribution drawings,
g)
Cable list,
h)
Cable interconnection diagrams,
i)
Hook up drawings,
j)
IO list,
k)
Instrument list,
l)
Equipment GA drawings,
m) Panel layout,
n)
Wiring diagrams,
o)
O&M Manuals,
p)
Quality plan,
q)
All test reports, FAT & SAT reports,
r)
All associated fabrication, construction and civil drawings,
s)
As-built drawings,
t)
Site inspection related documents etc.
All drawings and documents shall be prepared and submitted according to site list. A
Detailed list of Drawing & Document deliverables shall be furnished by the Contractor.
(3)
Contractor shall have an Engineering department with adequate engineering personnel

and design tools required to maintain project schedule.
(4)
Design document shall be prepared in English.

- 30 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
2.5

MANUFACTURE
The Contractor shall manufacture the equipment required for the New System in accordance
with the design.
2.6
2.7
FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT)

(1)
The Contractor shall perform the Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) of the equipment
manufactured for the New System before any item of the equipment is packed or
delivered from the manufacturer's factory. Other requirements further illustrated in Cl.
11.3.1.
(2)
Testing & calibration of all instruments and Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) shall be
carried out by the Contractor. For any instrument / equipment, if required, Range /
calibration span, set points, reports etc. shall be modified by the Contractor during FAT
and commissioning. Testing & Commissioning shall be carried out as per approved
procedures. No instrument shall leave manufacturers works without successful factory
acceptance test. All necessary changes shall be incorporated / implemented as suggested
by Employer and / or Engineer to meet tender requirement without any cost to
Employer. As build drawing / final documentation to be submitted by the contractor
shall contain all such changes.
(3)
The FAT shall be witnessed by the Employer and / or the Engineer. Employer / its
representative may witness testing of any or all items at various stages during
manufacture and / or at final stage before shipment at their discretion.
PRE-INSTALLATION SITE WORKS

The Contractor shall be responsible for pre-installation site works including, but not limited
to, the following works:
2.8
(1)
The Contractor shall refurbish existing rooms, foundations and sunshades where
equipment is installed prior to the installation works as specified in clause 10.
(2)
The Contractor shall construct the foundations and sunshades for new equipment prior
to the installation works as specified in clause 10.
(3)
The Contractor shall carry out all necessary cabling works prior to the installation works
as specified in Clause 9.
INSTALLATION
(1)
The requirements for delivery and installation are specified in greater detail in Section 5.
(2)
The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery of all equipment, materials and tools to
Bangladesh and onward to the sites.
(3)
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate and appropriate storage
facilities for all equipment, materials and tools.
(4)
The Contractor shall install equipment in accordance with the design, specification,
safety plans and method statements.

- 31 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
2.9
2.10

SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)

(1)
The requirements for SAT are specified in greater detail in Section 11.3.2.
(2)
The Contractor shall perform the Site Acceptance Test (SAT) of the equipment and
software for the New System after they are fully assembled / installed at sites.
(3)
Installation Tests shall be carried out on individual Subsystem location by location after
the completion of equipments physical installation.
(4)
The SAT shall be witnessed by the Employer and the Engineer.
COMMISSIONING
The Contractor shall carry out commissioning tests to demonstrate the satisfactory operation
of the New System prior to Taking-Over as specified in Section 11.3.3.
2.11
SYSTEM TAKING-OVER
Following satisfactory completion of the Final System Tests as specified in Section 11.3.4
and provided the other requirements have been met, the System Taking-Over shall take place
when the Employer commences full operation of the New System.
2.12
2.13
2.14
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT

(1)
The requirements for the operation and maintenance support are specified in greater
detail in Section 12.
(2)
The Contractor shall support two years warranty period along with Operation and
Maintenance (O&M) support.
TRAINING
(1)
The requirements for training are specified in greater detail in Section 13.
(2)
Training shall be provided to the Employer's staff during installation, commissioning,

operation and maintenance of the New System. This activity shall be scheduled to allow
these staff to contribute to the site testing and setting work.
TEMPORARY SITE FACILITIES
2.14.1 General
(1)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all necessary temporary facilities for the
implementation of the Project.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide temporary office, messing and accommodation facilities at
four (04) suitable places within the area of the SCADA Rehabilitation Project. The
preferred locations are Demra / Narayanganj, Ashuganj, Sylhet and Chittagong.
(3)
The Contractor shall provide accommodation and food for the Employer and the
Engineer where travel back to Dhaka or temporary camps is not feasible in a day.

- 32 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

(4)
The Contractor shall provide temporary office and accommodation facilities for the
Employer.
(5)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for locating and arranging the use of sites for
the temporary facilities, temporary accommodation and such utilities as required by the
Contractor, the Employer and the Engineer.
(6)
The Contractor shall provide all Transport, Materials, Tools, Engineers, Supervisors,
Specialist, etc. as required for all temporary and for permanent works throughout the
project duration. Contractor shall also provide necessary transport facility for his
employees.
(7)
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office at the Site, during Installation,
Testing & Commissioning phase, for his staff, and such office shall be open at all
reasonable hours to receive instructions, notice or other communications as per the
advice of the Employer / Engineer.
(8)
The Contractor shall provide all temporary camp facilities and transport facilities within
three (3) months from the effective date of the contract and with a demobilization period
of up to three (3) months after issuance of the Operational Acceptance Certificate.
(9)
Appropriate storage for the materials to be supplied in this contract will be arranged at
the site by the Contractor at various stations after the materials have been received. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the storage, security and safety of all materials, tools
etc. brought by the Contractor for the installation and commissioning of the system at
the site.
(10) Alcohol, liquor, firearms and drugs shall be strictly forbidden in the camp area and
construction site.
2.14.2 Local Site Facilities
In addition to that required by himself, the Contractor shall provide, in areas where travel
back to Dhaka / temporary camps is not feasible in a day, local site facilities for the Employer
and the Engineer including:
(1)
Indoor working space at site (or reasonably close to the site) with adequate office
furniture for the Employer and the Engineer (minimum 6 staff).
(2)
Full board accommodations for the Employer with following facilities:

a) One air conditioned bedroom for each staff
b) Western style attached and / or common bath room with hot water
c) Communication facilities such as internet connection and / or facsimile
2.14.3 Office Facilities

2.14.3.1 General
(1)
In addition to that required by himself, the Contractor shall further provide the following
facilities at each of Demra / Narayanganj, Ashuganj, Sylhet and Chittagong;
a) Project Office
- 33 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

b) Computer equipment
for the exclusive use of the staff of the Employer and the Engineer during the
construction period and with a demobilization period of up to three (3) months after
issue of the Taking-Over Certificate.
(2)
All items in Sections 2.14.3.3 shall become the property of the Employer at the time of
issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
2.14.3.2 Project Office

The Contractor shall provide office space adequate for minimum 6 staff with following
facilities, and be responsible for the security, cleaning and regular maintenance for each
camps.
(1)
Two (2) nos. Air conditioned office rooms each aprrox. Size of 200 sq.ft.
(2)
1 No. air conditioned meeting room.
(3)
Broadband internet connection and LAN system with regular maintenance.
(4)
Office furniture adequate for the entire office space mentioned above.
(5)
Kitchen with cold & hot water supply, refrigerator, table wares and other necessary
facilities for tea / coffee and light meal services.
(6)
Toilets adequate for minimum 6 staff's use.
(7)
Fire extinguishers in accordance with local regulation.
(8)
Office boys to provide general office service.
(9)
Provision of all consumable items for daily office use throughout the Project.
(10) Adjacent parking space for minimum 2 vehicles.

2.14.3.3 Office Equipment
As a minimum the following computer equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and be
dispersed as directed by the Engineer:
(1)
4 Nos. latest reputable brand name latest desktop PC with UPS.
(2)
6 Nos. latest reputable brand name laptop PC with modem
(3)
4 Nos. A3/A4 size color laser printer and scanner
(4)
4 Nos. photocopier
(5)
Latest version of following software shall be pre-loaded on all PCs mentioned above
and also provided on DVD-ROM:
a)
Genuine latest Microsoft Windows
b)
Microsoft Internet Explorer
c)
Microsoft Outlook
d)
Microsoft Office
e)
Word module for word processing in Bangla script
f)
Microsoft Project
g)
Anti-virus software

- 34 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
h)

AutoCAD
2.14.4 Living and Messing Accommodation

The Contractor shall provide four (4) fully furnished houses (or flats) with following facilities
for the accommodations of the Employer starting from after three months of the contract
effective date and with a demobilization period of up to three (3) months after issue of the
Taking-Over Certificate at each of Demra / Narayanganj, Ashuganj, Sylhet and Chittagong.
The contractor shall be responsible for the security, cleaning and regular maintenance.
(1)
Six air conditioned bedroom with attached bathroom at Ashugaonj.
(2)
Four air conditioned bedroom with attached bathroom at Demra / Narayanganj, Sylhet
and Chittagong.
(3)
Accommodation shall be provided in an executive floor comprising individual rooms

with attached toilet and a common lounge with toilet facilities in between the two
rooms. Each shall be in accordance with the following minimum requirements:
a) Lounge : Fully carpeted, furnished with 1 set sofa, desk and chair, one / two drawer
lockable filling cabinet and one steel lockable cabinet and fitted with
television, video and satellite receiver.
b) Bedroom : Fully carpeted, furnished with one single bed, side table, side light,
wardrobe, table chair and drawers.
c) Bathroom : with western style W.C., pedestal sink, shower, hot and cold running
water.
(4)
Separate air conditioned site office of approximately 120 sq. meter total floor area and 3
meter high from floor to roof springing level, comprising 2 individual offices each of 12
sq. meter minimum floor area, one office of 22 sq. meter minimum floor area.
(5)
Each room shall be individually lockable dead locks and the external doors of the
building shall be fitted with dead locks. Each room shall have at least one insect
screened window, which shall have secure fastenings. All office rooms shall be air
conditioned and have at least two walls mounted, 3 pin, 15 amp electric socket outlets
and a minimum of two no. twin tube ceiling mounted fluorescent lights to provide
adequate illumination for work at night. There shall also be at least two shelves
250mmX1500 mm fitted to the walls of each office.
(6)
The contractor shall also be responsible for supplying necessary stationeries required for
camp office.
(7)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, issuance, maintenance and
cleanliness of the camp, facilities and temporary accommodation, for himself and the
staff of the Employer, for the duration of the construction period up to three months
after issuance of the Operational Acceptance Certificate, and the dismantling and
removal of the same and reinstatement of the site upon completion of the period.
(8)
The site office and equipment supplied to the Employer are deemed to be part of the
Contractors camp facilities and temporary accommodation and as such, are subject to
approval in accordance with the contract. At least three western style toilets and three
hand basins complete with hot and cold running water shall be provided for the
exclusive use of Employer and the Engineer and his staff.
(9)
A common dining facility shall be centrally located for employers. All rooms shall be
fully lit and decorated and provided with curtains, linen, cutlery and crockery etc. all as
required to complete the accommodation to a fully first class condition.
- 35 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)

(10) The Contractor shall provide for daily cleaning of all accommodation and provision of
bed linen and laundry facilities.
(11) Hot water supply at all bathrooms and kitchen.
(12) Kitchen, Dinning and Lounge space
(13) Accommodation shall be on a full board basis, minimum 3 meals per day per person.
Food shall be 1st class Bangladeshi standards, served and prepared in a hygienic
manner.
(14) Satellite TV
(15) Fire extinguishers in accordance with local regulation.
(16) Three meals per day for all staff
(17) Cooks and bearers necessary for daily meal, cleaning and maintenance.
(18) Provision of all consumable items for general daily use.
(19) Adjacent parking space for minimum 2 vehicles.
2.14.5 Supply of Electricity and Water
(1)
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all arrangements for, and charges
associated with, the provision and use of drinking quality mineral water and electrical
power (230V 50Hz) to the offices, living and messing accommodation for the duration
of the Construction Period until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
(2)
Drinking water quality shall be subject to independent laboratory tests at the expense of
the Contractor.
(3)
Attention is drawn to the non-reliability of electricity supplies from the National Power
Grid in Bangladesh. Supplies of power are often discontinuous for several hours during
each day. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an independent full capacity diesel
fuelled generator system, as standby, for supply of electricity to the offices, living and
messing accommodation.
2.14.6 Inspection Equipment

The Contractor shall supply for the exclusive use of the Engineer and his staff the equipment
required for inspection of the works. This equipment will be retained by the Employer at the
time of issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing following inspection and safety equipment
for the exclusive use of Employer:
(a)
Thickness gauges
(b)
Measuring tapes
(c)
Safety gaggles
(d)
Safety shoes
(e)
Helmets
(f)
Rain coats
(g)
Umbrella

- 36 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
(h)
Hand globes
(i)
Ear plugs

2.14.7 Communication Facilities:

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing Eight (8) numbers of cellular phones to
facilitate communication for the exclusive use of Employer during construction period. Four
(4) cellular phones bill shall not exceed BDT 3000.00 per month / per set and other four (4)
phones bill shall not exceed BDT 2000.00 per month / phone, whose ceiling is BDT 3000.00
per month / per set and shall continue to be with the Employer up to 3 months after issuance
of Operational Acceptance Certificate.
2.14.8 Vehicles
(1)
The contractor shall provide for the exclusive use of the Employer or their staff, the
following vehicles from within 15 days of the effective date and for the duration of the
contract. These vehicles will become the property of the contractor at the time of
issuance of the Operational Acceptance Certificate.
(2)
Eight (8) nos. four wheel drive vehicles (five doors, minimum 2800 cc and seven seated
including driver with air conditioner) are to be supplied by the Contractor with POL and
driver during execution of the project.
(3)
All vehicles supplied by the Contractor shall be good and in a fully roadworthy
condition and make / model not below 2010. The Contractor shall pay all costs
including CD-VAT, tolls and other payments necessary to allow Employers personnel
to use them freely in all public highway between Employers Head office, Dhaka &
project areas and continue to make such payments until issuance of the Operational
Acceptance Certificate.
(4)
The Contractor shall insure all the above vehicles fully comprehensively for driver and
all passengers up to the issuance of the Operational Acceptance Certificate. The
insurance company shall be registered in Bangladesh and policies approved by the
Employer prior to delivery. Receipts of premium payments shall be submitted to the
Employer and copied to the Employer at the time of delivery of the vehicles, Full policy
documents shall be submitted to the Employer within 84 days of delivery.
(5)
The contractor shall provide fuel, oil, and other consumable for these vehicles
throughout the contract until the issuance of the Operational Acceptance Certificate.
(6)
The Contractor shall maintain all vehicles supplied by him in fully roadworthy
condition, including routine maintenance and all repairs and replacements as they
become necessary. Should any vehicle be off the road for maintenance purpose for more
than 24 hours, the contractor shall supply an equivalent vehicle at no extra cost for the
duration of the period of service. All the conditions in this Clause shall apply to the
replacement vehicle.
(7)
If any vehicle is lost, damaged or stolen whilst in the possession of the Employer, the
Contractor shall immediately provide an equivalent replacement vehicle, at his own
expenses. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any legal and insurance
procedures resulting from any of the above eventualities.

- 37 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
(8)
(9)

All vehicles shall be equipped with the following:

a)
Water carrier of approximately 20 litre capacity
b)
Fuel carrier of approximately 20 litre capacity
c)
Shovel
d)
Hi-lift jack
e)
One spare wheel, with tyre
f)
Sump guard, track guard and front fender grill bars
g)
Seat covers, floor mats and cleaning materials
h)
First aid kit, including blanket
i)
Normal emergency tool kit
j)
Fog light facilities.

The Contractor shall pay all costs including payments necessary to allow them to be
used freely on all public highways in Bangladesh and shall continue to make such
payments throughout the duration of the Contract until the issuance of the Taking-Over
Certificate.
(10) The Contractor shall insure all the above vehicles fully comprehensively for any driver
and all passengers up to 90 days after the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate. The
insurance company shall be registered in Bangladesh and the policies approved by the
Employer prior to delivery. Receipts of premium payments shall be submitted to the
Employer with copy to the Engineer at the time of delivery of the vehicles. Full policy
documents shall be submitted to the Employer and copy to the Engineer within 30 days
of delivery.
(11) The Contractor shall provide fuel, oil and other consumables for these vehicles
throughout the Contract until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
2.14.9 Assistance
(1)
The Contractor shall render all necessary assistance to the Engineer and his staff in their
inspection, evaluation and supervision of the Works.
(2)
The Contractor shall also provide such other labour as required to attend night time
office security and cleaning and other requirements and where required to assist the
Engineer and his staff in measuring, supervising, testing, checking and examining the
Contractor's work whether by day or night.
2.14.10 CD-VAT Charges on Imported Items

(1)
The Employer shall be responsible for the payment of CD-VAT charges on items of
imported Materials and Plant incorporated in the Permanent Works.
(2)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of CD-VAT and other duties and
charges of all imported items and consumables provided as required in this section 2.14.

- 38 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
2.15

THE EMPLOYER'S SCOPE OF WORK

For smooth implementation of the Project, Employer (GTCL) shall be responsible to
undertake the following items.
(1)
Undertakings by GTCL
a)
Procedures for lands

In this Project, procured equipment and materials will be installed at the Sites
owned by GTCL or other companies who belong to the gas sector and have gas
business with GTCL. Therefore, necessary land-use permissions have been
obtained by GTCL so that the Contractor can start their work without any delay.
b)
Communication system lease contract between GTCL and BTCL

GTCL has decided to select the communication system provided by BTCL as the
communication backbone for the GTCL SCADA System. Accordingly, the lease
contract between GTCL and BTCL shall be made within one (l) month of Notice
to Proceed to the EPC Contractor.
(2)
Works by GTCL
a)
Assistance shall be provided by GTCL for checking soundness of all existing

cables, availability of normal mains power, limit switches and junction boxes at
existing RTU sites.
b)
For the detection of a gas leakage from the pipelines covered by the Project, the
precise measurement of gas flow at whole intake and off take points shall be
indispensable. Therefore, the current situation of the relevant points with respect
to the gas flow measuring capability shall be checked and necessary
countermeasures shall be taken by the Contractor. GTCL will provide required
assistance for successful implementation of leak detection.
c)
The following information shall be provided by GTCL as a part of the tender

document for the turnkey EPC Contract:
(i)
Detailed information, such as the type and exact location of whole intake
and off take points, valve stations, metering stations, etc., on GTCL and
other related gas pipeline networks

- 39 -
SCOPE OF WORK

(GTCL)
3.

CONTRACTOR'S KEY MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES

This chapter identifies the requirements of the Employer with respect to how the design,
execution and completion of the Works are to be planned, managed and administered by the
Contractor. For the most part of it sets out detailed requirements that are to be read in
conjunction with the more general requirements stipulated in the Conditions of Contract,
particularly (but not limited to) the requirements of the following subsections:
(1) Administrative Matters
(2) Programming and Planning
(3) Quality Management Systems
(4) Variations and Adjustments
3.1
ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS
3.1.1
Co-operation
The Contractor shall, as specified in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer, allow
appropriate opportunities for carrying out work to:
(a) the Employers Personnel,
(b) any other contractors employed by the Employer, and
(c) the personnel of any legally constituted public authorities,
who may be employed in the execution on or near the Site of any work not included in the
Contract.
Any such instruction shall constitute a Variation if and to the extent that it causes the
Contractor to suffer delays and/or to incur Unforeseeable Cost. Services for these personnel
and other contractors may include the use of Contractors Equipment, Temporary Works or
access arrangements which are the responsibility of the Contractor.
If, under the Contract, the Employer is required to give to the Contractor possession of any
foundation, structure, plant or means of access in accordance with Contractors Documents,
the Contractor shall submit such documents to the Engineer in the time and manner stated in
the Specification.
3.1.2
Contractor's Documents
(1)
Certain Contractors Documents are specified in the Contract as being required by the
Engineer for review. The submission of such documents and the subsequent review
thereof shall be carried out under the provisions of Conditions of Contract.
(2)
In respect of any of those Contractor's Documents where the Contract is silent on the
need for submission, the Contractor is not required to submit such documents unless the
Engineer specifically requests the Contractor to do so. This is intended to ensure that the
Engineer is not inundated with data that is not critical to the review process, and the
Contractor is expected to cooperate with the Engineer to ensure that this intention is
realized in practice. The Contractor shall nevertheless provide or provide access to such
other documents when so requested, including the following:

- 40 -
CONTRACTORS KEY MANAGEMENT

RESPONSIBILITIES


(GTCL)
(3)
a)
Administration Documents: these are documents for discussion between the

Contractor and the Engineer in order to facilitate the establishment of various
management and communication systems, for example, those with respect to
Quality Management Systems. Such documents are indicated in the Employers
Requirements, and the level of detail required will be agreed between the
Engineer and the Contractor.
b)
General Records: documents such as those produced by the Contractor to record

and document his work and which are to be handed over to the Employer on
completion of the Works. Such documents are to be available for inspection by
the Engineer on request and at all times.
c)
Particular Records and Reports: documents such as those to be produced by the

Contractor to record and document his work or report on particular aspects
thereof.
Contractors Documents shall, except where stated or agreed otherwise, be created in

the latest commercially available versions of the software shown in Table I, as
appropriate to the required application.
Table 1- Software to be Used
Text-based documents
Microsoft Word
Spreadsheets
Microsoft Excel
Drawings
AutoCAD
Graphics
Adobe Photoshop or equivalent
Database
Microsoft Access
Programming
Microsoft Project
(4)
Where the Contractor proposes to use software not listed above, then he shall seek the
Engineers approval of his proposal and provide two licensed copies of each type of
software and any upgrades thereof for the permanent use of the Employer's Personnel.
(5)
Contractors Documents shall be submitted in a manner that allows for the transmitted
data to be stored on a computer server and input into a database for monitoring the
subject and status of submissions. Where the editorial integrity of the content of the
document is of concern, the document may be provided in a protected format. In such
cases, a version of the document that allows the contents to be accessed and used by the
Employers personnel is also to be provided. In addition, paper hardcopies shall be
provided where stipulated.
(6)
All Contractor's Documents shall be stored and referenced by the Contractor in such a
manner as to allow the Employer's Personnel to readily locate, retrieve and inspect any
particular document. If the time for submission of a Contractors Document required for
review is not explicitly stated, then it shall be submitted in such order and at such times
as to allow it to be reviewed properly before implementation is required.
(7)
The specific requirements for Contractor's Documents arc identified in the relevant parts
of the Contract. The following section identifies the broad categories of such documents

- 41 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

and the administrative procedure governing their submission.

3.1.3
Design Submissions
(1)
(2)
The purpose of the Design Submissions is to allow the Employer's personnel to:
a)
Monitor the progress of design
b)
Satisfy themselves that the design is being performed and verified in a competent,
professional manner
c)
Satisfy themselves that the design can be effectively and safely built
d)
Satisfy themselves that the Contractor is complying with any other obligation
under the Contract.
The Contractor is required to submit the design work required for review, including
specifications, in the following order of stages:
a)
Stage 1 - Preliminary Design
b)
Stage 2 - Detailed Design
(3)
The Contractor is not authorized to proceed to the next stage of design until he has
received from the Engineer a notice of "no objection" for the stage of design under
review.
(4)
The Design Submissions shall be structured, referenced and presented in a manner that:
(5)
a)
Facilitates the achievement of their intended purpose
b)
Allows them to be filed to form part of what will eventually be a comprehensive,

integrated and complete record of the design.
A time schedule covering the submission of the Contractor's Documents related to

design (the Design Submission Schedule or DSS) shall be incorporated as part of the
Programme referred to in the subsection Programming and planning. The DSS shall
identify the attributes of each Design Submission. The minimum attributes shall be:
a)
The Design Stage covered by the submission (either the Conceptual Design, the
Preliminary Design or the Detailed Design)
b)
Whether the design work covers Permanent Works or Temporary Works
c)
Where Facility references are applicable, the appropriate code for that part of the
Works forming the subject of the submission
d)
The date by which the submission is due
e)
The date for completion of the review.
(6)
Except as may otherwise be agreed with the Engineer, the Design Submission for each
respective Facility shall be comprehensive and cover the entirety of the design for that
Facility. Partial Design Submissions for a Facility will not be acceptable to the
Engineer. The review period for any Facility shall be deemed not to have commenced
until such time as the Contractor has submitted the full design according to the
requirements as stipulated herein.
(7)
Should the Engineer not require a particular aspect of the design to be submitted for
- 42 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

review, then this will be identified by the Engineer on a copy of the DSS returned to the
Contractor.
3.1.4
As-Built Documents
(1)
The As-Built Documents shall be comprised of:

a)
Drawings of the Permanent Works as installed (including a 'family tree' index

incorporating all drawings from suppliers and subcontractors), indicating all
changes made to the original Drawings issued for construction / installation
purposes
b)
Specifications of the Permanent Works as installed, indicating all changes made to

the original Specifications issued for construction / installation purposes
c)
A copy of all Variations and Change orders issued by the Engineer during the
execution of the Works
d)
A full report on all non-conformities identified and corrective measures taken
e)
A copy of all construction records, including all test results
f)
A copy of all Standards and Codes of Practice applicable to the Works, and
g)
Operation and maintenance documentation, including all applicable product

information, required to operate and maintain the system.
(2)
Drafts of the As-Built Documents shall be submitted in paper hard-copy format (5

copies) with the exception of the item (e) stated above. The finally agreed set of AsBuilt Documents shall be submitted in 1 original and 5 paper copies, together with 2
editable soft copies. For the Standards and Codes as described in item (e) above, 1
original paper hard format or 1 CD-ROM format shall be submitted.
(3)
A copy of all indicated software provided for operating and maintaining the completed
Works (i.e. software especially written or standard software customized by specialists),
together with all supporting documentation relating thereto (including "Help" files and
the like), shall be provided by the Contractor to complete the As-Built Documents
submission data.
(4)
The original design shall be clearly distinguishable from what has been built. On
drawings, this may be achieved by layer separation, line colour or line type, or a
combination thereof. In the Specifications, this shall be achieved by any changes being
identified in red. Where words have been deleted from the Specifications, the deleted
words shall remain in view but be struck through with a line.
(5)
Each change from the original design shall be referenced to the authorization giving rise
to that change.
(6)
The documentation of Variations to the Works arising from Conditions of Contract

[Variations and Adjustments] shall be in paper hard-copy format. Each variation shall
be assigned a unique reference code and shall be contained in a separate file identified
with the Variation reference number. The file shall contain all communications and
documents related to that variation, filed in chronological order. A table of contents
shall be provided at the front of each file.

- 43 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)
3.1.5

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

(1)
The Contractor is required to prepare an operating and maintenance manual for the
System. Specifically, manuals must be prepared to explain how all items of equipment
and systems are to be correctly operated and maintained. The manuals are to be written
in English, and are to be fully illustrated. They are to be in a consistent format as agreed
with the Engineer to facilitate use, and are to form an integrated whole. Except where
otherwise identified in detail for specific items of equipment and systems, the manual
shall comprise of individual sections on all discrete areas of operations.
(2)
The manuals shall contain Maintenance Plans covering all aspects of the Works. Each
such plan shall be prepared to ensure that any design life requirements are met in full,
and it shall be prepared to maximize the service life. All items that are not considered to
be maintenance-free shall be identified, and recommendations shall be given for the
frequency and mode of inspection, the means of access, materials, tools and special
equipment required, and methods of carrying out the maintenance work. Where
proprietary materials and components are incorporated in the Works, details of the
manufacturer and supplier, including addresses, telephone numbers and Internet
information shall be provided.
(3)
Professionally printed and bound copies of each approved manual, in the numbers
required, together with a CD-ROM copy thereof, are to be supplied to the Engineer
before a Taking-Over Certificate is issued for that section of the Works in which the
relevant equipment or system is required to function. The first drafts in paper hard-copy
format of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, illustrating the structure and the nature
of the contents, shall be submitted at the Detailed Design Stage. The format of manuals
shall contain the following as a minimum requirement:
Stationery: The Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be produced on good

quality A4 size paper and placed in a suitable A4-4-hole ring-binder.
Index: An index which conveniently and logically sets out the format of the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Part of this index shall be a contents tick
sheet. This format is a minimum requirement. All items shall be listed regardless of
actual document contents. Items included are to have a tick in the appropriate box.
Installation: A general description of the installation in regard to location and

function. The description should include all process parameters associated with the
installation and should be supported by general arrangement drawings.
Operation: Operating instructions are required for all items of equipment and shall
contain the operating procedures of the systems, in addition to the emergency and
abnormal conditions procedures.
Procedures: The operating procedures shall be set out in step-by-step instructions

with each step numbered in correct logical sequence and include:o
Login procedures
Restarting servers, workstations and sub-systems
Switching between main and standby servers
Report generation

- 44 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)
3.1.6

In service checks and limits including routine test procedures.
Adding a new I/O point to the system
Design: A design and technical section which shall include:o
Detailed descriptions of equipment and systems including detailed drawings

where available.
Technical data for all plant as installed.
Test and performance data.
Schematic and logic diagrams
A list of alarms detailing alarm initiator location and setting for alarm
operation and re-set.
Trouble Shooting: A trouble process based on symptoms and including suggested

frequency of inspection of components and frequency of routing maintenance. The
programme shall include details of the points at which measurements should be
taken, details of the normal readings at those points and the possible reasons for
abnormal readings.
Site Test Appendix: Manuals shall include an Appendix for insertion of site
commissioning and acceptance test results.
Software: All software associated with the project shall be included in CD/DVD
format as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual (included in a DC wallet
with the hard copy)
Provision of Standards
Two copies in English (together with an additional copy of the original if not in English) of
all standards, guidelines, codes of practice or similar used by the Contractor are required. The
copies are to be provided in advance of, or with, any Design Submission or submission to
which they relate and, in general, in advance of when they may be required by the Engineer.
Where standards and the like are available from the issuing authority on CD-ROM, they shall
be provided to the Engineer in that format. Where the original standard is not in English, an
English translation shall be made and certified by a qualified translator.
3.1.7
Drawings and Specifications

(1)
The Drawings shall show information that is best or most conveniently presented in a
pictorial or tabular form, supplemented by appropriate notes thereon. The Specifications
shall provide all other necessary information in text, tables and figures with respect to
the materials to be used and the standard of workmanship required to enable the Works
to be manufactured, fabricated, constructed, installed, commissioned, tested and
operated as designed.
(2)
The Works shall be completed in full accordance with all Drawings and Specifications
that have been submitted for the Employers review and against which the Contractor
has not received notice from the Employer that such Drawings and / or Specifications
fail to comply with the requirements of the Contract.

- 45 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)
3.1.8
Method Statements
(1)
Method statements describe how particular aspects, parts, stages and elements of the
Works are to be executed. The Contractor is required to prepare method statements in
detail for all significant elements of work, to comply with the explicit or implicit
requirements of the Quality Management System referred to in this Chapter and / or to
enable verification that all health, safety and environmental requirements are being
complied with.
(2)
Where the method of construction influences any stresses (including transient stresses)
in a part of the Permanent Works, the method statement shall refer to the design
calculations identifying such stresses and demonstrate that they are allowable.
Specifically, method-related health, safety and environmental mitigation measures shall
be included. The method statement shall also contain an assessment of the risk
associated with the method to be used, in terms of safety, cost and time, and the
measures to mitigate such risk.
(3)
Method statements to satisfy the "type (a)" requirement stated above shall describe the
overall method for the construction of a major aspect, part or stage of the Works and in
all cases shall be submitted to the Engineer without the need for the Engineer to request
them. They shall identify the resources required and the organization and application of
those resources. Temporary Works shall be identified, and the method statements shall
reference the design of the Temporary Works.
(4)
Typical topics that will need to be addressed under "type (a)" method statements are:
(5)
3.1.9

a)
Procurement of major equipment and materials
b)
Transport, storage and handling procedures for major equipment and materials
c)
Installation of the System including mechanical completion and precommissioning tests, and interface coordination with the other SCADA & PLC
systems
d)
Commissioning of the Systems
e)
Tests after completion.
The method of manufacturing, fabrication and installation (including systems

integration, commissioning and testing) is, except where specifically defined in the
Contract, at the discretion of the Contractor. Accordingly, the Contractor is required to
prepare "type (b)" method statements for all significant work elements, fully describing
the methods to be employed. Each such method statement shall describe in detail the
process to which it refers, a description of the techniques to be used and the
qualification requirements of any specialist personnel that will be needed to apply those
techniques. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a list of all such
method statements that he proposes to prepare, referencing them to the relevant part of
the Employer's Requirements, the Drawings and the Specifications. The Engineer shall
indicate to the Contractor on a copy of such list those method statements that the
Engineer wishes to review.
Systems Design Methodology
3.1.9.1 Purpose of System Design

- 46 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

(1)
The purpose of the management and validation of the system design by the Contractor is
to provide a systematic framework of activities and reporting that confirms the
convergence of the system design upon the fulfillment of the performance and
programme requirements.
(2)
Design Submissions shall be subdivided into the following stages:

a)
Preliminary Design (required prior to commencement of production)
b)
Detailed Design (after completion of Factory Acceptance Tests and prior to

shipment)
c)
Acceptance Design (after completion of Site Acceptance Tests and Trial

Operations)
d)
Final Design (after expiration of the Defects Notification Period).
3.1.9.2 Methodology
The Employer requires that within the Contractors methodology for undertaking the design
process it can be clearly seen that:
(1)
The Contractor understands the complexity and interactive nature of the design task
(2)
The implementation plans and procedures are already fully developed and the
implementation methodology appears sound
(3)
The selection of technologies and subsystem specifications are based upon consistent
and coherent analysis
(4)
Design freeze(s) will be properly documented and will be fully auditable internally and
externally across the Contractor's organization
(5)
Systems assurance disciplines arc systematically applied to subsystem specification and

design, and to the validation of system integration
(6)
Validation, by means of testing and commissioning, training, certification, etc. is

systematic, coherent and conclusive.
3.1.10 Meetings
(1)
Meetings shall be in either Dhaka or on the Site, as deemed appropriate by the Employer
/ Engineer. Meetings shall be attended by the Contractors personnel responsible for the
subjects under discussion, supported as necessary by the appropriate technical staff. The
types of meetings to be arranged and the personnel to be in attendance, including any
limitations on numbers in order to ensure that the meetings are productive, shall be
agreed between the Employer / Engineer and the Contractor from the outset of the
Contract. Ad hoc Meetings that are not part of the regular schedule of meetings may be
convened according to the requirements of the parties, but shall be restricted as far as
possible to only those necessary to progress the completion of the Works.
(2)
The convening party shall prepare and distribute an agenda by such time before the
meeting as is to be agreed between the Employer / Engineer and Contractor, together
with any information necessary for the proper conduct of the meeting. Progress and
coordination meetings shall be held regularly at intervals not exceeding one month, and
- 47 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

at such shorter intervals as may be dictated by the rate of progress or the need to resolve
matters that might otherwise result in delay to the Works.
3.1.11 Coordination with Other Persons and Organizations
(1)
Except where otherwise directed by the Engineer, all others working on the Site will be
required to attend a coordination meeting on a weekly basis. The purpose of the meeting
shall be to resolve any problems arising from the conflict of activities or access. In the
event that any such matters cannot be resolved by discussion, the Engineer's wishes or
decisions on the matter shall prevail. No claims for delays or additional costs will be
considered where arising from (i) shared possession of Site, (ii) failure to coordinate
properly with others having the right to be on the Site or (iii) a decision of the Engineer
on such matters. The Contractor will be expected to have assessed the risk of such
delays and costs, and to have allowed for the same in his bid. Such meetings are to be
considered as supplemental to the meetings held solely between the Contractor and
other persons and organizations that may be required for daily coordination.
(2)
The Contractor shall obtain details of all operations by utilities authorities that may
affect the Works, and keep the Engineer advised thereof.
(3)
The Contractor shall, at the reasonable request of the Engineer, make available for
inspection by other persons and organizations having the right to be on the Site any
drawings, specifications or data prepared for the purpose of the Contract, with the
exception of those that contain confidential details concerning proprietary methods of
construction or design.
3.1.12 Liaison with Authorities

A single person, with a designated deputy in case of absence, shall be appointed by the
Contractor to be responsible for liaison and coordination of all communications between the
Contractor and those local and national authorities that need to be consulted or advised with
respect to the execution of the Works.
3.1.13 Reporting
(1)
The Contractor shall prepare such reports as may be required by the Engineer to explain
specific situations as they arise from time to time, in addition to the particular
requirements for reporting set out hereunder.
(2)
The Contractor shall submit a Monthly Progress Report to the Engineer within 7 days
following the end of each month. The topics covered shall include but not be limited to
the following:
a)
Executive Summary - description of highlights and progress achievements

(including actual verses planned progress and manpower).
b)
Areas of Concern - description of any issue that could have a detrimental effect on
the Works and an impact on cost or schedule
c)
Progress Summary - narrative description of progress in each phase of the

implementation work (Design, Procurement, Fabrication, Construction and
Commissioning)
d)
Permits and Certification - work permit status, environmental issues, safety,

- 48 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

health and MIGAS certification, etc.

e)
(3)
(4)
Quality Management System (QMS) - requirements are as described in section

3.3.4 herein.
The Monthly Progress Reports shall also include the following:

a)
Progress photographs showing evidence of procurement, fabrication and

construction progress in key areas, together with schematic drawings to show
installation progress of the RTU stations, Control Room Equipment, Electrical
room, Communication & MTS room equipment, and the construction of work
such as Cabling work, Instrument installation etc.
b)
The Master Time Schedule, showing current schedule status against baseline
c)
Manpower Histograms, showing planned and actual manpower status
d)
Planned work schedule for the following month
e)
Progress 'S' curves for each section of the Works and overall, showing planned
and actual percentages.
The Contractor shall also maintain a daily construction report in the form of a diary for
each separate working location on the Site, a copy of which shall be delivered on a daily
basis to the nearest Site office of the Employer's Personnel.
3.2
PROGRAMMING AND PLANNING
3.2.1
Planning
(1)
The Contractor shall ensure that the scope of work, programme and resource
requirements is clearly defined within the Project documentation.
(2)
The Project Manager shall break down the Project into manageable, discrete packages
of work and define these in a series of documents collectively called the Project Plan.
(3)
The Project Plan shall establish a clear and unambiguous understanding of interfaces,
responsibilities and standards by which the Project will be managed.
(4)
The Project Plan shall provide a resource profile showing the utilization of the staff
allocated to the job.
(5)
The Project Plan shall provide a single reference document throughout the life of the
project and shall be used to monitor the progress of the Project work.
(6)
The Contractor shall provide a Project Plan as described above. There are a variety of
influences, many particular to Bangladesh and the Project that will impact the Contract.
The Contractor shall evaluate and consider these in preparing the Project Plan and
reflect them in a realistic and balanced manner. These shall include but not be limited
to:
a)
The ownership of sites by several Operating Companies and other Third Parties.
b)
Approval for site works and access to sites from these Operating Companies and
other Third Parties.
c)
Minimized disruption to Operating companies and other Third Parties.

- 49 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

d)
The geographical spread of sites in relation to GTCL Operating sites, Franchise

Areas, Operating Company ownership and locations of the MCC and ACC.
e)
Staged passing of ownership to the Employer.
f)
Staged commissioning of some sites which are not currently operational.
g)
On-going development of sites under other projects.
h)
Scopes and programme of other gas development projects.
i)
Climatic and seasonal factors.
(7)
The Contractor shall appoint experienced management staff and proven project
management techniques to ensure that projects are completed to specification,
programme and cost.
(8)
The Contractor shall appoint a Project Manager who shall be responsible for all aspects
of the Project and shall act as the single point of contact for all communications with the
Engineer and the Employer.
(9)
The Project Manager shall be supported by a project team and ancillary staff to ensure
the successful execution of the Project.
(10) The Contractor shall appoint a full-time deputy to be based in Bangladesh from Award
of Contract and who will act as a point of contact for up to the commencement of
installation works whilst the Project Manager is in his home country.
(11) All Contract related correspondence from the Contractor shall be from the Project
Manager and addressed to the Employer / Engineer.
3.2.2
Programming
(1)
(2)
The purpose of the Programme required is to facilitate the Contractor's management of

the design, execution and completion of the Works. The purpose of submitting copies of
the Programme and related information to the Engineer is to allow the Engineer to:
a)
Monitor accurately the progress of the planning, design, procurement, installation,

testing, commissioning and Final Taking Over of the Works
b)
Monitor accurately the value of work completed
c)
Identify demands on the Employer's staff and to arrange staff to meet those
demands
d)
Identify the impact of events that may give rise to delay to completion of the
Works or any part thereof
e)
Satisfy the Engineer that all aspects of planning and coordination are being
performed in a competent, professional manner
f)
Satisfy the Engineer that the methods of installation to be used for the execution
of the Works are planned and are in accordance with the Contract
g)
Satisfy the Engineer that the Contractor is complying with his obligations.
The Programme shall be structured and presented in a manner that achieves the intended
purpose. The Programme shall be developed using the latest version of "Microsoft
Project'' in such a manner that it can be effectively copied to and legitimately used by
- 50 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

the Engineer.
(3)
The Contractor shall provide the Programme that details the packages of work against
time, key milestones and payment milestones and identifies inter-dependencies between
the packages and progress to date.
(4)
The Programme shall be multi-leveled containing a high level phased overview and
lower level programmes detailing work packages.
(5)
The Programme shall identify the following items as a minimum:

a)
Project, QA and Test Plans, draft and issue
b)
Submission of design drawings and documents for review
c)
Delivery of final drawings and documents for major items of equipment
d)
Placing of purchase orders for major items of equipment
e)
Receipt of materials
f)
Fabrication and manufacture
g)
Type, Unit and Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)
h)
System support and Installation Manuals, draft and final issues
i)
Delivery of major items of equipment and software, including the SCADA

System infrastructure, work stations and RTUs
j)
Site works commence and end dates by site
k)
Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)
l)
Final System Test
m)
Taking-Over
n)
Warranty Period
o)
Earliest and latest dates for the requisition of optional items in order to
incorporate them in the major item delivery Programme.
p)
The Programme shall be reviewed in each monthly report and progress against the
original Programme identified. In addition to this the Contractor shall review the
Programme in the light of developments and circumstances that have a bearing on
it monthly.
3.3
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (QMS)
3.3.1
Principles
(1)
The basic principles that the Contractor is required to adhere to with respect to the
management of quality are as follows:
a)
The quality of (i) the design, execution and completion of the Works and (ii) the
management systems necessary to bring the Works into effect are both to be
assured through the operation of a QMS designed to monitor those activities.
b)
The Contractor shall establish, document, implement and maintain a QMS for use
under this Contract, and must continually improve its effectiveness based on lSO

- 51 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

900I :2000 (or such later version as may apply on the Base Date).
(2)
(3)
3.3.2
c)
The Contractor's QMS must embody the principles contained in the ISO 9000
series of international standards such as will provide full documentary evidence
that the Works comply with the Contract.
d)
The Contractor's QMS shall apply equally to the Contractor and all his
Subcontractors, sub-consultants and suppliers, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for ensuring that such Subcontractors, sub-consultants and suppliers
faithfully adhere to the requirements of the Contractor's QMS.
e)
The procedures contained within the Contractor's QMS must have been proven to
be effective on projects of a similar nature, size and complexity.
The Contractor's QMS shall identify how:

a)
The quality of the Works is to be assured
b)
The quality of the work of Subcontractors, sub-consultants and suppliers is to be

assured
c)
Changes to the manner in which the Works are to be designed, executed and
completed are to be assessed, recorded, monitored and controlled.
The Contractor's QMS must cover all aspects of the Contractor's undertakings under the
Contract including, but not limited to, the following activities:
a)
Management
b)
Procurement
c)
Design
d)
Manufacture
e)
Fabrication
f)
Installation
g)
Construction
h)
Testing and verification
i)
Pre-commissioning
j)
Commissioning
k)
Completion
l)
Taking Over of the Works.
Quality Control and Verification of the Works

(1)
Quality Control and verification systems shall ensure and record conformance of the
Works with the Contract requirements and the documented Quality Plans. This shall
include where appropriate, quality monitoring of subcontractors / suppliers,
manufacturers, goods, services and workmanship.
(2)
Inspection and testing shall be carried out on goods, workmanship, construction,

finished work, functional performance and identification systems, to ensure
conformance with the Employer's Requirements.
- 52 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)
(3)
3.3.3
3.3.4

Where goods are supplied to the Contractor with recommendations or instructions as to

how they are to be assembled, handled, installed and/or operated, such
recommendations or instructions shall be adhered to.
System Monitoring and Performance Improvement

(1)
This team and its subordinate will identify the requirements with respect to how the
Contractor shall monitor the functioning and performance of the QMS, identify
problems and initiate corrective action.
(2)
The Contractor shall establish documented Procedures for monitoring and analyzing his
performance in relation to his objectives, product conformity and the satisfaction of
interested parties. The Procedures shall identify the issues for measurement and what
the needs are, and translate them into requirements. They shall identify what criteria are
applicable, what measurements are made and the methods of analyzing the data. The
issues for assessment shall include both achievement of performance objectives and
satisfaction of interested parties.
(3)
The Contractor shall identify actions for improvement from the monitoring and analysis
of his performance, and implement actions for continual improvement.
(4)
The Contractors monthly progress report shall include a summary of the monitoring
activities and results with an analysis of any trends and identification of improvement
actions.
(5)
The Engineer may at any stage of the Contract verify the correct application of the
Contractor's quality system by the application of Quality Audits during build and upon
completion of the manufacture of major items of equipment and upon completion of
major integration builds of software.
(6)
The Engineer may visit both the Contractor's and any of his Subcontractor's premises, at
mutually agreed times, in order to gain objective evidence that the level of quality
control is adequate to meet the requirements of the Contract. These visits may be in
addition to those necessary to undertake inspection and witness tests on completed
equipment or software.
QMS Reporting
(1)
(2)
The Contractor's monthly report to the Employer shall include a section on Quality
Management, which shall incorporate the following topics where applicable (not a11
topics listed are required every month):
a)
A summary of the status of QMS (including the status at the end of the last period,
with comments on progress, and the items anticipated during the next period)
b)
Analysis of conformity of product, including a summary of inspection and test

activities, results for the month, acceptability of results with reference to NCRs
and analysis of any trends
c)
Analysis of conformity with performance objectives, including a summary of

outstanding issues relating to the Contractor's QMS
d)
A summary of non-Conformities and Corrective Actions and their status.
In the regular progress meetings with the Engineer and other Employer's Personnel, the
- 53 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

Contractor shall report the status of the above items as appropriate and, in addition,
discuss:
3.3.5
3.3.6
a)
Any quality issues causing problems in order to agree on preventive or remedial

measures
b)
Items arising from the management review meetings that require revisions to the
Contractor's QMS.
QMS Documentation
(1)
The Contractor must submit all relevant records to the Employer when the Works or any
portions thereof are finally taken over. The specific contents of such records shall be as
required by the Engineer. The records shall be suitably indexed and labeled so that
records for specific sections or parts of the Works can be readily identified.
(2)
The Inspection and Test Plans may be in the Contractor's own format but shall include
as a minimum the following:
a)
The series of activities, including the inspections and tests performed in a logical
sequence appropriate to the type of work
b)
Reference to the Contractor's procedure / instructions used to control each activity
c)
The Specifications or standard reference
d)
The compliance criteria
e)
The personnel allocation for performing the activities, inspections and tests
f)
The frequency of the inspections or tests
g)
The type of verification document or check-sheet used to record the result of the
activity
h)
A facility for the Engineer to indicate his requirements to inspect or witness any
activities.
(3)
All records are to be made available for inspection by the Employer / Engineer. Copies
are to be submitted when so requested by the Employer / Engineer.
(4)
Each major item of equipment shall have a unique Certificate of Conformity,

substantiated by detailed results of inspections and tests. Batch-produced items such as
RTU enclosures may be covered by a Batch Certificate, providing all serial numbers of
equipment are shown and an appendix detailing the acceptance parameter bands within
which the controlled parameters have been found to conform.
(5)
Records generated to substantiate the attainment of performance and design standards

shall be retained for at least 5 years and shall be filed / archived to enable access by the
Engineer.
HEALTH & SAFETY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HSMS)

(1)
The Contractor shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the safe working
practices of the Employer, details of which will be provided on requisition in writing to
the Engineer.
(2)
No explosive or other dangerous substance shall be brought onto any site or used for
- 54 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

any purpose unless the Contractor has previously obtained the written approval of the
Engineer.
3.4
(3)
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility during the works to ensure that the handling,
storage and use of any dangerous substances follow the safe working procedures to
ensure the Health and Safety of all personnel and property.
(4)
The Contractor shall ensure, and give written details if so requested by the Engineer,
that the materials used in the construction of the works, or those required for operation
after take-over, does not in themselves or in any combination lead to the production of
other dangerous substances, materials or conditions.
VARIATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Variations may be initiated by the Engineer at any time prior to issuing the Taking-Over
Certificate for the Works, either by an instruction or by a request for the Contractor to submit
a proposal.
The Contractor shall execute and be bound by each Variation, unless the Contractor promptly
gives notice to the Engineer stating (with supporting particulars) that (i) the Contractor cannot
readily obtain the Goods required for the Variation, or (ii) such Variation triggers a
substantial change in the sequence or progress of the Works. Upon receiving this notice, the
Engineer shall cancel, confirm or vary the instruction.
Each Variation may include:
a)
changes to the quantities of any item of work included in the Contract (however,
such changes do not necessarily constitute a Variation),
b)
changes to the quality and other characteristics of any item of work,
c)
changes to the levels, positions and / or dimensions of any part of the Works,
d)
omission of any work unless it is to be carried out by others,
e)
any additional work, Plant, Materials or services necessary for the Permanent
Works, including any associated Tests on Completion, boreholes and other testing
and exploratory work, or
f)
changes to the sequence or timing of the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall not make any alteration and / or modification of the Permanent Works,
unless and until the Engineer instructs or approves a Variation.

- 55 -

RESPONSIBILITIES

(GTCL)

4.
DESIGN GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1
SYSTEM ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
4.2
4.3
(1)
The design life of the system infrastructure shall be 15 years. The electronic equipment
shall have an operating life of 10 years minimum.
(2)
The SCADA System shall be designed, manufactured and installed such as will ensure
that modifications and / or extensions can be executed safely, with no disruption of the
operation of the Pipeline System.
(3)
Database in the SCADA servers of the MCC and the ACC shall form part of a
redundant pair arrangement or the like. The database of the MCC and the ACC shall be
synchronized to be maintained as a redundant pair database. Moreover, SCADA server
in MCC / ACC shall be configured each in redundant application.
(4)
In case of a failure on the SCADA server system of the MCC, a switch over to the
SCADA server system of the ACC shall take place to continue scanning and storing
data from the RTUs.
(5)
In the event of a communication failure between any RTU and the MCC / ACC, the
RTU shall continue scanning and storing data from the field devices and subsystems.
After such communication failure is rectified, all missing data at the MCC or the ACC
shall be transmitted from the respective RTU.
(6)
The MCC and ACC SCADA master computer shall generate reliability reports on
demand, including summaries, fault categories, trends and frequency of failure of
specific components.
RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY

(1)
The reliability of the SCADA System shall ensure that the monitoring and control
functions shall not contribute to degradation of operations due to the loss of control of
safety-critical functions. The architecture of the SCADA System shall effectively
exploit software and hardware redundancy to achieve high operational reliability.
(2)
The basic design of the SCADA System shall be based on a 24 hour per day, 365 day
per year operation. The availability of the SCADA System will be 99.7%.
MAINTAINABILITY
(1)
The SCADA System maintainability design shall be consistent with the availability
requirements. In particular, diagnostic time, replacement component availability,
software loading and validation shall be analyzed and defined in Design Submissions.
(2)
The SCADA System shall include comprehensive self-diagnostic checking facilities.

The equipment design, including software design, shall incorporate modular or
component replacement principles, as appropriate, to minimize downtime.
(3)
On-line error detection capabilities within the RTU and detailed reporting to the
connected stations of detected errors.

- 56 -

(GTCL)
4.4
4.5

(4)
Local indication of major RTU failures.
(1)
Equipment requiring routine maintenance shall be able to be maintained without loss of

view. Also IO module replacement and I/O tagging shall be maintained with on-line
status.
EXPANDABILITY
(1)
The SCADA shall support a scalable architecture for future expansions. It shall be
possible to add additional RTUs and HMI Workstations without the need for additional
servers. Expansions to database sizing shall be simple (such as entering a new
authorization code) and shall not require additional software installation. In addition, the
SCADA shall allow communications with a wide variety of control devices utilizing off
the shelf driver packages.
(2)
The SCADA System shall be capable of expansion to support 200 RTUs.
(3)
GTCL plans to expand their natural gas pipeline network. The other SCADA system
dedicated for those planned pipelines will be prepared. The SCADA System shall have
an interface with the other SCADA systems and capability to monitor whole pipeline
network expanded in the future. An OPC compliant server will be used for the SCADA
server.
SPARE CAPACITY
(1)
All parts of the system (I/O, operator stations, RTU interface etc.) shall have the
capability of further expansion by an additional 25% to cater for future expansion. This
includes all aspects including hardware, software, firmware and communications.
(2)
Sufficient point/tag software licenses shall be furnished to cover the entire initial scope
of the Project, including all configuration databases, control modules, I/O points and
HMI displays.
(3)
Point/tag licenses shall be provided for all spare I/O capacity, specified and included
with the system.
(4)
All operator stations must be capable of viewing all tags, databases, trends and HMI
displays.

- 57 -

(GTCL)
5.
PROCUREMENT
REQUIREMENTS
5.1
INTRODUCTION
5.2
5.3
AND

CONSTRUCTION
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
(1)
This section covers the procurement and construction / installation of the system and its
components both at the factory and on site.
(2)
Detailed requirements for procurement and construction / installation are specified in

Chapter 6-10.
PROCUREMENT
(1)
The Contractor shall be responsible to the procurement and delivery including all related
activities for all equipment and materials to be supplied under this Contract into
Bangladesh and onwards to the final locations.
(2)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Procurement Plan to the Engineer outlining
the methods, procedures and schedules for all procurement and related activities
required for the Project. The Procurement Plan shall be submitted for the review of
Engineer no later than 45 days from the Commencement date, and it shall include a
sample of each standard form to be used for such activities.
(3)
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with bi-weekly reports on the procurement
status of all equipment and materials, or more frequently when requested by the
Engineer. Any deviation from the schedule on any of these items must be reported
immediately to the Engineer with an explanation given for each deviation from the
schedule and the proposed action plan to correct the situation.
(4)
No deliveries to Sites shall be made without prior written approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall allow in his program a period of two weeks for this permission to be
given.
(5)
The Contractor shall make visits to site to identify the conditions for delivery and
temporary storage prior to installation.
GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION

(1)
The Contractor shall install all equipment and construct all associated facilities under
this Contract.
(2)
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any existing facilities at sites are
not damaged by Contractor's activities.
(3)
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any operations of existing gas
facilities at Sites are not interrupted by Contractor's activities.
(4)
The Contractor shall note that at many locations, new equipment is to be installed
alongside existing equipment which is operational and must continue to operate during
and after the installation.
(5)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the temporary power generation at remote Sites
- 58 -
PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION /

INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(GTCL)

where commercial power supply is not available.
5.4
5.5
(6)
The Contractor shall carry regular inspection of Sites to ensure that installation of
equipment and construction of associated facilities are in accordance with the specified
requirements.
(7)
The Engineer will carry out regular inspection of Sites to verify that installation of
equipment and construction of associated facilities are in accordance with the specified
requirements.
(8)
The Contractor shall rectify any installation or construction work identified by the
Engineer that is not in accordance with the specified requirements.
SITE ACCESS AND CLEANLINESS

(1)
The Contractor shall set up the system for requesting access to Sites for the Engineer for
all visits required to complete the Contract Works.
(2)
Where the Contractor's staffs are required to be accompanied by the Employer or the
Engineer or the staff from another Operating Company, it shall be assumed that the
normal hours of work that they will be available for shall be Sunday to Thursday 09:00
to 17:00 hours inclusive of travel time to the agreed working place.
(3)
The Contractor shall ensure that Site is left in a clean, tidy and orderly state and all
equipment, materials and tools are stored in the designated location and waste materials
are removed on completion of a day of work or particular activity.
HAZARDOUS AREAS AND DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES

(1)
The Contractor shall be responsible to follow the safety procedure and regulation of
each Site operated by the Employer or other operating companies.
(2)
No explosive or other dangerous substance shall be brought onto any Site or used for
any purpose unless the Contractor obtains the written approval of the Engineer.
(3)
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the handling, storage and use of any
dangerous substances follow the safe working procedures to ensure the Health and
Safety of all personnel and property.
(4)
The Contractor shall ensure, and give written details if so requested by the Engineer,
that the materials used in the construction of the works, or those required for operation
after take-over, does not in themselves or in any combination lead to the production of
other dangerous substances, materials or conditions.

- 59 -
PROCUREMENT AND CONSTRUCTION /

INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(GTCL)
6.

SCADA SYSTEM
The purpose of SCADA system is to ensure efficient, effective and reliable control,
management and supervision of pipeline from both the Master Control Center (MCC) and the
Auxiliary Control Center (ACC) using Remote Terminal Units located at suitable locations
along the pipeline.
The Master Control Center (MCC) shall be the central operating center to monitor and control
the pipeline network.
The Auxiliary Control Center (ACC) shall be the hot-standby operating center with the same
functionality and operating capability as the MCC.
The Communication between MCC SCADA Server at Dhaka and ACC SCADA Server at
Ashuganj shall be through redundant (1+1) high speed high bandwidth communication link to
be provided by suitable service provider.
RTUs will be used for control and monitoring of pipeline parameters like flow, pressure,
temperature, valve open / close status, pig arrival indication through pig signaler, CP
parameters, electrical parameters etc. and update the MCC / ACC SCADA stations. The
SACDA station will also be used for remote opening / closing of selected valves.
The data from the RTUs will be collected at respective MTS and transported to MCC and
ACC through a communication system described in Cl. No. 7.
There shall be a Web server for SCADA system at MCC and ACC. The communication link
between GTCL SCADA System and Operating Company Terminal (OCT) at ten (10)
locations of franchisees shall be established through web server of GTCL SCADA Server.
6.1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS

The SCADA System shall be based on a network of distributed processor and communication
links with multilevel functional tasks incorporating:
6.1.1
(1)
Master Control Center (MCC) at Dhaka as the main control center
(2)
Auxiliary Control Center (ACC) at Ashuganj as the hot-standby control center
(3)
WAN communication network
(4)
Remote Terminal Units(RTUs)
(5)
Operating Company Tenninal (OCT)
(6)
Interfaces to controlled and monitored equipment.
MCC
MCC shall be configured with the following system components as a minimum;
(1)
2 No. SCADA server (redundant application, OPC and ODBC compliant)

- 60 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

(2)
One Web Server
(3)
4 No. HMI workstations
(4)
1 No. pipeline application (leak detection and load balancing) console including
necessary sub-systems and components
(5)
2 No. Laser printers (1 no. color, 1 no. monochrome)
(6)
2 Nos. 67 inch Large screen monitor (flat panel LCD monitor with LED backlight type)
(7)
Ethernet LAN (redundant)
(8)
Backup or data archiving system
The SCADA System shall have capability to accommodate the other SCADA system
prepared for new pipeline.
6.1.2
ACC
ACC shall be configured with the following system components as a minimum;
6.1.3
6.1.4
(1)
2 No. SCADA server (redundant application, OPC and ODBC compliant)
(2)
One Web Server
(3)
4 No. HMI workstations
(4)
1 No. pipeline application (leak detection and load balancing) console including
necessary sub-systems and components
(5)
2 No. Laser printers (1 no. color, 1 no. monochrome)
(6)
2 Nos. 67 inch Large screen monitor (flat panel LCD monitor with LED backlight type)
(7)
Ethernet LAN (redundant)
(8)
Backup or data archiving system
RTU
(1)
The RTU is a device that is required to be installed at each Site to collect data, code the
data into a format that is transmittable and transmit the data to the MCC and the ACC.
RTUs shall also collect information from the MCC and ACC and implement processes
that are directed by the MCC and ACC. RTUs shall be equipped with input channels for
sensing or metering, output channels for control, and a communication port.
(2)
88 RTUs shall be required as mentioned in RTU list (Appendix-3).
Operating Company Terminal (OCT)

Operation data can be monitored at the following operating companies. These OCT
shall be the same as the HMI workstations to be installed at MCC / ACC to monitor the
- 61 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

whole GTCL pipeline network operation accessing to the SCADA server at MCC /
ACC through communication backbone prepared by the Project.
SL.
NO.
CODE
SITE
20-CML-100T
Comilla Head Office
10-ASH-204T
BGFCL Head Office
10-HOR-300T
Horipur Head Office
30-PBG-500T
TITAS Head Office
10-JAL-600T
Jalalabad Head Office
30-PBG-700T
Petrobangla Head Office
20-FAU-701T
Sanghu Onshore Process Plant
20-FAU-702T
KGDCL Head Office
30-PBG-701T
Chevron Head Office
10
30-DMR-401T
Demra SCADA Office
The following equipment shall be equipped as minimum for each of the above OCT:
a)
HMI: 1
b)
Color printer: 1
c)
UPS (30 minutes power supply during power failure): 1
The following equipment shall also be provided for monitoring at the head office at
Dhaka.
a)
HMI workstation : 2
b)
Engineering Workstation : 1
6.2
SCADA SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
6.2.1
General
(1)
The SCADA System shall be based on a standard SCADA system including hardware
and software that must have been proven in use in one or more similar applications for
at least 2 years, and which is a Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) system. The
application history shall include safety-critical systems.
(2)
All equipment to be provided for the SCADA System shall be provided with standard
interfaces and open system software to communicate with RTUs and other subsystems,
to enable system expansion and upgrade interconnection model or similar standard.
(3)
Monitoring and controlling the entire Pipeline System shall be a microprocessor based
SCADA System with personal computer-based and/or work station based operator
consoles configured with HMI software for operator interface.

- 62 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
(4)
6.2.2

The SCADA System CPU load shall occupy a maximum of 60% when all programs for
the SCADA System are running simultaneously.
Scalability:
The SCADA software must have a modular structure. It shall be possible to expand the
SCADA system by adding additional redundant pairs of SCADA servers. All data from one
server must be seamlessly available from another SCADA server or clients of that other server
without the need to replicate any databases and do any double configuration. The system shall
be configured and expanded on-line without stopping the system. Online editing or
modification shall be provided for graphics, item (tag) definitions, reports and I/O drivers.
6.2.3
6.2.4
Data Acquisition and Control

(1)
The SCADA shall provide data acquisition and control facilities to communicate with
RTUs using standard software drivers and shall not require any programming to
implement. All configurations shall be permissible while the server is on-line without
interruption to data acquisition and control on other channels.
(2)
The SCADA shall be capable of supporting communication links to networks of RTUs.

Each connection shall operate independently of the others and facilities shall be
provided by SCADA displays on the Operator Interface to individually place the
channels in service or out of service. The SCADA shall provide the minimum features
as stated below:
interfacing with the field equipment;
continuous communication link monitoring with automatic fail-over;
collecting data;
translation of data types
easy expansion or upgrade of the field stations
(3)
Once a RTU is configured and placed in service, the SCADA shall automatically begin
background diagnostic scanning of the device to ensure that communications are
monitored independently of any data acquisition scanning. The SCADA software shall
have diagnostic tools for analyzing problems / running conditions and for optimizing
performance of the system.
(4)
The SCADA shall support acquisition of data using either:

a)
Periodic Scanning (routine polling)
b)
Report by exception (user request, alarm initiated by RTU, for remote control)
(5)
In order to minimize communications traffic, the SCADA shall automatically combine

data requests using contiguous addresses and the same scan interval to generate scan
packets, optimizing throughput for a given scanning load. The SCADA shall also
provide utilities to examine scan packet allocation for each scan interval and compile
aggregate statistics on communication channel usage.
(6)
The SCADA system shall scan all RTU within less than 15 minutes.
Custom Graphic Display

- 63 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

Custom graphics shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Detailed Design
submission. The custom graphics shall include but not be limited to the following:
(1)
Pipeline overview
(2)
Schematics for each individual station, with process data and facilities status
(3)
Trend graphics
(4)
Alarms and events management
(5)
Alarm annunciator and SDV operation graphic
(6)
Control display for changing set points and control algorism
(7)
Failure records and fault category.
(8)
The SCADA system shall come with a set of standard displays to allow immediate
operation of points without need to develop any custom displays. Minimum displays to
be included:
Point Detail display for each type of point supported e.g., Analogue, Digital
Composite, Totalizer etc.
Faceplates / popups for operator control of each point type;
Alarm Summary, Event Summary, Sequence of Events Summary, System Alarm

Summary
SCADA Diagnostic displays
SCADA System details displays, e.g. detail display for communications to a
SCADA controller (PLC / RTU)
SCADA Configuration related displays.
(9)
The SCADA system shall provide the ability to create custom system displays such as
point detail displays.
(10) The SCADA system shall provide a means to create a template configuration for a
complete piece of equipment (e.g., a pipeline compressor) to include all related SCADA
configuration for that type of equipment including at a minimum:
SCADA Points (could be 100s of points in one equipment) and the template
structure for creating point names, (i.e., naming convention based on equipment
details)
Trend definitions
Any algorithms / calculations
Key variables that are to be viewed by the operator in any summary tables of like
equipment
Display elements of equipment such as custom displays operators use to control the
equipment. Multiple displays should be available e.g. main display, diagnostic
display etc.
Relationships to other equipment e.g., upstream, downstream.
Task filters to allow an operator to quickly filter a list of similar equipment e.g.,
which compressors are under performing

- 64 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
6.2.5

Alarms and Event Management

(1)
The SCADA System shall provide a display and print alarm messages and events as
alarm / event logging.
(2)
The alarm will contain minimum information regarding:
(3)
(4)
alarm priority;
alarm status;
date & time of the alarm event (internal or external time stamp);
item name;
alarm text.
Acknowledging of outstanding alarms shall have the main function to provide the
operator with a list of outstanding alarm messages. It shall be also possible to
acknowledge alarms within this overview. Outstanding alarms comprise:
alarms that need to be acknowledged;
alarms that do not need to be acknowledged;
acknowledged alarms, to which the alarm condition still applies (the

corresponding item is still in alarm state
The following features of Alarms shall be provided as minimum:
Delayed alarms
Repeated alarms
Alarm groups
Alarm collection
First alarm annunciation
First-out
First-up
Alarm re-routing of unacknowledged alarms
(5)
The SCADA System shall support comprehensive alarm management facilities to

provide fast and accurate notification to the operating staff of abnormal and/or
emergency conditions, and any failure of the SCADA hardware and software.
(6)
The alarm and event management system shall be established based on area codes,
groups, alam11event types, alarm priorities, etc.
(7)
Actions such as status changes, setting and resetting of alarms, control operations and
operator actions shall be logged as events in the historical database.
(8)
The SCADA system shall natively provide the following alarm management
functionality:
(a) Separate displays for process alarms and SCADA system alarms allowing the
Operator to focus on alarms during an incident.
- 65 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

(b) Alarm zone showing the highest priority unacknowledged alarm in the
Controllers scope of responsibility regardless of any filter being applied
(c) Alarm Icon for use in custom displays for consistent representation.
(d) Ability to aggregate alarm status of all alarms for a point up to an alarm status of
all points in an organizational unit. Be able to use the same alarm icon used in
displays for points to also show the alarm status of an organization unit.
(e) Comprehensive set of alarm types such as PV Low, PV High, Rate of Change,
Deviation, Uncontrolled event etc. including features such as alarm deadbands,
alarm on delay and off delay
(f) Automated alarm emailing / paging
(g) Automatic Event (including alarms) archiving
(h) Alarm overviews logging showing Outstanding alarm overview and Sequence Of
Events
6.2.6
Historical Data
(1)
The SCADA system shall able to support scan based and event based recording. A
historical database system shall record on hard disk the details of every event and alarm.
Analogue data shall be logged to trend records.
(2)
Maximum, minimum, average and other statistical values shall be available for
operator-definable time periods, to allow further analysis and reporting. The SCADA
system besides having the flexibility to configure to store the historical data in scan or
event based, it shall also have the capability to store the data base on the item based.
The SCADA system shall also support a playback function that allow user to view
historical data through operator displays.
(3)
Database displays, including the derived statistics, shall be fully searchable, sortable and
reportable, and pre-configured to provide trends and summaries of the data for specific
purposes as well as user-configured reports.
(4)
All historical data shall be stored in a nominated primary location. After a configurable
period of time data can either be moved to a secondary location for long-term storage
and analysis or deleted if the data is no longer required. The primary location shall
optionally be the local hard disk with the secondary location being a choice of local hard
disk, recordable CD / DVD or network disk. The amount of time that archives can be
maintained on the primary location before transferal to the secondary location shall only
be limited by the size of the hard disk. The SCADA shall allow the user to define the
specific intervals of history to be archived to avoid archiving of unnecessary data.
(5)
Hard disk storage capacity shall be adequate for the projected demands of the SCADA
System. Its sizing shall be fully justified and based on worst case calculations.
(6)
The storage shall be capable as for each data type identified in the following table:
CLASS OF DATA
Plant alarms

PERIOD
CURRENCY
Immediate
Until cleared
- 66 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

CLASS OF DATA
PERIOD
CURRENCY
Immediate
Up to 24 hours
Configurable logging period
Up to 40 days
Up to 3 months
Indefinite
Immediate
Until cleared
Up to I month
Plant current values

Plant values shortterm history
Plant values longterm history
Plant values archive
System alarms/events
System parameters
history
6.2.7
(7)
All history information shall be able to be stored on disk. The storage units shall be
removed at the end of its lifetime and the storage unit shall either be backed-up or
deleted automatically. Before backup-up / deletion, however, a warning shall be given
to the operator or system manager backup/deletion at configurable time before
backup/deletion of the unit. The archived data can be restored from the backup medium
back onto the system. The restored data can be used transparently in trends, reports etc.
along with current data.
(8)
The SCADA System shall have a proven network management function to ensure
performance, scalability, easy maintenance, and open but secured interface. It must
cater to the following requirements.
Printer Management
(1)
The SCADA system shall include the printer management that allows the system
manager to use their HMI for configuring the printers that will be used by the SCADA,
and the printer management supports printer output via:
1. A printer queue
2. An application
3. A file on disk
(2)
6.2.8
The SCADA system shall support on-line changes, add printer destination if require any
report sending to different locations. The SCADA system shall also able to define
backup devices for a destination, which will be used when the main device is
unavailable.
Simulation and Training Function

(1)
A simulation function shall be provided to assist the operator in checking the safety and
feasibility of planned operations.
(2)
The function shall include the ability to check the validity of any planned operation and
identify any situations where operating constraints may be exceeded.
(3)
The training simulator shall be provided for operator training of a wide range of
operational scenarios, including emergencies.
- 67 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
(4)
6.2.9

At least one of the HMI workstations shall be provided as the simulation / training
console at the MCC.
System Security
(1)
The system shall incorporate initial security for all users accessing the system as a first
layer of protection of the system from non-designated users.
(2)
The system shall support up to 6 levels of the system security providing proper degrees
of access to system operation and system configuration works based on the following
levels:
(3)
a)
Manager level
b)
Engineer level
c)
Supervisor level
d)
Senior operator level
e)
Operator level
f)
Viewer level.
Each operator shall be assigned a user password including single and multi-user
passwords and any actions initiated by the operator shall be logged in the Database.
Workstation users shall be assigned to different levels of access, according to the
functional requirements of the users. The workstation levels shall restrict the users to
specific functions only of the control system. The limitations may be functional,
operational or geographic. Workstations mode shall generally be assigned to a user when
they log on. It will be pre-assigned for each possible user. The levels shall include:
View-only shall provide view-only functionality.
Operator Mode shall provide those functions, alarms / events and presentation applicable
to the operation of Gas stations and gas network. Set-points can be altered in this mode.
Supervisor Mode shall provide the operator mode functions as well as allowing this user
to configure operator settable parameters.
System Engineer / Programmer Mode allow access to all parts of the system including
Expert System control functions. Database and display maintenance, programming,
application module testing and system configuration changes shall be undertaken in this
mode.
Remote Access Mode via the web browser client allows corporate GTCL staff with the
correct authority, the capability of remotely accessing the graphic displays, events, alarms
and other system operational information. No supervisory control shall be allowed in this
mode and access shall be controlled by passwords.
Administrator Mode shall allow domain / system level administration privileges.
6.2.10 Data Validation

(1)
The SCADA System shall statistically check the data integrity of all data acquired from
the field.

- 68 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
(2)

In the event that an invalid or timeout data or response is received, the data shall be
ignored, and the system shall record the transition as an error and signal an alarm to the
operator indicating the device or channel that is in error.
6.2.11 Report Generation

(1)
The SCADA System shall generate standard operation and maintenance reports
including a system alarm log and maintenance alarm log, which will be automatically
printed out on the network printers.
(2)
Custom operation reports shall be configured and generated including the following;
a)
Shift reports
b)
Daily reports
c)
Monthly reports
d)
Maintenance reports
e)
Event-based report
f)
Ad hoc generation of a redefined report
g)
Report browsing on-screen
h)
Ad hoc report queries
i)
Exporting data to other packages
(3)
A report shall be scheduled for automatic generation. The time, date and even an
interval for report generations can be specified. Reports can be saved on disk for a given
period. After this period elapses, the reports shall be deleted.
(4)
Reports can be assigned priority. When more than one report shall be scheduled for
generation at the same time, the order in which they are generated shall depend on their
priority. The priority value ranges from 0 (lowest priority) to 9 (highest priority).
6.2.12 Trending
(1)
The SCADA shall provide trending capability with the following functions:
Real time trending
Historical trending
Archived History trending
Trend with Events
Trend scrolling through real-time and historical data.
Trend Zooming
Engineering Unit or Percentage data
Cursor readout of trend data
Trend between archived, real-time and historical data (e.g. year and batch
comparisons.). Comparisons between the same point offset in time, or different
points must be possible.

- 69 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

Copying the currently displayed trend data to the clipboard for pasting into
MSExcel spreadsheet or documents for further processing.
(2)
All trend configurations shall be possible on-line without interruption to the SCADA.
Historization of data shall not be affected by changes to trend configuration. It shall be
possible to protect the configuration of some of the trends via a password.
(3)
For each trend set display it shall be possible for operators to configure the number of
historical samples and ranges displayed. Point values configured in trend sets shall be
configurable on-line.
6.2.13 Human Machine Interface

(1)
Process control graphics shall allow the use of all of the open and standard technologies
of the World Wide Web (HTML, XML, ActiveX, JAVA, etc.). It must be possible to
copy graphics from web pages and other HTML documents to process graphics.
(2)
It shall be possible to view and use process control graphics in a standard Web browser
without the use of graphics translations or terminal services software.
(3)
It shall be possible to see all interlocks, sequences, and logic in the process controller
directly from the human interface, using pre-built detail displays. Custom interlock
displays or interlock displays that require the use of pre-built logic shall not be
acceptable.
(4)
The HMI environment shall be used both for configuring the application and creating
and modifying displays. From the HMI environment, displays can be started and test the
functionality on-line and go-back while the rest of the SCADA modules and database
keeps running in the background
(5)
Human interface shall allow operators to add information to active alarms, via free-form
comments. These comments shall be stored indefinitely, and be available at the alarm
screen, event archive, and in reports. Alarms that include comments shall be identified
on the standard alarm screen. The most recent alarm must be visible in at all times. The
full text of this alarm, priority, and type of alarm must be visible.
(6)
The HMI shall be capable of operating over LAN or WAN at any communication speed
from 19.2 kbaud to 1 GHz networks at any distance from the controllers. This includes
telephone modem connection. The HMI shall be the native application, not via CopyPC, Terminal Server or other similar MMI replication.
(7)
It shall be possible to transfer data samples shown in standard trends to a package such
as Microsoft Excel for further analysis.
(8)
History, alarms and SOE data of the entire system should be available at each operator
station. Each Operator node should have facility to view all History, alarms and SOE of
the entire system.
(9)
All operator stations shall be capable of performing engineering duties. It shall be

possible to view simulate and test application logics from all operator stations in run
time. Every Operator station should have the facility of creating / editing graphics.
Every Operator Station should have facilities for Control Drawing Display, and Logic
Chart Display, by means of calling up details based on Tag Names.
- 70 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

(10) Operator station software furnished shall be fully functional and not subject to future
upgrade license fees for additional functionality. The following functions shall be
provided as standard - Historical Message Integration, Control & Logic Drawing
Display, Trend Viewer, Configured Information Reference, Advanced Alarm Filter,
Long Term Data Archive and Report Package
(11) For systems utilizing domain-based authentication, it shall be possible to integrate the
control system domain into a higher level domain structure such that the login
credentials for all users accessing the system be managed externally by the sites IT
department
6.2.14 System Time Adjustment
A system time adjustment function shall be installed to ensure time accuracy and
synchronization of all events and operations covering all the Sites. The SCADA System shall
be synchronized from GPS based Time System to be installed at MCC and ACC.
6.2.15 Interface to Other System
Chevron, one of the natural gas production companies has its own SCADA system for their
gas field operation. Chevron will prepare the web server to disclose their operation data at
their own responsibility to GTCL. The SCADA System shall have the function of collecting
the data from Chevron's web server through the secured lease line. Any hardware or software
necessary for interfacing shall fall under the scope of the Vendor.
6.2.16 Integration with other applications
The SCADA software shall have an open interface to connect to 3rd party products like
management information systems, batch tracking and leak detection systems, etc. The open
interface shall be based on the following industry standard interface protocols as minimum
shall be available:
ODBC
OPC
Beside these industry standard interfaces, the SCADA software shall allow the user to add
own customized interface via an Application Programmers Interface (API). The SCADA
shall have the provision to seamlessly integrate with building / facilities Control System,
Acess Control system, CCTV system etc.
6.2.17 Cyber-security
(1)
The managed Cyber Security shall address the security of SCADA plant assets and
include:
a)
user initiated communication tunnel for services and protect connections between
the corporate IT network and SCADA Network
b)
Protection against unsecured access for maintenance or 3rd party contractors or

vendors, unauthorized network activity, removable media brought into the site
including USB drives, external hard drives, and CD/DVDs, as well as laptops and
smart phones.

- 71 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
(2)

c)
reports into the operation and cyber security status of SCADA components and
the network.
d)
24/7 monitoring of system, network and cyber security performance and

automated alerting against thresholds.
e)
OEM-tested and approved patches and anti-malware definitions, protection

against out-of-date malware signatures.
f)
firewall support, and intrusion protection implementation and management,

protection against obsolete or unpatched operating systems, Inadequate firewall
configurations.
The Cyber Security Patch management shall specifically include the following:
a)
Operating System (OS) patch software to update a computers program to fix

problems, or to close discovered security vulnerabilities.
b)
Control System Patch Management
c)
Automated encrypted delivery of all patches and anti-malware files.
6.2.18 Pipeline Operations Application Software

(1)
Pipeline operations application software shall be provided to support "on-line leak

detection" and "load balancing and supply scheduling".
(2)
The application software shall be based around a real-time dynamic model of the gas
pipeline network covered by the Project which shall provide a kernel for any additional
functionality required.
a)
On-line leak detection

The leak detection method used shall calculate and monitor the line pack,
pressure profile and rate of change of pressure of the calculation points on the
pipeline.
b)
Load balancing and supply scheduling

i] Application software shall be provided for load balancing and supply
scheduling.
ii] Load balancing software shall allow the monitoring of the gas pipeline
network covered by the Project parameters and calculation of line pack and
pressure to allow them to be maintained within agreed operational bands.
iii] Supply scheduling shall allow the planning of gas production and
consumption based on nominations to enable the requirements of producers
and consumers to be met.
iv] Load balancing and supply scheduling shall be carried out on at least an
hourly basis.
v] The load balancing and scheduling software shall assist in the assessment of
the effects of nominations in keeping the gas pipeline network covered by the
Project in balance.
6.3
SCADA SYSTEM EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

- 72 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
6.3.1

Server
(1)
The SCADA servers to be installed in the MCC and the ACC shall be provided to
communicate with each RTU and be capable of performing the following tasks and
functions:
a)
Real-time database handling
b)
Event database handling
c)
Trending
d)
Historical data archiving
e)
Engineering tool
f)
Alarm management
g)
Reporting
(2)
All servers shall form part of a redundant pair arrangement and be equipped with full
Human-Machine Interface activities. The data from RTUs and other agencies will be
received at Server at MCC which shall act as primary and will be transmitted to Server
at ACC through a 1+1 redundant OFC network of a third party optical service provider.
In the event of failure of primary Server at MCC, the data received at MCC will be
routed to Server at ACC through switching network at MCC. Once the Server at MCC
becomes operative, the data flow is directed to it.
(3)
The number of servers to be provided shall be such as will achieve maximum

availability and reliability of operations, with no single point of failure.
(4)
All Server / work station shall be of industrial grade specification.
(5)
Suitable for round the clock functioning i.e 24 x 7.
(6)
All Server / work station shall be provided with license for various system as well as
operational software.
(7)
All Server / work station shall be cyber security complaint.
(8)
All system software shall be of non-proprietary type.
(9)
All Critical servers and inter connections shall be of redundant type.
(10) The salient parameters of the Server shall be as under.

Parameter
Minimum requirements
Processor
Single CPU: 2.93 GHz Quad Core Intel Xeon (dual processor)
or faster
Minimum of 16 GB main RAM memory expandable up to 32
GB.
1024 x 768 65K colors
RAM
Video
resolution
Video RAM
8 MB
Operating
Latest version of Windows server / Industry standard open

protocol UNIX / LINUX etc.

- 73 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

system
Hard disc
DVD Drive
Network
Interface
Minimum 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet LAN interfaces
Power Supply
Dual hot-swap power supplies and fans.
Interface
At least Six (6) USB ports and minimum one RS232 port;
Audio output port and speakers.
101 key AT keyboard or equivalent keyboard and Keyboard
with wireless connectivity
Minimum 24, high resolution LCD monitors capable of a
resolution of 1920 x 1200 pixels PC speaker.
Keyboard
Display
6.3.2
4x500GB hot pluggable, HDD configured as RAID5; min.

7200 rpm disc drive
DVD read and write capability
HMI Workstations
(1)
The main operator interface of the SCADA System for control, monitoring and
shutdown shall be a software application. The application shall operate on personal or
desktop computers within local workstations. These workstations shall be 'clients' to the
main system communication controllers or 'servers'.
(2)
The number of client operator stations shall be such as will be capable of fully
controlling and monitoring all likely operating scenarios within the facilities.
(3)
The salient parameters of the local workstations shall be as under. The PCs shall be
currently available models at time of installation.
Parameter
Minimum requirements
Processor
Single Intel Core i7 (3M Cache, 3.1 GHz) or faster
RAM
8 GB DDR3 upgradable upto 16 GB (OS must support)
Browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 9
Operating
system
Latest version of Windows / Industry standard open protocol

UNIX / LINUX etc.
Hard disc
2x500GB hot pluggable, HDD configured as RAID1
DVD Drive
DVD read and write capability
Network
Interface
Minimum 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet LAN interfaces
Interface
At least Four (4) USB ports and minimum one RS232 port;
Audio output port and speakers.

- 74 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
Keyboard
Display
6.3.3

101 key AT keyboard or equivalent keyboard and Keyboard

with wireless connectivity
Minimum 24, high resolution LCD monitors capable of a
resolution of 1920 x 1200 pixels PC speaker.
Printers
High quality monochrome (black and white) laser printers and color laser printers, with a
minimum throughput rate of 20 pages a minute, shall be provided for printing reports at the
MCC and the ACC. Each printer shall be accessible from all workstations to provide flexible
use of network printers connected to the LAN.
6.3.4
WEB SERVER
The SCADA systems shall be WEB enabled. There shall be a Web server for SCADA system
at MCC and ACC. The users using Web browser software (e.g. Internet explorer, Netscape
Navigator or Mozilla browser) shall access the web server. The web server shall be able to
provide following facilities:
To view all the online SCADA HMI displays with automatic data updation.
To view reports in PDF format, to get the comments in the reports; and verification
confirmation from customers / suppliers through internet.
At a time 50 nos. of concurrent users shall be able to access the web server for SCADA
system.
6.3.5
LAN
Interconnection within the SCADA System at the MCC and the ACC shall be supported by a
redundant LAN, which shall conform to a recognized international open standard. There shall
be L3 Core Switch 1+1 redundant mode with optical and Ethernet ports and L2 Ethernet
Distribution switch 1+1 redundant mode with optical and Ethernet ports.
L3 Core Switch specification
(1) Port Density
The switch should have 24 X10/100/1000 T Ports

and 04 Nos. 1G SFP Combo Ports Populated With
1000 Base LX
(2) Performance
Should support minimum 48 Gbps Switching

Capacity or higher
Should support minimum 35Mpps Throughput or
higher
Should support 8 K MAC Address and Support
Wirespeed forwarding
Should support Jumbo frames - up to 9K or more
Full environmental monitoring of PSU internal
temperature and internal voltages. SNMP traps
alert network managers in case of any failure

- 75 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
(3) VLAN

Should support IEEE 802.1Q tagged

Should support Port-based VLAN,Protocol based
VLAN
Should support Up to 256 groups
Should support Guest VLAN, Dynamic VLAN,
Private VLAN, Voice VLAN and LLDP-MED
(4) Multicast Support
Support IGMP query, MLD snooping (v1 and v2)

and IGMP Snooping
(5) Quality Of Service
Should support IEEE 802.1p tagging

Should support Port-based priority and DiffServ
architecture and DiffServ Assured Forwarding
(AF)
Should support QOS based on policy which should
be implemented upon VLAN, MAC address and
port.
Limit bandwidth per port or per traffic class down
to 64kbps
Should support minmum Four priority queues per
port.
Wirespeed traffic classification with low latency
essential for VoIP and real-time streaming media
applications
Support Strict priority, weighted round robin or
mixed scheduling
(6) Security
Should support ACL (Access Control List),

Intrusion Detection, DHCP snooping
Should be protected from BPDU, Support NAC (
open platform) or equivalent
Should support
Protection
SSH
remote
login,
BPDU
Should support WEB based authentication and

MAC based authentication,802.1x (TLS, TTLS,
PEAP and MD5)
Support Dynamic VLAN and Private VLANs
provide security and port isolation for multiple
customers using the same VLAN
(7) Resiliency
IEEE 802.1D RSTP and IEEE 802.1Q MSTP

Control Plane Prioritization (CPP) ensures the

- 76 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

CPU always has sufficient bandwidth to process

network control traffic
Should Support PVST+ compatibility mode and
STP root guard, RRP snooping
(8) Management
Feature
IEEE 802.1ab LLDP, Flow or equivalent, SNMP

V3, Port Mirroring
Support Telnet, GUI, CLI with context-sensitive
help option and Should have console port for
management purpose.
Configuration back-up/restore by FTP, Support
RMON MIB (groups 1,2,3 and 9)
Support Eco-friendly mode allows ports and LEDs
to be disabled to save power
The switch shall support an Test editor function to
edit a configuration directly
(9)
Electrical
Approvals and
Compliances
EMC: EN55022 class A, FCC class A, VCCI class

A
Certification: UL, cUL, TUV or Equivalent and
RoHS compliant
(10) Environmental
Specifications
Operating Temperature Range: 0C to 40C
(11) Approvals
and
Compliances

A
Certification: UL, cUL, TUV or Equivalent and
RoHS compliant
L2 Ethernet Distribution Switch specification

(1) Number of port
Min.2 x SFP or 10/100TX WAN interfaces, 2 x

WAN slots, Min.12 x 10/100TX LAN ports, 1 x
Asynchronous console / modem port, DMZ port:
configurable on any of the WAN/LAN ports
(2) LAN interface
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Bae-T
(3) Switching
data
transfer method
Store and forward
(4) Access method
CSMA/CD
(5) Address table
MAC address, 1,000 (min) address, self-learning
(6) Routing
Multicast
and

PPP and IP Routing, RIP v1 & v2,OSPF v1 & v2,

BGP-4, IPX, VRRP, IGMPv2, PIM-SM / DM,
- 77 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

DVMRP, IGMP Snooping, WAN load balancer,

IPv6 Multicast, PIM6, MLD, X.25, Frame Relay
(7) Security and other
important features
IP Filtering, Stateful Inspection Firewall, NAT-T,

SMTP & HTTP Proxy, Authentication: RADIUS,
TACACS, MD5, PAP, CHAP,SSH, SSLv1,VPN L2TP, GRE, IPSec, IKE, ISAKMP, PKI,
Encryption: DES, 3DES, AES, Microsoft
Windows XP VPN client interoperability,
Authentication: RADIUS,TACACS, MD5, PAP,
CHAP, VPN / Encryption, DES, AES, 3DES
encryption, Min.5,000 configured IPsec VPN
tunnels, HW accelerated IPsec performance: Up to
500Mbps, Supports industry standard VPN
clients, registry of packet filter for min 32, Min
Numbers of registry interchangeable address
(port)20, Min Number of IP masquerading session
800,Min Number of registry routing table 20,Min
Number of MAC address filtering 32,Min
numbers of subnet 24 - /30
(8) Reliability
MTBF of not less than 120 000 hrs
(9) Quality of Service

(QoS)
Extensive Traffic classifiers of L2 to L5 traffic to

allow appropriate queuing of traffic, IP: IP source
/ destination address, TOS & DiffServ, Ethernet:
MAC source / destination, 802.1q,TCP / UDP:
Port numbers, VoIP: RTP source & destination,
(LLQ), (CBWFQ), Deficit Round Robin
(DRR),PPP, L2TP, IPsec, GRE, RSVP
(10) Processor
&Memory
533MHz or better, Internal security encryption

engine,64MB Ram or better ,16MB Flash or better
(11) Interface
connector
RJ-45
(12) Power supply
24V DC, negative ground
(13) Power
consumption
(14) IPv6
To be designed by the Contractor
(15) Approvals
Compliances
6.3.6
RIPng, IPv6 RFC 2460, Neighbor discovery RFC

2461, Stateless address auto configuration RFC
2462, ICMPv6 RFC 2463, Transmission of IPv6
packets RFC 2464, Connection of IPv6 domains
via IPv4 clouds RFC 3056, DHCPv6
and

A
Large Screen Monitor / Large Format Display (LFD)

(1)
A flat panel large screen monitor which will give an overview of information to all
- 78 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

personnel in the MCC and the ACC shall be provided.

(2)
6.3.7
The monitor shall have a picture size of 67 inches diagonal with a screen aspect ratio
chosen to accommodate both the video formats and graphics resolution selected.
UPS at Operating Company Terminal Site

UPS shall have the capacity 2 KVA with minimum 2 hrs. back-up power supply during
power failure for proposed OCT equipment.
6.4
RTU EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
6.4.1
General
(1)
The RTU is a device that is required to be installed at each Site to collect data, code the
data into a format that is transmittable and transmit the data to the MCC and the ACC.
RTUs shall also collect information from the MCC and ACC and implement processes
that are directed by the MCC and ACCs. RTUs shall be equipped with input channels
for sensing or metering, output channels for control and a communication port.
(2)
The RTU's shall be 32/64 bit microprocessor based programmable units with both
erasable RAM and ROM memory. Each of the RTUs shall have its own processor,
memory, battery backed power supply unit & communication processors confirming to
communication protocol like Modbus, DNP 3, Ethernet etc. and I/O cards complete in
all respects. The RTUs shall have TCP/IP port and serial port for polling from Master
Station & Emergency Master Station. CPU shall have Dual core processor with a speed
of 600 MHz or more. It shall have at least 128 MB DRAM, 32 MB Flash RAM to
support current and future applications. The CPU shall also have a provision of 2
Ethernet ports so it can communicate with SCADA and simultaneously able to be
loaded with configuration from other / spare port.
(3)
All RTU shall be modular and from the same model product line with identical
capabilities. The RTU I/O Modules shall be interchangeable without any interruption.
RTU shall be reliable, field proven and evolutionary state of the art.
(4)
The I/O cards shall not be combined for the functionalities i.e. each card shall dedicated
modules for Analog input, Analog output, Digital Input, Digital output etc. The RTU's
shall be designed to function such that no single point of failure or the inadvertent
leaving of a printed circuit board out of the RTU shall cause a control mal-operation or
result in any false operation or continuous communication transmission.
(5)
The complete RTUs shall be supplied with all its components including the cabinets.
The cabinets should be weather proof and suitable for non-air-conditioned room. The
actual layout of RTU along with its internal wiring, mounting arrangement etc. shall be
carried out in detailed engineering. Proper illumination shall be provided inside the RTU
cabinet.
(6)
RTUs shall be outdoor self-stand type data acquisition and control units, with IP65
enclosure. RTUs shall be installed under the existing sunshades at the Existing Sites and
new sunshades shall be prepared by the Project at the Additional Sites for weather
protection.
(7)
RTUs shall have the following attributes

- 79 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
6.4.2

a)
Backup batteries (24 hours)
b)
IS barrier and lightning protection
c)
Dew condensation prevention
d)
I/O interface,
e)
AGA report standard compatible
f)
Data links to other systems / packages using serial links
g)
Display monitor for process data monitoring at specified site (refer to Section
6.5.8)
h)
Data storage (at least 3 days) during server communication failure
i)
Electric outlet (AC 230V) for maintenance
j)
DC power supply unit for field instruments and radio equipment
RTU Subsystem
The RTUs shall comprise the following subsystems:
a)
Central processor with system software.
b)
Analog input
c)
Digital (contact) input
d)
Digital (contact) output
e)
Analog Output
f)
2 Ethernet port for polling from MCC and ACC through TCP/IP
g)
Serial ports / Ethernet port to connect Portable Diagnostic Test Unit (PDT)
h)
Serial ports for connecting IEDs e.g. Flow computers, Gas chromatograph.
i)
Battery backed power supply (SMPS).
j)
Diagnostic tools
k)
Interposing Relays for Digital Output
The RTU's shall be configured such that interdependence of function is minimized and failure
of any part of a RTU Module subsystem except the common logic subsystem shall not
directly affect the integrity of the unit, as a whole.
Each I/O channel shall have Transient Voltage Suppression of 600W peak pulse power
capability at 101000s waveform, repetition rate:0.01%
The RTU should be able to store alarm/ events in case of communication failure till the time
of communication restoration.
The RTU system software shall provide the overall management of the supervision,
monitoring and control function within the RTU and also manage the local Programmable
Diagnostic Test Unit, communications, comprehensive diagnostic facilities and RTU start up
procedures.

- 80 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

The RTU shall be programmable and shall have facilities for developing logic to interface
with the IEDs as and when required. To this effect, all necessary tools, software and
documentation shall be part of supply of the RTUs within the scope of this document.
6.4.3
Digital Inputs
Typical specification of Digital Input Modules to be supplied is as given below:
6.4.4
Input Type
Min. 8 nos. of Volt free contacts (2 wire isolated)
Contact Wetting
2-4mA per input at 24V DC
Resistance recognized
Not exceeding 1 Kilo Ohms as a closed contact
Resistance recognized
Not less than 50 Kilo Ohms as an open contact
Isolation
Using optocouplers
Debounce circuitry
10 m/sec
Indicators
State LEDs for each DI point
Digital Outputs
Typical specification of Digital Output Modules to be supplied is as given below:
6.4.5
Output Type
Min. 4 relay contact.
Indicators
LED indication for each DO point
Relay Type
Miniature power relay
Contact arrangement
1 NO + 1 NC relay contacts configuration to be

provided up to the RTU terminal block
Contact Rating
Potential free contact rating of output interposing

relay for each DO point (Contact rating 48 V DC,
2A; 230V AC, 5A) (Contractor / SCADA Sub
Contractor / Vendor to provide interposing relays
for each digital output point)
DO command activation
Configurable Pulse duration
Analog Inputs
Typical specification of Analog Input Modules to be supplied is as given below:
Input Type
Min 8 isolated, Current Inputs
Ranges
4 - 20 mA, , 1-5V DC
Accuracy
0.1% of range including drop in resistor
The nominal input range shall with HART communication protocol for a smart transmitter.
The RTU should have On-board HART capability to communicate with smart transmitter
Analog/Digital
Conversion
Resolution
16 bit plus sign or better
Repeatability
+ 0.05% of full range

- 81 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
6.4.6

Analog Outputs
A specification of Analog Output modules to be supplied is as given below:
6.4.7
6.4.8
Output type
Min. 4 Completely Isolated current (4-20 mA) outputs
Output Range
4-20 mA DC
Loading
600 ohm for Current outputs
Accuracy
0.1% of range
Repeatability
0.1% of range
Pulse Inputs
a)
Suitable for accepting through switch select either of the following inputs:
b)
Voltage free dry contact relay operation (Max.25 contact closures per second). Contact
bounce shall be suppressed.
c)
Magnetic pick-up coil of 1500 ohms impedance and output voltage and frequency (up
to 5 KHz) proportional to the flow rate, Voltage output varies from 250 mV to 25V.
Suitable sensitivity and dynamic signal range shall be incorporated.
d)
Suitable galvanic isolation for inputs to be provided.
e)
Counters shall accumulate pulses and transfer the same to microprocessor in a

predetermined manner.
Communications
The RTU shall support both internal and external communications functions.
The RTUs shall have the capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple
independent master stations, a local user maintenance interface and a local logger (printer).
Each RTU shall be able to support a minimum of four communication ports. Minimum two of
these ports, shall be capable of supporting communications to peripheral devices such as
multiple SCADA master stations, solid-state meters, microprocessor based device and
remote/local PCs; and the fourth port to be a dedicated maintenance port. Each
communication port shall have Transient Voltage Suppression of 600W peak pulse power
capability at 101000s waveform, repetition rate:0.01%
The communication network internal to the RTU shall be designed and implemented in such a
way that the passing of data and commands between modules shall not be prevented by the
failure of any module not directly involved in the communication exchange. In addition the
internal network shall not become overloaded under the heaviest traffic possible in the RTU's
ultimate expansion configuration.
The MCC / ACC shall initiate communications with a selected RTU by IP addressing
function. Each RTU shall recognize its own unique address and shall have the capability of
being assigned any address within a range of possible addresses. It shall be possible to address
all or selected number of RTUs from the MCC / ACC in order that global or broadcast
message may be sent.
RTU shall have two communication ports for simultaneous communication, one port for
communication with GPRS Modem and the other port for communication with UHF Slave
Radio.
- 82 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

The RTU shall support Modbus / DNP 3.00 (TCP/IP) and any other open protocol for
communicating with SCADA system at MCC / ACC. This will be standard Protocol for all
the station communications.
The RTU shall be polled through Ethernet port from MCC/ACC.
The LED indication shall be provided in the RTU to check the health of RTU communication.
6.4.9
RTU Features
(1)
The RTU sub-system shall support the following:

a)
Scanning of Input and Output
b)
Fast scanning of selected I/O's points.
c)
Field input initiated discrete control action. Discrete control action corresponding
to Remote Control Command reception.
d)
Operator initiated discrete control action with check before execute and time out
feature.
e)
Operator initiated discrete control action with sequencing and interlocking.

Derivation of calculated digital points based on logical functions AND, OR, NOT
etc. from Digital and Analog input points.
f)
Derivation of calculated analog points based on arithmetic functions +, -, /, *, sq,

root etc. and driving external hardware. Calculation shall be performed in RTU in
engineering units with 16 bit or higher floating point accuracy in case engineering
conversion is being done at RTU level. (Calculations shall be performed in the
SCADA server in case engineering conversion is being implemented in the
SCADA server.)
g)
Deviation of counter values using Integration of hardware and software generated

analog points
h)
Intelligent device (Flow computers, Gas Chromatographs), CP Panel, Solar

system, UPS panel interfacing through RS232 / RS 485 ports for serial data.
i)
Rate of change of alarm
j)
RTU resident accumulator points driven by analog points.
k)
Remote configurations of RTU from MCC / ACC through PDT / PC) Compatible
with IP based telecom system
(2)
Automatic time synchronization of Remote Telemetry Units shall be implemented from

MCC / ACC & from various satiations along the pipeline with a resolution of 1 msec.
(3)
The RTUs shall have a self-diagnostic feature and software watchdog timer devices to
monitor & report the healthiness of CPU, memory, power supply, comm. interfaces and
Input / Output modules at the local level. Further the RTUs shall support remote
diagnostics from MCC / ACC / various stations so that all these status shall be
transmitted to MCC / ACC and displayed in the RTU status graphic.
(4)
Analog input card and Analog output card shall be self-calibrating type and event shall
be sent to MCC / ACC for out of calibration. Analog input card shall generate an event,
if it is out of calibration, which shall be sent to MCC / ACC. Further if Analog output
card is not self-calibrating type then all Analog outputs shall be wired back as along
inputs and calculations performed on each channel to detect AO card out of calibration.
- 83 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

This provision should be available in the SCADA system; however separate card (AO /
DO) is not required. This out of calibration shall be available as part of RTU status
graphics along with set point value displayed in the graphics, next to the corresponding
controller symbol.
(5)
It shall scan and acquire parameters from process as per programmed scan cycles.
(6)
RTUs shall be intelligent in support of the following:

a) It shall process the analog data for high-low limit violations as per stored limit tables
and communicate the same to MCC / ACC along with time stamping.
b) Linear conversion to engineering units and input filtering, in case engineering unit
conversion is being done at RTU level [conversion of raw data to normalized values
(e.g. 0 to 1.0) for communication shall also be acceptable].
c) To support remote reconfiguration and downloading of parameters i.e. addition,
deletion, modification and reassignment with different range, limits etc. from
workstations to avoid local engineering at RTU level. The following requirements of
RTU configuration form MCC / ACC shall be fulfilled:
(i) The remote configuration w.r.t following parameters for the points defined in the
RTUs shall be remotely done from active SCADA Server at MCC / ACC, in case
the features of Alarm generation, association of the alarm priority and
engineering unit conversion are implemented at the RTU level.
Analog alarm limits
Analog scaling factor for engineering unit conversion
Threshold value
Filter time constant etc.
These shall be automatically updated to the standby SCADA Server also.

(ii) RTU vender shall include in scope of supply at MCC / ACC / various stations,
PDT configuration unit (Monitor & Keyboard, hardware & software with cables
& connectors) to create configuration file involving definition of:
I/O modules attached to the RTUs
Type of each I/O modules and time stamping requirements for points in
each module.
The mapping of RTUs data base to the Modbus / DNP3 Protocol address
space Software logic in RTUs
Physical and software interfaces connected to the RTUs
(iii) The configuration file shall be able to be transferred online from MCC / ACC /
various stations using the existing data channels to the corresponding RTU.
d) Time stamping of all exception reports.
However, the SCADA vender has the option to implement the features of Alarm
generation, association of the alarm priority and engineering unit conversion at the
RTU level or SCADA server level.
(7)
RTU shall comply the following:

- 84 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

a)
RTU shall be capable of updating process parameters data and configuration data
in its own built-in memory. Time stamping of all field values at RTU end shall be
required. In the event of failure or break of communication link, the RTU shall
continue to scan all parameters and update its database. RTU shall retain in its
database the complete analog and digital information of the field till it is
completely and correctly read by MCC / ACC / various stations in order to take
care of no loss of data in case of failure of MCC / ACC / various stations. The
RTU shall scan the field and the memory buffer is to be sized to store all the
changing data (i.e. new exception report for the data every poll time) and MCC /
ACC / various stations receive the same without any loss of data and alarms in the
SCADA system to take care of channels SCADA server switchover times.
b)
Further to take care of long term communication outage with MCC/ACC the
RTUs shall be designed to scan the field and store in the memory up to 1000 field's
exception reports during the period of communication outage for retrieval by MCC
subsequently.
c)
The RTU system shall have the facility to attach to each digital event signal a time
tag generated by the RTU local clock to enable the occurrence to be recorded and
transferred with the resolution of 1 ms.
d)
The RTU shall have on-board data logging and shall have provision to extend
duration of this data logging through SD memory card / local storage device of
minimum 32 GB. Internal data storage facility in SD card / local storage device
(capacity should not less than 32GB) shall be such that during GPRS and or UHF
communication and or Service Providers communication backbone failure for at
least 3 days, stored data must be automatically back filled to Server data base once
communication is restored.
e)
The RTU shall support remote on-line configuration, remote down loading, remote
uploading of stored data, and remote on-line data base modifications
(8)
It shall be possible to have highest priority of alarms, in order for the same to be sent to
MCC / ACC. The SCADA vender has the option to implement the feature of association
of the alarm priority at the RTU level or SCADA server level.
(9)
It shall provide 'Check before Execute' feature before execution of command.
(10) Every control associated with the RTU shall report the status of the point after control
execution. In case the status has not changed within fixed specified time it shall report to
MCC / ACC / various stations for not having executed the control.
(11) RTU shall not generate any false control signal due to power supply on-off conditions.
(12) RTU shall support communication protocol supporting report by exception to prevent
unnecessary data communication when the data is not changing. The communication
protocol shall also support an update demand scan of all status data by master stations
regardless of the lack of any change in data.
The reply to an exception scan request for status points shall consist of an indication of
the presence or absence of a change of the status indication points in the RTU. A master
station will then request the input of the changed points. The RTU shall continue to
indicate exception changes until the master station acknowledges successful receipt of
the changed data. The RTU shall report the current state of all status indication points to
the master station in response to an update scan even if data has not changed.
(13) It shall provide error detection and control feature for data communication with MCC /
ACC to ensure data integrity.
(14) The RTU design shall facilitate isolation and correction of all failures. The features
- 85 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

which promote rapid problem detection, isolation and replacement of failed

components, shall be provided as following:
a)
Self-diagnostic capabilities within each RTU, which can be initiated at the RTU
site.
b)
On-line error detection capabilities within the RTU and detailed reporting to the
connected master stations of detected errors.
c)
Local indication of major RTU failures.
(15) It shall have feature of connecting a pluggable Programmable Diagnostic Test unit
(PDT) with keyboard & monitors diagnostic and programming aid to trouble shoot and
configuration tool for RTU and I/O boards. It shall be possible to exercise all the
functions of the RTU without disconnecting the RTU from process.
(16) RTU shall have provision for applying filtering on the input signals and scaling for
engineering units conversion.
(17) From MCC / ACC it shall be possible to off-scan complete RTU individually in addition
to off-scan RTU points. In case of failure of complete RTU or off-scan of complete
RTU only one alarm shall be generated and the RTU along & digital points shown in
various graphics and printed in reports shall correspondingly have data integrity
qualifier flag.
(18) The RTU shall be able to store the configuration data and the process database upon
power failure for at least one month. Upon restoration on the power, RTU shall resume
the normal operation automatically.
(19) The failed RTU once put online shall initiate service requirement to MCC/ACC for
initialization.
(20) RTU shall operate power supply (230 VAC or 24 V DC as define elsewhere) as per
power availability at site. Separate on/off power supply switch and fuse shall be
supplied with each RTU. SCADA Vendor shall indicate power consumption for all the
RTUs. Adequate isolation of input, output and power supply circuits shall be provided
along with over voltage and short circuit protection.
(21) Wherever 230V AC supply is provided for RTU, SCADA vendor shall carry out
necessary conversion to covert the AC voltages to 24V DC for supply to field
instrumentations and to RTU. The power to the field instrumentations is to be provided
through barriers and all the digital output has to be driven through 3-5 A interposing
relays. The necessary converter to covert the AC voltages to 24V DC, the barriers and
the imposing relays shall form the integral part of the RTU.
(22) Over voltage and under voltage protection shall be provided within the RTU power
supply to prevent the RTU internal logic from being damaged as a result of a component
failure in the power supply and to prevent the RTU internal logic from becoming
unstable and causing mal-operation as a result of voltage fluctuations.
(23) Terminations for connections of power supply should be of standard industrial type.
(24) All the field instrument connections for RTUs shall be terminated in the TIP (Telemetry
interface panel). The I/O point wires shall not be directly terminated on the RTU I/O
boards. Terminal blocks / panels are to be provided in the RTU cabinet. I/O termination
blocks shall have both male and female portions so that to isolate the field wiring at
RTU level, male / female termination block attached to be field wiring can be pulled out
instead of removing the wiring. Printed tube type Cross ferruling shall be done.
(25) The electronics in the RTU cabinet shall consist of plug-in PCB's or units with Gold
- 86 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

plated edge connectors that utilize a wiping action for connection for PCB's to the back
frame wiring. SCADA Vender shall detail the shelf and inter-shelf wiring and the
termination of the wiring harness between the RTU and the terminal block area. Easy
access cabinet wiring, for maintenance purposes is essential. The PCBs and RTU
components shall be designed for high temp rating and low power consumption so that
air exchange with the ambient environment will not be required.
(26) The RTU shall be Immune to radio frequency interference generated by any nearby
source meeting the latest international standards in this regard (MIL, VDE etc.)
(27) The RTU equipment shall function continuously without requiring any preventive
maintenance.
(28) RTUs shall be multidropped on a pair of communication channels. Upon failure of
primary channels, RTU shall respond to MCC / ACC requests / interrogation on
secondary channel automatically without any loss of data & operation. System shall
provide status on the availability of each of the channels.
(29) It shall be possible to output any AI (Including serial data from IEDs) & DI point value
available in real time database at MCC / ACC, as AO (Including serial data from IEDs)
& DO to any RTU respectively. The relay contact configuration shall be provided up to
the RTU terminal block. The DO command contact closure duration shall be
configurable. It shall be possible to configure DO contact duration open or close for a
long duration as per the DI status. This provision should be available in the SCADA
system; however separate card (AO / DO) is not required.
(30) Within the scope of this document, SCADA vender shall down load Gas
Chromatograph value to those Flow Computers, in whose locations Gas Chromatograph
is not available, through the same serial link which is used for reading the Flow
Computer values. Source Gas Chromatograph and target Flow Computers will be
finalized during detail engineering.
(31) Non availability of any one of the two communication channels should not hamper the
functioning of the other RTUs multidropped on the pair of channels.
(32) RTU vender to ensure that the open/close status of valves (open state first wired and
thereafter close state) be wired consecutively in the RTUs.
(33) Interlocking Logic
The means to minimize the risk of incorrect operation or incorrect sequence of
operations can be included within the RTU as a logical interlocking function.
All the data shall be available in the engineering units in the RTU database. The RTU
vendor has the option to implement the feature of engineering unit conversion at the
RTU level.
(34) RTU Vendor shall detail the shelf and inter-shelf wiring and the termination of the
wiring harness between the RTU, the terminal block area and the field instrumentation.
Easy access to cabinet wiring, for maintenance purposes is essential. The RTU
components shall be designed for high temperature rating and low power consumption
so that air exchange with the ambient environment will not be required.
(35) Identification labels for RTUs, RTU card files, power distribution boards, terminations
etc. complete in all respects properly correlating with the drawings is to be ensured by
the RTU vendor.
(36) Scan Rates

- 87 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

The local scan rate for the individual I/O modules shall be such that the time-tagging
resolution and system performance requirements are achieved.
Vendor to provide minimum & maximum SCAN time.
The consideration of scan times shall include the acquisition of data, processing and
updating of the RTU database. The overall RTU local scan shall be defined as the time
required to acquire field data and update the RTU database and the same shall be much
faster than RTU poll time by MCC / ACC. It is expected that scan rate shall not exceed
100 msec for direct I/Os
(37) Digital Output (Contact) Subsystem
The contact output subsystem shall provide momentary closure of potential free contact
relay output for the operation of valves. The subsystem shall fully support the
functional requirement of control
The relay contact configuration shall be provided up to the RTU terminal block.
The DO command contact closure duration shall be configurable. It shall be possible to
configure DO contact duration open or close for a long duration and all contacts shall
be voltage free.
It shall not be possible for the RTU to energize an output that has not been selected for
control.
A RTU restart, following an RTU power failure, shall not reset the output circuits, shall
not generate false control signal and shall cancel any pending control selection.
Set point controls:
All analog output control functions shall utilize the select-check-operate control
sequence associated with set point control.
(38) Each I/O shall be protected against the reverse polarity of the power voltage to I/O.
(39) Serial Link Requirement
a) The RTU shall be equipped with the RS 232 ports & RS 485 ports for polling the
IEDs as specified in the document elsewhere. Additionally one more RS 232C or
TCP/IP port shall be provided for connecting PDT for configuration of the RTU.
b) RTU vendor shall develop, configure and establish the communication for reading /
writing of data from / to the flow computers / CP Panel / Gas Chromatograph or other
IEDs. RTU vendor to configure RTUs for writing of GC data installed in one terminal
(and connected one RTU) to flow-computers kept at other terminal (and connected to
a different RTU) along the same pipeline. The client shall furnish to RTU vendor the
make & model no., protocol details of these devices during detailed engineering or
prior to FAT. RTU vendor shall simulate the above devices using protocol analyzers /
PC / other means to demonstrate during FAT.
c) RTU vendor shall provide all the software tools and programs (source code) used to
interface RTUs with Flow computer / PLCs / any other device. It shall be possible for
client to integrate other device with the RTU in future. To achieve the same the RTUs
shall have provision for integrating device and all necessary software, compilers,
tools etc. shall be supplied by the SCADA vendor. The alarms for power supply /
serial link failure / flow computer & other device malfunction through serial link shall
be implemented. The integration of devices (of any protocol not just modbus) with
the RTUs shall be totally end user configurable.

- 88 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

d) The alarms for power supply / serial link failure / flow computer, CP panel & gas
chromatograph malfunction through serial link shall be implemented.
e) The RTU memory sizing shall be adequate for required nos. (as application) of flow
computers / gas chromatographs serially connected with the RTU.
f) The Flow computer / Gas Chromatograph data shall be scanned by the RTU much
faster than RTU poll time by MCC / ACC.
g) All the RTU shall be user programmable for interfacing with any kind of device FC /
GC / CP panel / Solar panel / UPS panel / PLC etc.
(40) Input / Output Points and serial ports for polling:
The RTU vendor shall supply the RTUs equipped with I/O cards, IP port & serial ports
as per the I/O count and serial ports requirement define elsewhere. The RTUs shall be
user programmable for interfacings with any kind of IED.
(41) Portable RTU Configuration and Diagnostic Test Unit
RTU shall have feature of connecting a pluggable Programmable configuration and
maintenance terminal along with all hardware and software necessary to interface to the
RTU. This unit will function as a diagnostic and programming aid to trouble shoot and
configure RTU and input / output boards. It shall be possible to exercise all the
functions of RTU's without disconnecting the RTU from process. This unit shall be a
note book PC with proper enclosure with key board and VDU. It shall operate on
integral rechargeable battery which shall be able to supply power for a minimum of 12
hours before recharge.
The PDT along with Servers at MCC to be installed with licensed RTU configurator
software along with all the cables & connectors required for configuration of RTU.
Also any additional software required for programming RTUs for dialup operation /
making logics etc. needs to be provided by the vendor.
The PDT as diagnostic aid to RTU shall be a notebook (laptop) with proper enclosure
and shall operate on integral battery which shall be rechargeable type. The battery shall
be able to supply power as a minimum for 3 hours before requiring recharging
operation. Also the PDT shall operate on 230 V AC power supply. Vendor shall
provide all the necessary converter / adaptor along with PDT.
The PDT shall consist of following as minimum.
a) Processor shall be Intel Quad Core or latest, clock speed- min. 2.93 GHz
b) 8 GB RAM expandable upto 16 GB
c) 17 color LCD monitor.
d)
Built-in high performance graphics accelerator co-processor providing features

like text scrolling
e) Acceleration and window performance enhancement.

f) 500 GB SATA minimum, 5400 rpm disc drive
g) DVD+/-RW Double Layer Super Multi (SATA)
h) Network card - Internal 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet.
i) Internal modem

- 89 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

j) Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator

k) One Serial, One Parallel and 4 USB port
l)
Latest and licensed version of Windows XP professional operating system /

Industry standard open protocol UNIX / LINUX etc.
m) Latest Antivirus with license for virus definition

n) Accessories : Leather carrying case, AC adaptor 240 VAC; 50 Hz
o) Battery : Battery back-up for minimum 3 hours
(42) Packaging:
The RTU shall be packaged to withstand rough handling during ocean shipment and inland journey. It shall be vendor's responsibility to make good any deterioration that
occurs during shipment. Sling points shall be clearly indicated on crates.
(43) Data and Drawing Detail
Vendor shall furnish all the documents as per "Vendor Data Requirements" enclosed
with Material Requisition / Job Specifications. All the other documents as per
Technical specification and the documents required for better understanding and
execution of the job to be supplied by the Vendor.
A certificate from statutory authorities confirming suitability of design / construction of
all electrical and electronic items for use in hazardous area classification has to be
furnished.
(44) RTU spare Support
Vendor to provide a certificate to client from OEM of RTU for RTU spare support for
10 years from completion of warranty.
6.4.10 RTU Enclosure
The bidder shall supply the RTU and all associated hardware mounted inside a suitable
enclosure as specified herein. The enclosures provided shall accommodate the full extent of
the future expansion (sufficient power supply capability, rack space, termination space,
cabling space, bus slots, etc.) for the RTUs as defined in the bid.
The enclosures should have proper lifting arrangements. Cabling, Fasteners, Fittings, screwheads, nuts and bolts shall be compliant with relevant International standards.
All Enclosures and equipment within it should have identification to be finalized during detail
engineering. The RTU shall be mounted in IP 65 carbon steel freestanding cabinets (frame
minimum thickness shall be 1.6 mm) with lockable front and rear doors and bottom cable
entry and with gaskets and fittings to keep out moisture, corrosive, salts, dust and gases. All
doors, drawers, trays and other weight supporting parts shall be fabricated of metal adequately
reinforced to limit vibration and ensure plane surfaces and shall be well-housed and tidy in
appearance.
The cabinets [minimum 1100mm height (1000mm height+100mm base plate), 1000mm width
and 800mm depth ] self-standing type, with bottom entry for cable connections, fitted with
concealed hinges with pull pins for door removal shall be provided for RTUs at all stations.
This is approx. dimension, vendor to size the cabinet after taking into account ease of
operation and maintenance of RTUs. The dimensions will be finalized during detail
engineering.
- 90 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

A document pocket shall be provided in each cabinet for storage of documentation. The
configuration of all enclosures, electronic chassis, modules and cabling shall permit ease of
access to all serviceable equipment. Test equipment connections shall be adequately labeled
and shall be readily accessible without the need to remove any board or portion of the
equipment or power supply. All cabling, fastenings, fittings, screw heads, nuts and bolts shall
be International Standard sizes suitable for prolonged use .The equipment and all modules
therein shall be clearly labeled in English for ease of recognition without module removal.
Power cables shall enter the bottom of the cabinets via suitable termination assembles and
internal power distribution wiring shall be installed in separate conduits. Signal cables shall
enter though the bottom of the cabinets via suitable termination assemblies. No opening other
than cable entry points through glands shall be provided at bottom of cabinet.
The exposed surfaces of equipment enclosures shall exhibit a uniform finish and appearance.
The colour and finish texture of the equipment enclosures shall be subject to approval. All
metal parts shall be treated to prevent corrosion. Painted surfaces shall be cleaned, primed and
undercoated prior to painting to ensure a wear resistant finish. A preparatory powder coating
process is preferred.
For adequate light inside the cabinet tube shall be provided which shall operate on 24 V DC.
Exhaust fans shall be provided to remove heat and provide ventilation and these shall operate
on 24V DC.
6.4.11 Insulation and Isolation Requirements
The RTU, including all Status inputs, control outputs analog inputs, power supply inputs and
Communications inputs/outputs shall meet the following insulation and isolation levels
specified in IEC 255.
Insulation: The RTU shall be designed to withstand a Power withstand test voltage of 1.5 KV
rms and shall conform to IEC 255-5 test standards.
Isolation: The RTU shall have an isolation resistance of more than 5 Megohms. It shall also
pass an impulse withstand test of 5 kV and shall conform to IEC 255-4 test standards.
High Frequency Disturbance: The RTU shall be designed to pass a high frequency
disturbance test to a 5 kV impulse test voltage and shall conform to IEC 255 test standards.
6.4.12 Labelling
The bidder shall supply and install labels to identify all equipment in accordance with the
equipment identification on the Drawings finalized during detail engineering. Each site
cabinet shall have a site name label mounted on the door.
All labels shall be manufactured from SS or similar material with black lettering engraved on
a white background and secured using rivets. All engraved letters on labels shall be in block
capitals, with black letters on white background. RTU card files, power distribution boards,
terminations etc. complete in all respects properly correlating with drawings is to be ensured
by the vendor.
6.4.13 Terminations and Input / Output Wiring
The Vendor shall ensure clear and adequate segregation between terminals and cables in the
Following categories:
- 91 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

Analog
Digital
Intrinsically Safe
High Level (above 50 V)
Vendor shall supply, terminate, test all required cables, ferrules, cable glands from telemetry
interface cabinet to RTU at all the stations (vendor to carryout termination of cables at both
ends).
Terminal protection is to be provided as required by statutory regulations. The RTU shall
contain Terminal facilities for connection of field wiring. The terminations shall provide a
means of circuit isolation and test access without the need for disconnection of wires.
Captive screw and saddle compression connections made from parts that are suitably treated
to resist corrosion shall be used. The terminations shall be segregated according to signal
type. Each terminal shall be clearly marked using a permanent marker to provide for its
unique identification.
I/O board termination assemblies shall be of the plug-in variety using a suitable modular plug
and socket arrangement. It shall be possible to remove and replace a faulty board without the
need to individually unmake and remake each circuit connection. Ribbon cable connectors
shall not be used at the I/O termination boards.
The equipment shall make extensive use of plug in modules. Input and output modules shall
be capable of being removed from or inserted into a fully powered and operational rack
without risk of damage. Failure and subsequent replacement of an input or output module
shall not affect other modules or cause a system failure.
Modules shall be arranged so that they may be removed without unsoldering or unscrewing
wires or breaking any other kind of permanent fastening. The hardware shall be modular in
construction and replacements and adjustments can be made as far as possible with the system
on-line. The bidder shall deploy means to ensure that the wrong cards cannot be put into card
frame slots.
Sufficient space for terminations shall be provided within the enclosure to support the
maximum possible required capacity and future capacity as nominated elsewhere in the bid.
A single point earth shall be provided in the RTU in the form of a bolt compression type earth
lug capable of accommodating a standard stranded earthing cable. Wiring within the
enclosure shall be protected from wear and tear, against accidental cuts, and from contact with
enclosure parts or surfaces. The design, wiring and layout of the RTU enclosures shall be
subject to review and approval. No more than two wires to be connected to one terminals and
only wire to be connected to each side of the terminal block, except for terminal jumpers,
provided they are crimped together by the same cable lug or wire pin.
6.4.14 I/O Connections
The bidder shall include schematic diagrams showing proposed connection arrangements at
the I/O modules for analog input signals, MODBUS / digital input, voltage-free contacts and
digital output circuits (both DO and AO). Module power supply and communication
connections shall also be shown.

- 92 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

6.4.15 Status Input Requirements

Visual indication by means of LED shall be provided for each input to indicate the condition
of the input. A lit LED shall indicate that the external contact is closed. Each status input shall
be isolated from high electrical noise and properly filtered for contact bounce such that
contact transitions must last for a minimum of time to be specified before a change is
reported. The time of the change is at the initial contact.
The bid shall describe the use of the digital inputs as pulse counting accumulators and detail
the maximum contacts repeat rate, maximum number of counts before rollover of the
counting register or buffer, and the process of reporting accumulator values to the Station
RTU. The RTU shall provide necessary voltage for the status input contacts.
6.4.16 RTU Software Requirements
The software provided to support the functions of the RTUs should meet the characteristics
described in this section. Real-Time Executive Software.
A real-time operating system shall come with the firmware, characterized by:
a)
Integrated, multi-tasking with structured efficient supervisory layer
b)
Priority scheduling of processes in coordination with other tasks; user applications

partitioned into sets of processes
c)
Intertask communication and synchronization
d)
Dynamic memory allocation
e)
Real-time clock to maintain calendar and time, and perform RTU timing functions.
f)
Efficient real-time responsiveness.
g)
During initialization, memory self-diagnostics shall occur and then initialize the system
hardware and various I/O devices.
h)
Device drivers will be required for:
i)
Managing input and output through the serial communication ports,
j)
High-speed link to peripheral boards, and external high-speed port, if needed.
k)
Interrupt controller and interrupt servicing procedure shall prioritize and process
hardware interrupts as they occur.
l)
Debugging tools shall allow users, via a PC, to monitor functions, examine memory,
perform communication port loop back tests, adjust modem communication port settings,
check CPU usage, and process profiling.
m) All software shall be implemented according to established design and coding standards.
Purchaser reserves the right to reject any software that does not conform to these
standards. Complete and comprehensive documentation shall be provided for all
software. The software and the database shall be sized to accommodate growth within the
sizing parameters defined for the RTU without requiring software or database
regeneration. The design of the software and the database shall not restrict future
expansion beyond the sizing parameters. Expansion beyond the original design
parameters may require software or database regeneration.
At the time the RTU is accepted, all software delivered must be up to date and in final
form, including all standard software changes and field changes initiated by the
Contractor or the Contractor's suppliers prior to acceptance. The software documentation
must reflect these changes.
- 93 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

n)
The Contractor shall use a non-proprietary operating system capable of managing the
distributed applications of the RTU. The operating system shall support multi-tasking
and multi-programming. The minimum real-time facilities to be provided shall include
process, job, database, and memory management, process synchronizing message
services for communication between jobs, and device and interrupt handling.
o)
Software shall provide automatic restart of the RTU upon power restoration, memory
party errors, hardware failures, and upon manual request. The software shall initialize the
RTU and begin execution of the RTU functions without intervention by master station.
All restarts shall be reported to the connected master stations.
p)
Software shall be provided to continuously monitor operation of the RTU and report
RTU hardware errors to the connected master stations. The software shall check for
memory, processor, and input / output errors and failures.
q)
The Contractor shall supply diagnostic software, which monitors and individually tests
each of the components of the RTU demonstrating all the capability of RTU as
mentioned in this section. The diagnostics shall provide comprehensive user interaction
and printout capabilities.
r)
The RTU shall support remote firmware upgrade over low bandwidth wireless networks
6.4.17 Electric Power

(1)
The following types of power supply will be applied for RTUs. Applicable power
supplies are referred to in the RTU List (Appendix-3).
a)
Existing AC 230V, single phase, 50 Hz
b)
Replace of existing solar panel
c)
Preparation of new solar power system
(2)
All RTUs shall be provided with battery backup systems to supply emergency loads
(RTU and radio equipment for communication network) for a period of 24 hours under
the condition of loss of AC commercial power.
(3)
Detailed specifications for RTU electric power are indicated in Section 9 "Electrical
Works Requirements".
(4)
Contractor shall convert to suitable power supply source (redundant) as required for
their system from above available supplies level.
(5)
It should be capable of converting 18 to 40 VDC to required output voltages for various

RTU modules.
(6)
It should support a load of at least 150 Watts.
(7)
A provision for display and monitoring of input and output voltages with the help of
onboard LEDs and test points respectively.
(8)
It should support any type of grounding.
(9)
It should have hot standby redundancy.
6.4.18 IS Barrier and Lightning Protection

All input signals shall be provided with IS barrier and lightning protection.
6.4.19 Dew Condensation Prevention

- 94 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

(1)
The Bangladesh climate during the season of high humidity and high ambient
temperature can result in condensation occurring within the RTU. To mitigate this,
condensation prevention shall be provided in the RTU.
(2)
For the solar powered RTU, condensation prevention may be ignored due to power
supply condition.
6.4.20 I/O Interface

I/O interfacing function shall be provided for the RTUs according to the Instrument List
(Appendix-3) and typical I/O List (Appendix-4) for existing and additional sites. The
number of I/Os for each RTU shall be determined in accordance with the said I/O list and
detail survey by the Bidder and shall have a spare capacity of 25%.
6.4.21 AGA Report Standard Compatible
(1)
RTUs installed at orifice metering site and turbine metering site shall calculate the gas
volume flow with the use of formula certified by the AGA gas report No.3 and No. 7
respectively.
(2)
The following parameters as a minimum for gas volume calculation can be inputted at
MCC/ACC and the display mounted on the RTU.
a)
Orifice bore diameter
b)
Pipe bore diameter
c)
Specific gravity
d)
Bas pressure
e)
Base Temperature
f)
Mol% of C0 2
g)
Mol% of Nitrogen
h)
Bas Compressibility
6.4.22 Data Link to Other Systems Using Serial Links

(1)
The site "20-BKB-702, Bangura Gas Field" is operated by Tullow Bangladesh

Company Ltd. Tullow uses a PLC (Allen-Bradley Model # Control Logic 5562) and
HMI software for monitoring and control of this site.
(2)
The RTU shall have sufficient interface functionality to communicate with Tullow's
PLC.
6.4.23 Display Monitor for Process Data Monitoring

RTUs at the following sites shall be equipped with display to monitor the process data limited
to the site covered by each RTU respectively. The operator can input the parameters of gas
volume calculation through these monitors and from HMI workstations at MCC/ACC.
SL. NO.
1
CODE
SITE
10-ASH-400
Ashuganj

- 95 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)
SL. NO.

CODE
SITE
20-BKB-101
Kutombopur
20-FAU-100
Faujdarhat
20-MJR-401
Barakubundu TBS
30-PBG-401
CGS Aminbazar (out)
30-PBG-402
CGS Ashulia (out)
40-ELE-500
Elenga
40-MHD-500
Monohordi
6.4.24 Data Storage during Server Communication Failure

(1)
At each RTU to be installed in the Site, a database storage facility shall be provided to
store all acquired data from field, control tuning data and other historical operating data
of every 30 minutes as a minimum, for a period of 15 days.
(2)
The database of the RTU shall be configured according to the master database to be
provided for the MCC and the ACC to enable recovery of missing data at the master
database in the event of communication failure between the RTUs and the MCC and the
ACC.
6.4.25 Electric Outlet for Maintenance

An AC 230V electric outlet shall be prepared in the RTU for maintenance except solar
powered RTUs.
6.4.26 DC Power Supply Unit
RTU shall operate at 24 V DC power supply. The power supply available will be 24 V DC or
230 V AC 10%, 50 Hz 3% as indicated in the Tender elsewhere. The Contractor shall
select the power supply module accordingly and furnish the power consumption of equipment
in format enclosed with tender.
The RTUs shall be equipped with 24 VDC power supply system for the field instruments to
be designed based on the power load for power system sizing and distribution design.
6.4.27 RTU Maintenance Terminal
(1)
The Contractor shall provide four laptop computers suitable for the programming and
interrogation of RTUs. These shall be capable of preparing and modifying sequence
programs, editing RTU point and alarm configuration and displaying / retrieving
historical data and current data from RTU.
(2)
The RTU maintenance terminal shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions
of temperature and humidity specified in the general equipment requirements for
outdoor Bangladesh. However, RTU environmental specification shall meet operating in
ambient temperature of (-)20 to +70 degC and RH of 5 to 95% (non-condensing) at 40
degC.
- 96 -
SCADA SYSTEM

(GTCL)

7.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
7.1
System Configuration Requirements
7.1.1
General
(1)
The overall Communication System shall consist of data acquisition network from
RTUs to SCADA Server for archiving, reporting and control actions using the backbone
network of the service provider.
(2)
The communication system for SCADA network shall consist of two separate
communication system,as stated below:
a.
GPRS link
b.
Telemetry link
(3)
GPRS link:All RTU sites shall have GPRS Radio Modem which will be connected to
RTUs. The RTUs shall send the data from process instruments to SCADA Server
through Service Providers network. The transmission of data from service provider to
SCADA Servers at MCC and ACC shall be over a high bandwidth high speed network,
taken under lease from other OFC Serviced Provider. Also any control or supervisory
actions required at RTU end shall be sent to the corresponding RTU through GPRS
network of the Service Provider.
(4)
Telemetry link: RTUs will be connected to slave telemetry radios which will transmit
the data to master telemetry radio, located at MTS. The master telemetry radio will be
connected to L3/L2 Ethernet switch which in turn will send the data to MCC and ACC
through access link. The access link shall be established by using unlicensed IP
Microwave radio from MTS to Service Providers AP. The leased E l circuits from the
provider's network and an IP radio link shall form the secondary SCADA backbone to
connect the MTS and MCC/ACC so that in the event of failure of the primary backbone,
the secondary communication backbone shall deliver the critical data from those sites to
MCC and ACC
(5)
Link from MSC of service provider to MCC & ACC: A leased bandwidths of optical
fiber operator/provider shall be used. Contractor shall be responsible to build up OFC
connectivity from Switching Center of service provider (2 no of service provider) to
nearest access point of the OFC network of the third party. Again contractor shall
establish connectivity from MCC and ACC to nearest AP of OFC network of third
party.
(6)
Provision of OFC connectivity as a backup measure between the AP and the 10 (ten)
MTS shall be established. Depending on the distance of APs of Service Providers and
availability of OFC, some sites will be selected for OFC connectivity between AP and
MTS. As per the records available at present regarding availability of OFC, Elenga,
Ashuganj, Demra MTS shall be connected to MCC over leased OFC network.
In normal mode, these three MTS shall use the OFC link as the main communication
system with IP Radio , kept as the stand by for access network up to AP. However, in
the event of non-availability of the OFC link, IP Radio based access link shall be
established between MTS and AP of the service provider.

- 97 -

(GTCL)
Sl.
No.

(7)
The MCC and ACC shall be connected through a high speed leased bandwidth 1+1
redundant OFC link of a suitable Service Provider. The activities needed for extension
of the signals shall be conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible
for supply and commissioning of all necessary items like OFC, Router/STM-1,patch
panel etc.
(8)
The Server at MCC shall be configured as Primary and all data collected through GPRS
Radio modem and through telemetry radio link as a back up method will be fed to
Server at MCC. The Server at MCC shall transfer the data to Server at ACC, configured
as Secondary through 1+1 redundant OFC link between two locations. In the event of
failure of Primary Server, the data received at the router of MCC shall be routed to
Secondary Server at ACC through OFC network. Once the Server at MCC is
operational, the data traffic again will be routed to the Primary Server at MCC.
(9)
The location of the Master Telemetry sites / GTCL Access Sites and corresponding
providers access point (BTCL) are as follows :
MTS Location
MTS Location
Latitude
MTS Location
Longitude
Nearest BTCL
Location
BTCL
Location
Latitude
BTCL
Location
Longitude
Distance
MTS to
BTCL
AP (Km)
01
Jalalabad
(JGTDSL) H.O
N245300.8
E915304.9
Kazitola
N245213.1
E915245.9
02
Kailastilla
N235958
E910639
Golapgonj
N245055.2
E920415.8
03
Fenchuganj
N245055.2
E920415.8
Fenchugonj
N244158.6
E915616.8
2.31
04
Rashidpur
N244158.6
E915616.8
Hobigonj
N242259.9
E91250.0
21
05
Monohardihi
N242259.9
E91250.0
Monohordi
N24330.2
E90429.9
06
Mirasarai
N224215.8
E913646.6
Mirasarai Ex
N224736.4
E913352.6
10.27
N233819.4
E905615.5
Nandan Kanon,
N222021.4
E915003.51
N235958
E910639
12
07
Faujdarhat
Chittagong
08
Ashuganj
N232710.3
E910955
09
Elenga
N231416.8
E910741.7
Tangail
N241410.8
E89542.9
12
10
Bakhrabad
N24330.2
E90429.9
Murad Nagar
N233819.4
E905615.5
11
Demra
N234258.3
E902949.4
Demra
N234258.3
E902949.4
0.5
Brammonbaria
(10) The above MTS locations with the distribution of RTUs in those locations are
mentioned below.
SL. NO.
1.
MTS LOCATION RTU

Jalalabad ( JGTDSL) Head
Office
QTY (NO.)
2
2.
Kailastilla
3.
Fenchuganj
4.
Rashidpur

- 98 -

(GTCL)

5.
Monohardihi
10
6.
Mirasarai
7.
Faujdarhat
8.
Ashuganj
13
9.
Elenga
10.
Bakhrabad
11.
Demra
15
TOTAL
74
(11) The above communication system shall operate in addition to GPRS network for such
selected MTS locations.
(12) The Communication System shall use IP / Ethemet signal transmission system and has
enough capacity for data transmission increase in future.
(13) The data from Ashuganj MTS will be transmitted to Server at MCC through leased
bandwidth 1+1 OFC link, provided by Third Party Optical Service Provider. However,
the activities needed for extension of the signals through series of stages shall be
conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for supply and
commissioning of all necessary items like OFC, Router/STM-1,patch panel etc.
(14) The data from Demra MTS and Elenga MTS shall be transmitted to Server at MCC
through leased bandwidth OFC link, provided by Third Party Optical Service Provider.
However, the activities needed for extension of the signals through series of stages shall
be conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for supply and
commissioning of all necessary items like OFC, Router/STM-1,patch panel etc.
(15) The data of Bakhrabad MTS shall be transmitted to Demra through specified cores in a
multicore OFC cable, laid between Demra and Bakhrabad by GTCL already under a
separate project. However, the activities needed for extension of the signals through
series of stages shall be conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be
responsible for supply and commissioning of all necessary items like, Router/STM1,patch panel, pigtails and interconnecting cables etc.at both ends. The data from
Bakhrabad after being received at Demra will be sent to Server at MCC through OFC
link between Demra and MCC at Dhaka, as stated in above paragraph.
(16) The Contractor shall establish OFC link by supplying and commissioning of
Router/STM-1, OFC cable and accessories from MCC Agargaon to the nearest Access
Point of Third Party Optical Fiber Network
Router/STM-1, OFC cable and accessories from the Switching Centers of the Service
Providers (minimum two) to the respective Access Points of Third Party Optical Fiber
Network to build the connectivity with MCC and ACC.
Router/STM-1, OFC cable and accessories from ACC Ashuganj including MTS, Demra
MTS, Elenga MTS to the respective Access Points of Third Party Optical Fiber
Network
- 99 -

(GTCL)

(19) The Communication System is a closed network, however some part of the network will
be connected to WAN. Therefore security measures shall be required at the interface
points.
(20) The Contractor shall be responsible for the following aspects for Communication
System design:
a)
Network design
b)
IP radio path design
c)
VoiP (IP PBX) configuration design
d)
Video Conferencing System configuration design
(21) The contract for the lease of El circuits from service provider's network shall be made
between GTCL and the provider (BTCL is recommended). The Contractor shall be
responsible to provide GTCL with technical assistance for their Contract agreement as
well as necessary coordination during implementation of the Works. The Contractor
shall also be responsible for arrangement of the leased contract service with the GPRS
and OFC service providers
(22) The configuration of leased El circuits is illustrated in Figure 7.1.
7.1.2
System Configuration
7.1.2.1 MCC Agargaon Dhaka

MCC shall be configured with following system components:
(1)
2 No.STM-1 (1+0) Optical Transceiver / Router with accessories with single mode OFC
cable
(2)
1 no. Video Conferencing System with accessories
(3)
5 No. End Point Video Conferencing device with accessories
(4)
10 No. VoIP Extension Telephone set
(5)
2 No. L3 /L2 Ethernet Switch
(6)
LAN materials, Connecting cables and connector
7.1.2.2 Service Provider-I

Service Provider-I shall be configured with following system components:
(1)
cable
(2)
1 No. L3/L2 Ethernet Switch
(3)
7.1.2.3 Service Provider-II

- 100 -

(GTCL)

Service Provider-II shall be configured with following system components:

(1)
cable
(2)
(3)
7.1.2.4 ACC Ashuganj MTS co-located with ACC

ACC shall be configured with following system components:
(1)
cable
(2)
1 No. IP PBX Main unit
(3)
10 No. VoIP Extension Telephone set
(4)
2 No. End Point Video Conferencing device with accessories
(5)
(6)
7.1.2.5 Master Telemetry Station (MTS)

MTS shall be configured with following system components:
(1)
1 No. IP radio equipment with antenna
(2)
1 No. Master Telemetry Radio equipment with antenna and lightning protection
(3) 1 No.STM-1 (1+0) Optical Transceiver / Router and accessories with single mode OFC
cable
(4) 2 No. L3/L2 Ethernet Switch
(5)
VoIP Extension Telephone set
(6)
(7)
Power Supply Unit with Battery bank
(8)
The process signals received in Master UHF Radio at MTS from its surrounding RTUs
will be connected to L3/L2 switch. The RTUs at MTS location will also be connected to
same L3/L2 switch through direct cabling. The L3/L2 switch in turn will be connected
to STM-1 or Router / IP Radio for transmission of data through access link to MCC and
ACC.
7.1.2.6 Service Providers Access Point

- 101 -

(GTCL)

AP shall be configured with following system components:

(1) 1 No. IP radio equipment with antenna
(2) 1 No.STM-1 (1+0) Optical Transceiver / Router and accessories
(3) 1 No. IP-E1 Converter with accessories
(4) 1 No. L3/L2 Ethernet Switch
(5)
(6)
7.1.2.7 Slave Telemetry Station (STS)

(1)
STS shall be configured with following system components.

a)
1 No. Slave Telemetry Radio Equipment with antenna and lightning protection
b)
Antenna Mast with clamps, fixtures, tray etc.
c)
(2)
The slave telemetry radio equipment shall be installed inside of the RTU enclosure. 72
RTUs shall be equipped with the slave telemetry radio equipment, as shown in the RTU
list. Slave telemetry radio shall be connected to the second communication port of the
RTU.
(3)
Existing antenna masts at STS sites shall be used for new STS telemetry radios. In the
event of any antenna mast being not usable, new antenna mast of adequate height as per
the Radio Survey to establish reliable radio link to MTS telemetry master radio shall be
installed. New antenna masts shall be provided at Additional/Future Sites as shown in
the said RTU list. However, all antenna masts shall be provided with lightning
protection device.
(4)
For location at Bibiyana, new self supported antenna tower of 40 meter height from the
ground level shall be erected. The Master Telemetry Radio with 5 watt transmitter
power shall be provided at Bibiyana to establish reliable communication link with
Rashidpur MTS.A RTU Room (5 meterx5meterx3.5meter) shall be constructed at
Bibiyana site to house RTU and MTS radio and battery etc. In addition, GPRS Radio
modem shall be used with RTU at Bibiyana.
7.1.2.8 Remote Terminal Unit site

GPRS Radio modem shall be provided with external antenna. GPRS Radio modem shall be
connected to first communication port of RTU.
7.1.2.9 Operating Company Terminal (OCT)
(1)
A Communication System shall be installed for the following ten (10) Operating
Company Terminals.

- 102 -

(GTCL)
SL.
NO.
(2)

CODE
SITE
20-CML-100T
Comilla Head Office
10-ASH-204T
BGFCL Head Office
10-HOR-300T
Horipur Head Office
30-PBG-500T
TITAS Head Office
10-JAL-600T
Jalalabad Head Office
30-PBG-700T
Petrobangla Head Office
20-FAU-701T
Sanghu Onshore Process Plant
20-FAU-702T
KGDCL Head Office
30-PBG-701T
Chevron Head Office
10
30-DMR-401T
Demra SCADA Office
The Communication System at OCT shall be configured with following system

components:
a)
1 No.L3/L2 Ethernet switch
b)
Communication link between GTCL SCADA System and Operating Company Terminal at
ten (10) locations of franchisees shall be established through web server of GTCL SCADA
Server. The specified clients of ten (10) OCTs shall be defined in the SCADA Server at MCC
and ACC and access to SCADA system shall be allowed for such clients through internet..
7.1.2.10Chevron's Server at Chevron Head Office
(1)
1 No.Gateway / Protocol Converter
(2)
1No.L3/L2 Ethernet switch
(3)
Communication link between SCADA Server and Chevron Server shall be through web
server at MCC and ACC and WAN to collect given set of process data from Chevron system
and monitoring of the same at specified clients at GTCL SCADA system.
7.1.2.11GTCL ERP System
(1)
1 No.Gateway / Protocol Converter
(2)
(3)
Communication link between GTCL ERP Server at Dhaka and GTCL SCADA Server shall
be through necessary Gateway / Protocol Converter and over the GTCL LAN system only.
L3/L2 Ethernet switch shall be connected to GTCL ERP LAN network.

- 103 -

(GTCL)

7.1.2.12Chevron Compressor System at Muchai

(1)
1 No.GPRS Radio Modem unit
(2)
1 No.Slave Telemetry Radio Equipment with antenna
(3)
Antenna Mast with Lightning Protection
(4)
1 No. Gateway/Protocol Converter
(5)
(6)
Selected set of signals from the Controller of Compressor system shall be extended from the
communication port of the Controller, earmarked for such purpose and connected to the RTU
which will direct the process signals to GPRS Radio Modem and slave telemetry radio set
through the L3/L2 Ethernet switch . The signals shall be available at MCC and ACC Server
through access network.
7.1.2.13 GTCL Compressor System at Elenga and Ashuganj
(1)
(2) 1 No. Gateway/Protocol Converter

(3)
(4)
Selected set of signals from the Controller of Compressor system shall be extended from the
communication port of the Controller, earmarked for such purpose. The communication port
of the Controller of Compressor system shall be connected to the Gateway/Protocol Converter
for conversion of the SCADA protocol of GTCL Compressor System to that of GTCL
SCADA System. The output of the Gateway/Protocol Converter shall be connected to the
RTU. The RTU shall be connected to L3/L2 Ethernet switch thorough direct cable. The L3/L2
Ethernet switch in turn will be connected to STM-1 or Router/IP Radio for transmission of the
signals to MCC and ACC through Service Providers network.
7.1.2.14 Western Zone SCADA System at Elenga
(1)
Gateway/Protocol Converter
(2)
(3)
Communication link between Western Zone SCADA Server at Elenga and GTCL SCADA
Server at MCC and ACC shall be through necessary Gateway / Protocol Converter. The
communication port of the Western Zone SCADA Server shall be connected to the Gateway /
Protocol Converter for conversion of the SCADA protocol of Western Zone SCADA system
to that of GTCL SCADA System. The output of the Gateway / Protocol Converter shall be
connected to L3/L2 Ethernet switch. The L3/L2 Ethernet switch shall be connected to STM1/IP Radio at Elenga for transmission to MCC and ACC.
7.1.2.15 Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA System
(1)
1 No. Gateway/Protocol Converter

- 104 -

(GTCL)

(2)
(3)
Communication link between Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA System Server at Demra and

GTCL SCADA Server shall be through necessary Gateway/Protocol Converter. The
communication port of the Controller of SCADA system shall be connected to the
Gateway/Protocol Converter for conversion of the SCADA protocol of Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj
SCADA System to that of GTCL SCADA System. The output of the Gateway/Protocol
Converter shall be connected to the L3/L2 Ethernet switch. The L3/L2 Ethernet switch shall
be connected to STM-1 or Router / IP Radio at Demra for transmission to MCC and ACC
through Service Providers network
7.1.2.16Bangura Gas Field PLC System at Bakhrabad
(1)
(2)
1No.Slave Telemetry Radio Equipment with antenna
(3)
Antenna Mast with Lightning Protection
(4) 1 No.Gateway/Protocol Converter

(5)
1No.L3/L2 Ethernet switch
(6)
Selected set of signals from the Allen Bradley PLC based Control System of Bangura Gas
Field system shall be extended form the communication port of the Controller, earmarked for
such purpose and connected to the RTU through L3/L2 Ethernet switch.Signals from the RTU
shall be available at MCC and ACC Server through GPRS Radio Modem and slave telemetry
radio link.
7.2
Telecommunication Equipment Supply Details

The Bidder shall design, procure, construct, test and Commission a permanent, fully flexible
Communication System consisting of an IP radio, UHF Telemetry Radio, GPRS Modem etc.
on Service Providers backbone. The equipment and materials shall include but not be limited
to the following:
a)
IP Radio (1+1) with power conversion unit (DC-DC Converter), antenna, low loss
RF Coaxial cable and connector, programming & diagnostic software with all
accessories.
b)
UHF Telemetry Slave Radio (1+0) with power conversion unit (DC-DC
Converter), antenna, RF Low Loss Coaxial cable and connector programming &
diagnostic software with all accessories.
c)
UHF Telemetry Master Radio (1+1) with power conversion unit (DC-DC
Converter), antenna, RF Low Loss Coaxial cable and connector programming &
diagnostic software with all accessories.
d)
GPRS Radio modem with power conversion unit (DC-DC Converter) ,connecting
cord, RS232 serial cable, Antenna.
e)
Router/L2 Ethernet Switch and any other interface equipment with all connectors,
cables and accessories.
f)
Gateway / Protocol Converter with power conversion unit (DC-DC Converter) and

- 105 -

(GTCL)

all connectors, cables and accessories.

g)
STM-1 Fiber Optic Transmission System along with all accessories
h)
NMS system for complete IP Radio system.
i)
NMS system for complete UHF Telemetry Radio system
j)
NMS system for complete STM-1 SDH system
k)
3 Pair, 2.5 Sq mm Power Supply Cables for powering
l)
Multi Strand Copper wire for grounding All types of Interconnecting cables
m) Twisted, 4 Pair CAT 6 cable

n)
Single mode armored 6 core OFC cable
o)
Passive Fiber Optic Components
p)
1U Fiber panel 12/24 port LIU, unloaded as required.
q)
SC Coupler, Single Mode (SM) as required.
r)
SC SM Pigtail for splicing, 1.5 Mtrs. as required.
s)
UTP CAT6 Patch cords, 3 Mtrs. as required.
t)
SC-SC style, SM duplex patch cords, 3 m (for interconnection with switches) as

required.
u)
All types of Cable connectors for the above Cables.
v)
Power Distribution Board fitted with protection device and other accessories
complete as per detailed technical specification in the tender document
w) Antenna masts at STS telemetry radio sites shall be reused. In the event of any
mast, found not usable, new MS pole duly grounded with RCC of adequate height
as per radio survey for such UHF Telemetry Slave Radio site shall be installed.
Especially for Bibiyana site, Self supported antenna tower of 40 meter height from
ground level shall be erected. Master Telemetry Radio shall be used at Bibiyana
site to establish reliable communication link with Rashidpur MTS.
x)
Self-supported Antenna tower of 40 meter height from ground level at Bibiyana

site. MS poles of suitable height shall be provided at MTS site and Service
Providers AP site which shall be clamped with the existing structure at those
locations.
y)
Mounting and Installation Accessories - as required.
z)
Firewall between SCADA Server and other systems with all necessary features
aa) Laboratory, testing and measuring instruments for UHF radios, IP Radios, STM-1,
Router,IP-E1 Converter, Ethernet switches etc
bb) Any other items which are not explicitly stated but required for proper functioning
of the equipment offered
7.3
Telecommunication Equipment Service Details

(1)
Contractor will, during the time of detail engineering and installation of the quoted
system, interact and coordinate with any other agency regarding collection / retrieval of
inputs / information / data and all such interfacing works with other systems, as
described in other parts of this specification and attached documents shall be under the
- 106 -

(GTCL)

scope of this Contractor. If necessary, the Bidder shall contact the Employer before
submission of their quotation.
(2)
7.4
Bidder has to provide the services required for completeness of the system irrespective
of whether it is mentioned in the specification or not.
Terminal Points and Scope Details

(1)
Contractor shall have their terminal points at the transmitting antenna of GPRS Modem
at RTU site. Subsequent reception of SCADA signals at Mobile Service Providers AP
and further transportation of signals to MCC / ACC shall be under the scope of
Contractor.
(2)
Contractor shall be responsible for supply, install, commission and testing of IP Radio,
Router,Antenna and laying, termination and connecting the RF Coaxial cable to the
equipment, to IP-E1 Converter and terminating the signal form IP-E1 Converter port to
Patch Panel port. Subsequent extension of signals from patch panel to Multiplexer /
Communication equipment shall be under the purview of BTCL / Service Providers.
Final installation, testing, commissioning and acceptance of the IP Radio, its accessories
and interfacing of signals from IP Radio to Multiplexer / STM-1 shall be under the
Contractor. However, the interfacing of two communication system (of the Contractor
and the Service Provider) shall be jointly conducted by Contractor and BTCL / Service
Provider. Supply, installation of the patch panel at AP and providing the termination
details to BTCL / Service Provider shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(3)
Final installation, testing, commissioning and acceptance of the STM, Router, OFC
cable, its accessories and interfacing of SCADA signals to the FOTS of Service
Provider at AP location shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and Service
Provider. Supply, installation of the patch panel at AP and providing the termination
details to Service Provider shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(4)
Contractor shall be responsible for supply, install, commission and testing of STM1/Router at MTS location and at AP, laying, termination and connecting the OFC cable
from MTS location to Service Provider, terminating the signal from STM-1 /Router at
AP to the Patch Panel port at AP location. Subsequent extension of signals from patch
panel to STM equipment shall be under the purview of Service Providers. Final
installation, testing, commissioning and acceptance of the STM, Router,OFC cable, its
accessories and interfacing of SCADA signals to the FOTS of Service Provider at AP
location shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and Service Provider. Supply,
installation of the patch panel at AP and providing the termination details to Service
Provider shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(5)
A 1+1 redundant leased bandwidths of optical fiber operator/provider shall be used for
connectivity between MCC & ACC Contractor is responsible to build up OFC
connectivity from MSC of service provider (2 no of service provider) to nearest access
point of the OFC network of the third party. Again contractor shall establish
connectivity from MCC and ACC to nearest AP of OFC network of third party. Final
installation, testing, commissioning and acceptance of the STM, OFC cable, its
accessories and interfacing of SCADA signals shall be jointly conducted by both
Contractor and BTCL / Service Provider.
(6)
Demra SCADA office & WCC Elenga shall be connected to MCC Agargaon, Dhaka
through leased bandwidths of OFC network provider by third party. However contractor
- 107 -

(GTCL)

shall establish connectivity using OFC from Demra SCADA office & WCC Elenga to
AP of OFC network of the third party. Final installation, testing, commissioning and
acceptance of the STM, OFC cable, its accessories and interfacing of SCADA signals
shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and BTCL / Service Provider.
(7)
The tentative distances from different sites to access points of OFC network of third
party are as follows:
a)
MCC, Agargaon, Dhaka to Access point of optical fiber operator: 2 km.
b)
ACC, Ashugonj to Access point of optical fiber operator: 5 km.
c)
Demra SCADA office to Access point of optical fiber operator: 5 km.
d)
WCC, Elenga to Access point of optical fiber operator: 3 km.
e)
BTCL Switching Centre to Access point of optical fiber operator: 1 km.
f)
Server of Mobile Phone operator to Access point of optical fiber operator: 1 km.
(8)
Contractor shall be responsible for supply, install, interfacing, commission and testing
of SCADA signals from the Service Providers network to SCADA Servers at MCC and
ACC. Testing of the availability and integrity of the signals received at MCC and ACC
shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and Mobile Service Provider and other
Service Provider. Supply, installation of the patch panel at MCC / ACC and providing
the termination details to Mobile Service Provider shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
(9)
Contractor shall be responsible for interfacing, commission and testing of selected

process signals from the Compressor systems at Muchai of Chevron to SCADA Servers
at MCC and ACC. Extending the signals from the communication port of the Controller
of the Compressor system to the communication port of the RTU and GPRS Modem
and UHF Slave Radio through any intermediate converter, if required in Control Room
shall be under the purview of the Contractor. Any interfacing equipment, hardware,
software, licence etc. required for integrating signals between Muchai Compressor
system and GTCL SCADA System shall fall under the scope of this Contractor. Testing
of the availability and integrity of the signals received at MCC and ACC shall be jointly
conducted by both Contractor and Compressor system supplier.OK
(10) Contractor shall be responsible for interfacing, commission and testing of selected
process signals from the Compressor systems at Elenga and Ashuganj to SCADA
Servers at MCC and ACC. Extending the signals from the communication port of the
Controller of the Compressor system to the communication port of the RTU through
any intermediate converter, if required shall be responsibility of the Contractor. Testing
of the availability and integrity of the signals received at MCC and ACC shall be jointly
conducted by both Contractor and Compressor system supplier. Any interfacing
equipment, hardware, software, licence required for integrating signals between
Compressor systems at Elenga and Ashuganj and GTCL SCADA System shall fall
under the scope of this Contractor.
SCADA signals from the Western Zone Gas Pipeline SCADA system at Elenga to
SCADA Servers at MCC and ACC. Extending the signals from the communication port
of the Controller of the Western Zone Gas Pipeline SCADA system through Gateway /
Protocol Converter ,L3/L2 Ethernet switch, OFC shall be responsibility of the
Contractor. Testing of the availability and integrity of the signals received at MCC and
- 108 -

(GTCL)

ACC shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and Western Zone Gas Pipeline
SCADA system supplier. Any interfacing equipment, hardware, software, licence etc.
required for integrating signals between Western Zone Gas Pipeline SCADA system
and GTCL SCADA System shall fall under the scope of this Contractor.
SCADA signals from the Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA System Server at Demra to
SCADA Servers at MCC and ACC through OFC network. Extending the signals from
the communication port of the Controller of the Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA
System to GTCL SCADA Server through Gateway / Protocol Converter ,L3/L2
Ethernet switch, OFC shall be responsibility of the Contractor. Testing of the
availability and integrity of the signals received at MCC and ACC shall be jointly
conducted by both Contractor and Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA System supplier.
Any interfacing equipment, hardware, software, licence etc. required for integrating
signals between the Bakhrabad-Siddhirganj SCADA System and GTCL SCADA
System shall fall under the scope of this Contractor.
process signals from the Bangura Gas Field PLC System at Bakhrabad to SCADA
Servers at MCC and ACC. Extending the signals from the communication port of the
PLC Controller of the Bangura Gas Field system to the communication port of the RTU
and GPRS Modem through any intermediate converter, if required shall be under the
purview of the Contractor. Any interfacing equipment, hardware, software, licence
required for integrating signals between PLC System at Bangura Gas Field and GTCL
SCADA System shall fall under the scope of this Contractor. Testing of the availability
and integrity of the signals received at MCC and ACC shall be jointly conducted by
both Contractor and PLC System supplier.
SCADA signals from the SCADA system of Moheskhali Anowara pipe line to
SCADA Servers at MCC and ACC. Extending the signals from the communication port
of the Controller of the SCADA system of Moheskhali Anowara pipe line to the
GPRS Radio Modem through Gateway / Protocol Converter through any intermediate
converter, if required shall be responsibility of the Contractor. Testing of the availability
and integrity of the signals received at MCC and ACC shall be jointly conducted by
both Contractor and SCADA system of Moheskhali Anowara pipe line supplier. Any
interfacing equipment, hardware, software, licence etc. required for integrating signals
between SCADA system of Moheskhali Anowara pipe line and GTCL SCADA
System shall fall under the scope of this Contractor.
(15) Contractor shall be responsible for interfacing, commission and testing of GTCL ERP
System Server at Dhaka to SCADA Servers at MCC and ACC. Supply, installation and
commissioning and interfacing of the Protocol Converter for ERP system to SCADA
System shall fall under the scope of the Contractor. Testing of the availability and
integrity of the signals received at ERP Server from SCADA Server at MCC and ACC
shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and ERP System supplier. Any interfacing
equipment, hardware, software, licence required for integrating signals between the
GTCL ERP System and GTCL SCADA System shall fall under the scope of this
Contractor.
(16) Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission RTUs with GPRS Radio Modem at
Chevron Gas Fields (Moulabi Bazar, Bibiyana and Jalalabad) for collection of data from
three locations at SCADA Server at MCC and ACC.
- 109 -

(GTCL)

(17) Contractor shall be responsible for supply, install, commission communication gateway,
other hardware and software etc. and establishing communication link between Chevron
Web-Server at Dhaka to GTCL SCADA System. The specified clients of these SCADA
systems shall be defined in the Chevron Server and access to Chevron system shall be
allowed for such clients. Defining the allowable clients of GTCL SCADA system shall
be the responsibility of supplier of Chevron system. All necessary arrangements and
formalities viz. meetings, visits etc. with concerned agencies regarding interfacing
SCADA system with Chevron system shall be organized by the Employer. Testing of
the availability and integrity of the signals received at SCADA Server from Chevron
Server shall be jointly conducted by both Contractor and Chevron System supplier. Any
interfacing equipment, hardware, software, licence required for integrating signals
between the Chevron System and GTCL SCADA System shall fall under the scope of
this Contractor.
(18) Depending on availability of OFC and nearness of Access Point of Service Providers to
MTS, the STM-1/Router and OFC link shall be used a primary access link with IP
Radio as stand by link. In the event of non-availability of OFC network, the IP Radio
will be used as primary link.
(19) Contractor shall be responsible for supply, install, commission of communication
gateway, Web Server, other hardware and software, licences etc. and establishing
communication link between this GTCL SCADA System and Operating Company
Terminal (OCT) at ten (10) locations of franchisees. The specified clients of these OCTs
shall be defined in the SCADA Server at MCC and ACC, access to SCADA system
shall be allowed for such clients and all such essential activities shall be under the scope
of the Contractor. All necessary arrangements and formalities regarding interfacing
SCADA system with OCT shall be organized by the Employer.
(20) Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining any license, software,
hardware, converter, protocol converter, gateway and any other item necessary for
interfacing with Server and system of any other external agency. Any item not explicitly
quoted in the tender specification or BOQ but required for proper functioning of the
system and fulfilling the tender requirement shall be under the scope of supply and
commissioning of the Contractor.
7.5
Communication System Equipment Requirements
7.5.1
Radio Propagation Study
7.5.1.1 The Contractor shall carry out a radio path survey of the proposed communications routes.
This shall be commenced within 2 weeks of the Award of Contract.
7.5.1.2 The radio path survey shall also encompass UHF Telemetry.
7.5.1.3 The Contractor shall prepare a Radio Path Engineering Report which shall include the
proposed Telecommunications System design, supported by detailed design and performance
calculations. Link performance shall be designed to meet the appropriate CCIR and CCITT
recommendations.
7.5.1.4 This report shall be submitted to the Employer for approval prior to commencement of
manufacturing.
7.5.1.5 Link Design Criteria
(a)
The Microwave Radio System, and individual kinks thereof, shall be designed in
- 110 -

(GTCL)

accordance with CCIR Report 930 (Performance for Digital Radio Relay systems) and
the appropriate CCIR recommendations for medium grade digital circuits (and those
CCITT Recommendations that they cross reference).
(b)
Channel arrangements shall be to CCIR Recommendations 746 RF Channel

Arrangements for Radio Relay Systems) or the equivalent if the approved frequency
band is different.
(c)
Links shall be designed for a pro-data availability figure of 99.7% per annum for a
2500 km hypothetical reference digital path as defined in CCIR Recommendations 5561 (Hypothetical Reference Digital Path for Radio-Relay System) and 557 (Availability
Objectives for Radio-Relay Systems Over a Hypothetical Reference Circuit and a
Hypothetical Reference Digital Path).
(d)
Bit error rates (BER) for receiver thresholds shall be determined against CCIR
Recommendations 594 (Allowable Bit Error Rate at the Output of the Hypothetical
Reference Digital Path).
7.5.1.6 Radio Path Engineering Report

(a)
The Contractor shall submit a Radio Path Engineering Report which shall include, but
not be limited to the following:
(i) Path profiles for each link.
(ii) Link analysis for each of the proposed radio links.
(iii) Frequency Allocation Plan.
(iv) Radio performance details.
(v) Geographic, urban and are traffic impacts.
(vi) Interference on and from other systems.
(b)
The link analysis shall include but not be limited to :

(i) Tower heights, antennae heights and direction and antennae size and type.
(ii) Received level under normal propagation conditions.
(iii) Receiver threshold and fade margin. Receiver threshold shall be quoted for a BER
of 10-3 as measured at the HDB3 output port.
(iv) Link availability expressed both as a percentage time available and seconds/year
unavailable. The formula and constants used to obtain this availability figure
should be quoted.
(v) Any RF attenuation required at the transmitter in order to comply with the link
specifications on Receive Signal Level.
7.5.2
IP Radio Equipment
7.5.2.1 The data furnished hereunder are the basic minimum requirements. The Bidder shall carry out
the necessary calculations based on the site data and site survey activities for some parameters
so that functional requirements and specifications in this document are complied with.
- 111 -

(GTCL)

7.5.2.2 The IP radio equipment shall be operated with a 5.2/5.7 GHz non-licenses band. The
frequency band shall be selected in accordance with the radio link distance and the required
transmission capacity. However it is preferable that all radio links use the same frequency
band for easy maintenance.
7.5.2.3 The IP radio link shall have 1+1 standby protection.
7.5.2.4 The antenna size (gain) for the radio link shall have suitable size (gain) to keep the radio link
reliability.
7.5.2.5 The IP radio link shall have security measures for protection from serpents.
7.5.2.6 At the BTCL's/Service Providers AP, the media converter (E l to/from IP) shall be installed.
7.5.2.7 For maintenance purposes, an amount of spare equipment shall be supplied to MCC and
ACC. Quantities shall be stated by the Contractor, considering the Equipment MTBF (Mean
Time Between Failure).
7.5.2.8 The IP radio equipment to be installed at MCC / ACC shall be operated with 230V AC, and
the IP radio equipment to be installed at the other stations shall be operated with 24V DC
negative ground. If equipment operated by different voltage is adopted, adequate power
supply adapter shall be supplied.
7.5.2.9 The IP radio consists of IDU (Indoor Unit) and ODU (Outdoor Unit). The primary power for
the ODU shall be supplied through the cable connected between IOU and ODU.
7.5.2.10 The IP radio equipment (IDU) shall be installed in existing radio room.
7.5.2.11 The IP radio equipment shall have the visual indications and terminals for monitoring of the
equipment conditions such as operating / fault etc.
7.5.2.12 The Contractor shall submit the radio path calculation sheets describing following items, but
not be limited to:
a)
Path profiles for each link
b)
Required output power, receiving level, threshold margin, antenna gain, antenna
height
c)
Transmission speed at normal receiving level
d)
Link reliability
7.5.2.13 IP Radio Equipment Specifications

(1)
Frequency band
5.2 /5.7GHz, non-licensed band
(2)
Output power
25 dBm nominal
(3)
Modulation method
OFDM
(4)
Interface
Ethernet (l0/100base-TX,Half/Full Duplex)
(5)
Transmission speed
12 Mb/s minimum
(6)
Power supply & power

consumption
24V DC, 10 W or less
(7)
Power feeding of ODU
through signal cable connecting ODU and IOU

- 112 -

(GTCL)
7.5.3

(8)
Mechanical configuration
ODU+IDU
(9)
Antenna size/gain
to be designed by the Contractor
(10)
Equipment Protection
IP65
(11)
Operating Temperature
-10 to 65C
(12)
Humidity
95% RH ( Non Condensing)
(13)
Wind Survival
190 km/hr
Telemetry Radio Equipment
7.5.3.1 The data furnished hereunder are the basic minimum requirements. The Bidder shall carry out
the necessary calculations based on the site data and site survey activities for some parameters
so that functional requirements and tender specifications are complied with.
7.5.3.2 The telemetry radio equipment shall be operated in 382-392 MHz band.
7.5.3.3 The master telemetry radio equipment shall have 1+ 1 standby protection.
7.5.3.4 The master/slave telemetry radio equipment shall have IP/Ethernet interface port. Also it shall
have RS 232C port and USB serial port for local programming etc.
7.5.3.5 To reduce the power consumption, the transmitter output power shall be adjusted depending
on the radio link distance.
7.5.3.6 The rise up time for the transmitter of slave telemetry radio equipment shall be as short as
possible for the polling operation method. The contractor shall state the rise up time, and also
state whether the master station transmitter can operates intermittently.
7.5.3.7 As distances of some links between MTS and STS are over 10 km, the Contractor shall select
suitable antenna gain for STS and suitable antenna heights for MTS.
7.5.3.8 The telemetry radio equipment to be installed at MCC/ACC shall be operated with AC 230V
AC. The telemetry radio equipment to be installed at the other stations shall be operated with
24V DC negative ground. If the equipment operated with different voltage is adopted,
adequate power supply adapter shall be supplied.
7.5.3.9 The power consumption of radio equipment shall be as small as possible. The contractor shall
state the power consumption of the base/slave radio equipment.
7.5.3.10The master telemetry radio equipment shall be installed at the existing radio room.
7.5.3.11An antenna mast with lightning protection for the slave telemetry radio equipment as well as
for RTUs shall be provided. The Contractor shall decide its height in accordance with the
radio path calculation.
7.5.3.12The Contractor shall submit the radio path calculation sheet for the locations where the
distances between MTS and STS at RTU sites shall be more than 5Km.
7.5.3.13The calculation sheets shall include the following items, but not be limited to:
a)
Path profiles of each link.

- 113 -

(GTCL)

b)
Required output power, receiving level, threshold margin, antenna gain, antenna
height
c)
Transmission speed at normal receiving level
d)
Link reliability
e)
Frequency allocation plan.
f)
Geographic, urban and traffic impact.
g)
Interference on and from other system.
7.5.3.14Telemetry Scanning Method

a)
Each transmitter of master telemetry radio equipment shall be continuously

operated to enable the telemetry system to sequentially address the STSs.
b)
The slave telemetry radio equipment receives its own address, and the transmitter
of master telemetry radio equipment shall be enabled to send data from RTU to
the SCADA System.
c)
Each transmitter of slave telemetry radio equipment shall be activated only when
the slave telemetry radio equipment is addressed.
7.5.3.15Telemetry Radio Equipment Specifications

01.
Operating frequency band
382-392 MHz band
02.
Operation mode
Simplex, half-duplex
03.
Protection
1 + 1 Standby protection (Master)

1+0 protection (Slave)
04.
Output power
5W max. 0.05 - 5W (+37dBm) 1dB, userconfigurable with over-temperature and reverse

power protection
05.
Modulation method
Digital, CPFSK
06.
Output Impedance
50 Ohms
07.
Interface
08.
Transmission speed
4.8 kb/s minimum
09.
Receiver Sensitivity
-116dBm for 12dB SINAD minimum
10.
Receiver Selectivity
60dB minimum
11.
Duty Cycle
Continuous

Serial Commn 1 & 2-RS232C,RS 485

Serial Commn 2-RS231C
Ethernet [l0/100base-TX, Half / Full
Duplex)]
- 114 -

(GTCL)

12.
Adjacent Channel Rejection
40 dB nominal
13.
Power supply & power

consumption
24V, 40W or less (continuous operation TX/RX),

2W or less (RX only).
14.
Transmitter rise up time
5 ms typical, (the contractor shall design the rise

up time of the transmitter to be offered).
15.
Antenna size/gain
Omni-directional at master, directional at slave

station. The gain of antennae shall be designed by
the Contractor.
16.
IP65
17.
-10 to 65C
18.
Humidity
19.
Antenna mast at Additional

Sites :
a)
Height, strength
and material
to be designed by the Contractor
b)
Foundation
to be designed and constructed by the Contractor
c)
Lightning
system
Lightning rod shall connect to RTU's earthing

system
The configuration of telemetry radio link is illustrated in Figure 7.3.

7.5.4
GPRS RADIO MODEM
7.5.4.1 GPRS modem shall be of standard GSM 900/1800/1900MHz having auto bauding facility
and complaint with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute). GSM Phase
2+ standard shall be operated at Class 4 (2W) 900 MHz and Class 1(1W) 1800/1900MHz
with suitable memory of minimum 4 GB and further having facility of error correction 40
characters command buffer, Non-Transparent data transmission at 1200/2400/4800/9600 bps
and auto dial feature.
7.5.4.2 The modem shall support Short Messaging Service Feature, Point to Point transmission and
Cell Broadcast features, GSM data feature - CSD Asynchronous non transparent up to
9.6kbps and HSCSD (High speed circuit switched data) (2+1) up to 28.8kbps, serial binary
and asynchronous data format for data transfer
7.5.4.3 The data enabled SIM cards will be provided by the Employer. However, all necessary
coordination and arrangement for issuance of the cards by the Service Provider shall be
undertaken by Bidder at their own responsibility.
7.5.4.4 A SMA (Sub Miniature version -A for connectors and coaxial RF connectors) interface shall
be provided on the GSM modem to which either a fixed removable or wired Dual Band
Antenna with gain of 5.5 dB can be connected.
7.5.4.5 General Constructional Requirements
- 115 -


(GTCL)
a) Modem Enclosure:-The modem should be made of Metallic casing which should be

compliant to degree of protection IP65. Enclosure that should be able to withstand
shock and vibration should not break upon falling. It should be able to shield the
internal power as well as communication circuitry from any external electromagnetic
radiation. The outer body of the Modem should be corrosion resistant and should
withstand any effect of chemical solvents like acids corrosive alkalies etc. The
modem shall be made of fire retardant material and also should be shock proof.
b) SIM Card Holder:-The SIM card holder should be provided inside the modem and
modem should be seal able from the outer body. The SIM card should easily slide
into the SIM card holder or could be inside the GSM modem with easy access for
replacement.
c) Antenna:-The Antenna provided should be High gain type of 5.5 dB. The Antenna
should be able to function in weak signal areas. The mechanical strength of antenna
should be high and it should function independent of heat, radiation, or any other
higher frequencies in the area.
d) LED:- As an added feature modem can have LED for Tx/Rx and power.
7.5.4.6 GPRS Radio Modem Equipment Specifications
(1)
Operation
(2)
Antenna Connector
Male/Female connector as per OEMs standard
(3)
Power supply typically
13.8 V (10.8 15.6)
(4)
Idle consumption (Rx
max 260 Ma nominal
(5)
Consumption
transmission (Tx)
max 350 mA nominal
(6)
Max Power Output:
2W(900Mhz), 1W(1800Mhz)
(7)
EMC
ETSI EN 301489-5 V 1.2.1:2000 electrical safety

CSN EN 60 950:2001
(8)
Real time Clock (RTC)
integral part
(9)
Data Features
Modem should use standard AT Command set

(GSM 07.05 ,GSM07.07) for settings of the
modem
during
Quadband GPRS/EDGE (850, 900, 1800, 1900

Mhz)
Full GSM or GSM/GPRS software stack

Data circuit asynchronous, transparent and nontransparent
Max. Baud Rate : for GSM Operation 9600
bits/sec for GPRS operation -14400 bits/sec
GPRS Class2 or class 10 support of
PBCCH/PCCCH Coding Schemes: CS1 to CS4
TCP/IP stack for data
- 116 -

(GTCL)
(10)

Interfaces
2RS232, 1RS232 (optically isolated),

1RS422/485 optically isolated,1 RJ45
(11)
Degree of Protection :-
IP65
(12)
Operating temperatures
10 to +65 C
(13)
Humidity :-
7.5.4.7 General Technical requirements

a)
The modem shall operate on GSM operating band. It should support

EGSM/900/1800/1900 MHz and should be operational in GSM Band made available
in future and comprising 384 KB EEPROM and further 4 MB Non volatile memory
for additional data storage, EIARS 232-C data interface.
b)
The modem shall be Data / GPRS / GSM compliant.
c)
Interface offered shall have RS 232 port with a D type 9 pin connector or RJ 11
connector.
d)
GSM engine should not get affected under heat, electromagnetic fields, electrostatic
fields, magnetic fields, electromagnetic induction etc. The GSM engine should be of
Wavecom, Siemens, Sony Ericsson, Nokia, Simcom and Motorola. If any other make
of GSM engine is being used then it should get prior approval from the Employer.
e)
It should be able to get remote controlled through AT commands.
f)
Modem should have a Real time Clock (RTC) as an integral part and should be
demonstrated if demanded.
g)
Modem shall follow open software platform.
h)
Protocols for communication with Server ETSI GSM Phase 2+, GPRS Enabled,
DOTA 3 Enabled.
i)
The Baud rate for data transfer shall be at 9600 kbps programmable. The modem
should be flexi speed in nature that means they should be able to operate at different
baud rate without any hindrance in their communication properties.
j)
The modem shall configure at any baud rate up to a maximum of 9600 baud rate
through the terminals of desktop/laptop using Windows Operating System / Industry
standard open protocol UNIX / LINUX etc. No proprietary software should be used
for configuration of modem at the desired baud rate.
k)
The modem should have outbound dialing facility to a particular GSM number
(server) at specified time (daily / weekly / monthly, etc.) for the purpose of sending
data. This configuration of the modem shall be made available to the user through the
Contractor provided software. If modem could not establish connection to modem
placed at central station at specified time then it shall retry the same as configured
l)
The Intelligent modem shall have sufficient memory up to 256 KB + 32KB to store
resident software and separate memory up to 4MB Flash for data storage. The
modem memory shall be non-volatile so that the registered parameters and stored
data are not affected by loss of power. The non-volatile memory shall have a
minimum retention time of 10 years.
m) Data Features:
- 117 -

(GTCL)

Modem should use standard AT Command set (GSM 07.05 ,GSM07.07) for
settings of the modem
Full GSM or GSM/GPRS software stack
Data circuit asynchronous, transparent and non-transparent
Max. Baud Rate : for GSM Operation - 9600 bits/sec for GPRS operation 14400 bits/sec
GPRS packet data features:
GPRS Class2 or class 10 support of PBCCH/PCCCH Coding Schemes: CS1
to CS4
7.5.5
n)
GPRS Class 10 with Coding Schemes: CS1 to CS4
o)
Power: Maximum Power Output should be 2 W at 900 MHz and 1W at 1800 MHz &
the RF functionalities should The RF functionalities should comply with the phase II
EGSM 900 / GSM 1800 recommendation. VA Burden of the Modem should not
exceed 3.5 VA during data communication.
p)
The GPRS module in the modem shall have a real time clock and calendar with a
battery backup totally independent of power supply. The meter time or GPRS time
shall be synchronized in both the modem and central server to take care of RTC drift
variations.
q)
Modem should be capable of continuous working for 24 hours every day under field
conditions, even when enclosed in Metering Cubicles at Consumer Sites
IP PBX Equipment
7.5.5.1 The telephone system shall employ VoIP technology and shall provide voice communication
through the network.
7.5.5.2 The telephone system shall consist of IP PBX, extension telephone sets and associated cabling
in the buildings of the master telemetry stations and in the MCC/ACC room. At MCC,
uninterrupted power supply (UPS) is available, so a standby power supply system for IP PBX
is not required. The telephone system configuration is shown in Figure 7.4.
7.5.5.3 Access to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) shall be provided at MCC.
7.5.5.4 The capacity of IP PBX shall be as follows:
a) PSTN line
6 lines
b) Extension line
100 lines (maximum capacity shall be 512 lines)
c) Trunk line
5 lines (in future, partner PBX will be installed at

GTCL new Head Office which is currently being
planned for future construction.)
7.5.5.5 The IP PBX shall be modular construction and designed to have 100% expansion capability.
7.5.5.6 The IP PBX shall be non-blocking digital switches, operating under stored program control.
7.5.5.7 All common control equipment shall be duplicated.
7.5.5.8 PSTN Connection
- 118 -

(GTCL)

a)
In the case where the PSNT connection is a digital circuit, the interface condition
shall be compliant with relevant ITU-T Rec. and other regulations.
b)
The IP PBX shall have facilities to restrict dialing access from any telephone
extension to the PSTN.
c)
Access to the PSTN shall be done through direct dialing where configured, and
shall be permitted to the selected extension lines.
7.5.5.9 Supervisory Function

a)
A supervisory system shall be provided for IP PBX that allows the performance to
be analyzed as well as providing configuration facilities and fault information and
diagnostics.
b)
The IP PBX shall prepare, store and collate information on call logging, traffic
analysis and fault analysis. A hard copy printout shall be available at IP PBX
installation on dedicated printers.
7.5.5.10General Requirements
a)
The Telephone System shall be designed to provide voice and data services. The
telephone System shall offer reliable and resilient means of transmission of voice
communication within the external locations via IP and PSTN connectivity
interfaces.
b)
The System shall be based on IP based telephony (IPT). The main IP Server shall
be connected to 2Mbps E1 link at Dhaka MCC. The PSTN lines shall also be
connected at MCC through suitable interface which will be provided by
Contractor.
c)
The system should have a modular design capable of further expansion.
d)
The system software should be protected against data loss/corruption in the event
of power failure, unauthorized command or other faulty conditions.
e)
The Telephone System shall be capable of supporting analog TDM telephones.

Also, the Telephone System shall support Fax-over-IP transmission and legacy
fax services.
f)
The EPABX shall have the provision to be connected to GSM/CDMA gateway at

the exchange so that the subscribers can be contacted when they out of their
office, by automatic call diverting.
7.5.5.11Design Objectives and Performance Criteria

a)
The telephone system shall be configured to ensure that the system availability is
equal to or greater than 99.99%, with no complete loss of telephone service under
any circumstance. Contractor shall support the system and equipment availability
through appropriate calculations.
b)
The offered system should be modular in design. The architecture of IP PBX

should be capable of seamless migration to its maximum capacity by simply
adding modules and peripheral cards without compromising on any functions /
features of this system or any degradation of service.
c)
The equipment shall be capable of supporting standard telephone instruments

from any manufacturers. Not only basic voice-communication shall be supported,
but also evolved services like multi-party, video, instant-messaging, as a

- 119 -

(GTCL)

minimum, shall be operational when a selection of COTS IP telephone sets are

used.
d)
The System shall be provided with installed capacity to accommodate a 20%

expansion.
e)
Configuration of the system shall be achieved by software for maximum

flexibility. A user friendly setting up and checking routine shall be provided
which enables an operator using a PC to implement speed commissioning and
fault finding functions. The use of these methods shall allow adjustments to be
easily made when the system is installed without resulting in modifications to the
system wiring. The system shall be provided with standard serial interface
(preferably a USB connection) to be connected with a laptop for local and remote
access for maintenance and operations activities. One Notebook PC shall be
provided for these functions.
f)
All software utilized shall be the latest and upgraded version.
7.5.5.12The exact quantities and locations of the VoIP extension telephone set are furnished as under
and also shown in Figure 7.4.
a)
Head Office at Dhaka
20 VoIP sets
b)
Demra MTS
8 VoIP sets
c)
Ashuganj ACC
12 VoIP sets
d)
Elenga MTS
5 VoIP sets
e)
Kailastilla MTS
2 VoIP sets
f)
Jalalabad HO (JGDSL)
2 VoIP sets
g)
Fenchuganj MTS
2 VoIP sets
h)
Rashidpur MTS
2 VoIP sets
i)
Manohardihi MTS
2 VoIP sets
j)
Bakhrabad MTS
3 VoIP sets
k)
Mirasarai MTS
2 VoIP sets
l)
Faujdarhat MTS
2 VoIP sets
7.5.5.13IP PBX Equipment Specifications

(1)
Outside lines
16 minimum
(2)
Extension lines
512 maximum
(3)
Power supply
AC 230V, single phase
(4)
Backup battery
Not required
(5)
Mechanical construction
To be equipped on 19 inches rack, the

Contractor shall design the height of the rack.

- 120 -

(GTCL)
(6)
Features

Station Call
a)
b)
Abbreviated Dialing
c)
Authorization Codes
d)
Automatic Call Back
e)
Voice Guided Assistance Announcement

System
f)
Malicious Call Tracing / Record
g)
Direct Inward / Outward Station Access
h)
Class of Service, Direct Inward / outward

Dialing
i)
Class of Restriction
j)
Auto Attendant
k)
Day / Night Trunk Control
l)
Distinctive Ringing
m)
Music on Hold
n)
System Traffic Reports
o)
System Abbreviated Dialing
p)
Uniform Numbering Plan
q)
4 Party conferencing
r)
Message Announcement System
s)
Voice Mail System
t)
Hotline Facility
u)
Fixed-Mobile Interface
7.5.5.14Extension Telephone Set Specifications

(1)
Operation
VoIP on LAN
(2)
Interface
Ethernet (10/100) line interface with a secondary

10/100 port for collocated laptop or PC
(3)
Line key
8 line appearance/feature key buttons - with dual

LEDs
(4)
Speaker phone
Full duplex speaker phone & Massage waiting

indication
(5)
Display
LEDs Display, Backlit display
(6)
Protocol
H323 protocol support
(7)
Call Log
Contains last 100 calls

- 121 -

(GTCL)

(8)
Standards based code

support
G.711, G.726, G.729 A/B
(9)
Power Supply
AC 230V, power adapter shall be provided
7.5.5.15Telephone Cabling
The contractor shall be responsible for the installation of telephones and associated cabling
inside of the room at MCC/ACC and also inside the radio building at MTS. The telephone
cabling shall be made of Ethernet cable.
7.5.5.16Maintenance PC
The PC for the maintenance purpose shall be supplied. It shall be able to interface with IP
PBX in order to upgrade or renew the programs installed in IP PBX memory.
7.5.6
Network System
7.5.6.1 Media Converter

(1)
A media converter (IP/Ethernet to/from E1) shall be installed at BTCL's AP.
(2)
The media converter shall be operated with 24V DC negative ground. If the equipment
operated with different voltage is adopted, a DC/DC converter shall be supplied.
(3)
A Router or HUB which converts IP/Ethernet to/from E1 can be offered.
7.5.6.2 Media Converter IP-E1 Specifications

(1) Converting
protocol
signal
IP/Ethernet to/from El (2Mb/s)
of
a)
(2) Number
required port
For MCC's AP
1 nos. IP/Ethernet : 10 nos. E1
Min.
b)
For ACC's AP
1 nos. IP/Ethernet : 10 nos. E1
Min.
(3) EI signal format
HDB-3
(4) E1
Electrical
Interface
ITU-T G.703
(5) Jitter
ITU-T G.823
(6) Ethernet Interface

connector
RJ-45 for IP/ Ethernet side, 10/100BaseT
(7) Ethernet standard
IEEE 802.3
(8) Power supply
24V DC negative ground
(9) Power
BNC-R for El side

- 122 -

(GTCL)

consumption
(10) Mechanical
construction
To be installed on a 19-inch rack
7.5.6.3 L2 Ethernet Switch/HUB/Router

(1)
To connect with the branching network, a HUB or Router shall be provided to each
MTS and MCC/ACC.
(2)
The Contractor shall select an adequate branching device from the HUB or Router to get
the best performance of the network.
(3)
The HUB/Router to be installed at MCC/ACC shall be operated with 230V AC. The
HUB/Router to be installed at the other stations shall be operated with 24V DC negative
ground. If the equipment operated with different voltage is adopted, an adequate power
supply adapter shall be supplied.
L2 Ethernet Switch/HUB Specifications

(1) Number of port
16 minimum, Min.2 x SFP or 10/100TX

WAN interfaces,2 x WAN slots, Min.12 x
10/100TX LAN ports,1 x Asynchronous
console / modem port for all other locations
(2) LAN interface
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Bae-T
(3) Switching
data
transfer method
Store and forward
(4) Access method
CSMA/CD
(5) Address table
MAC address, 1,000 (min) address, self

learning
(6) Routing
Multicast
and
PPP and IP Routing,RIP v1 & v2,OSPF v1

& v2,BGP-4,IPX,VRRP,IGMPv2,PIM-SM /
DM,DVMRP ,IGMP Snooping,WAN load
balancer,IPv6
Multicast
,PIM6
,MLD,X.25,Frame Relay
(7) Security and other

important features
IP
Filtering,Stateful
Inspection
Firewall,NAT-T,SMTP
&
HTTP
Proxy,Authentication: RADIUS, TACACS,
MD5, PAP, CHAP,SSH, SSLv1,VPN L2TP, GRE, IPSec, IKE, ISAKMP,
PKI,Encryption:
DES,
3DES,
AES,Microsoft Windows XP VPN client
interoperability,Authentication:
RADIUS,TACACS,
MD5,
PAP,
CHAP,VPN/Encryption,DES,AES,
3DES
encryption,Min.5,000 configured IPsec VPN
tunnels ,HW accelerated IPsec performance:
Up to 500Mbps,Supports industry standard

- 123 -

(GTCL)

VPN clients,registry of packet filter for min

32,Min Numbers of registry interchangeable
address (port)20,Min Number of IP
masquerading session 800,Min Number of
registry routing table 20,Min Number of
MAC address filtering 32,Min numbers of
subnet 24 - /30
(8) Reliability
MTBF of not less than 120 000 hrs
(9) Quality of Service

(QoS)
Extensive Traffic classifiers of L2 to L5

traffic to allow appropriate queuing of
traffic,IP: IP source / destination address,
TOS & DiffServ,Ethernet: MAC source /
destination, 802.1q,TCP / UDP: Port
numbers,VoIP:
RTP
source
&
destination,(LLQ),(CBWFQ),Deficit Round
Robin (DRR),PPP, L2TP, IPsec, GRE,RSVP
(10) Processor
&Memory
533MHz
or
better,Internal
security
encryption engine,64MB Ram or better
,16MB Flash or better
(11) Interface
connector
RJ-45
(12) Power supply
24V DC, negative ground
(13) Power
consumption
(14) IPv6
(15) Approvals
Compliances
RIPng,IPv6 RFC 2460,Neighbor discovery

RFC
2461,Stateless
address
auto
configuration RFC 2462,ICMPv6 RFC
2463,Transmission of IPv6 packets RFC
2464,Connection of IPv6 domains via IPv4
clouds RFC 3056,DHCPv6
and
EMC: EN55022 class A, FCC class A, VCCI

class A
7.5.6.4 Optical FiberCable

Fiber installed meet or exceed the following specifications :
a)
Certificate of conformance to Quality assurance system ISO 9001.
b)
12fiber strands.
c)
Fibres shall conform to ITU-T G.652 or G.655 recommendation for Single Mode
Fiber Optic Cable.
d)
Fibres shall conform to ITU-T G.651 or G.651.1 recommendation for Multi Mode
Fiber Optic Cable.

- 124 -

(GTCL)
e)

Optical path discrete reflectance and return loss in accordance with requirements of
table 4, ITUG.957.
Specifications of FO Cable
PARAMETER
SPECIFICATION
01.
Nominal Cable Size
70 mm to 100 mm
02.
Fiber Count
12
03.
Core Covering
Non-hygroscope tape
04.
Water blocking compound
Moisture resistant filling compound
05.
Armour Material
Corrugated Steel Tape
06.
Armour Thickness
18 mm
07.
Temperature Range
-10 to + 80 C
08.
Nominal Delivery Length
3-5 kilo meter / Reel or Drum
09.
Numerical Aperture
200 mm
10.
Cut off wavelength of cabled fiber
< 1270 nm
11.
Dispersion at 1270 nm 1550 nm
3.5 ps/nm. Km
12.
Attenuation at 1300 nm on reel at works Max. 0.35 dB/Km

or at site before installation
13.
Attenuation at 1300 nm on reel at works Max.0.4 dB/Km

or at site after installation including splice
loss

- 125 -

(GTCL)

PARAMETER
SPECIFICATION
14.
Difference in attenuation coefficient when < 0.05 dB

measured from both ends
15.
Voltage withstand between armor and 10 KV DC

ground for 1 min
16.
Marking along cable length every 1 m
Yes
17.
Splice Type
Contractor to indicate
18.
Maximum Splice Loss
0.05 dB
19.
Connector Type
Contractor to indicate
20.
Maximum Connector Loss
0.3 dB
7.5.6.5 CAT 6 Cable

(1)
All CAT-6 cable shall be used for connecting the equipment and device to Ethernet
switches. These will be used in MCC, ACC, Service Providers Access Points etc.
(2)
The CAT-6 shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair type.
Specification of CAT-6 Cable

01.
Compliant Standards
Values
02.
No. of pairs
4 pair
03.
Conductor
Solid tinned copper
04.
Conductor Diameter
23AWG
05.
Nominal DC Resistance
67 Ohms /1Km
06.
Nominal Impedance
100 Ohms+/- 15 Ohms
07.
Nominal Capacitance
46pf/ m
08.
Nominal Velocity of
propagation
68%

- 126 -

(GTCL)

09.
Nominal Attenuation
10.
Insulation Materials
Poly Vinyl Chloride / Polyolefin
11.
Nominal Outer Diameter
6.45 mm
100 MHz:-19.9 dB/100m

155 Mhz: -25.3 dB/100m
200 Mhz: -29.2 dB/100m
7.5.6.6 Low Loss RF Coaxial Cable

(1)
Low loss coaxial cable shall be used for connecting the telemetry master and slave radio
equipment and IP radio equipment to respective antenna. These will be used in RTU
sites, MTS locations and Service Providers Access Points etc.
(2)
The RF Low loss coaxial cable shall have low density foam dielectric and dielectric
material shall be Polyethylene Foam.
Specification of RF Low loss coaxial Cable
01.
Weight of cables
0.45Kg/m minimum
02.
Tensile Strength
140 N/m
03.
Minimum bending radius
255 mm
04.
67 Ohms /1Km
Cable Nominal Impedance
50 Ohms
06.
Nominal Capacitance
74pf/ m nominal
07.
DC Resistance Inner/ Outer
1.05/ 1.18 ohms/1000m
08.
Nominal Attenuation
100 MHz:-19.9 dB/100m
155 Mhz: -25.3 dB/100m
200 Mhz: -29.2 dB/100m
05.
09.
Insulation Resistance
100000 Meg-Ohms
Outer Conductor Material/

Inner Conductor Material
Corrugated Copper/ Copper Tube
11.
6.45 mm
12.
Nominal Size:
7/8 inches
13.
Attenuation and Average Power

Ratings at 400 MHz
2.5 dB minimum,3.50 Kw minimum
10.
7.5.6.7 Monitor PC for Network Monitoring System (NMS)

- 127 -

(GTCL)

The PC with software for NMS shall be provided at MCC and ACC.
Monitor PC for NMS Specifications
7.5.7
(1)
Type of PC
Laptop Type
(2)
Display size
15 inches or more
(3)
OS
Windows latest licensed version / Industry

standard latest licensed open protocol UNIX /
LINUX etc. compatible Network Management
System (NMS).
(4)
CPU
Core_2_Duo, mobile processor or better
(5)
HD capacity
500GB or more
(6)
Media Drive
Built-in, CD / DVD
Video Conferencing System
7.5.7.1 General Requirements

(1)
The Total solution shall provide for Normal, Presentation and Web Casting
conferencing facility. In Normal Conferencing mode, number of users spread across
various locations should be able to participate. In Broadcast Conferencing mode the
speaker should be able to broadcast his/her message to all other locations having the
facility. The speaker in this case must occupy the full screen at all the end user
locations. It shall also provide the Presentation facility to the speaker, whereby one can
present a topic to the wider audience using Conferencing facility. The users from
Internet shall be able to participate in the conference using their wireless devices like
Laptop/Mobile etc. Web Conferencing inter-alia will involve users either from the
Internet or from intranet, participating in the proposed Video Conferencing facility in
GTCL using the desktop PC/any standard web conferencing software like Net Meeting
etc.
(2)
The total solution shall provide for simultaneous multi-conferencing using IP and PRI
ISDN, in all combination. In a mixed IP/ISDN video conference, there should not be
perceptible difference in the video/audio received.
(3)
This Master Controller can define conference numbers and allot host and time slot for
each. Host shall be able to invite participants to the meeting, and manage them.
(4)
This system shall enable users through wireless keyboard/remote device to manipulate
the camera angle, focus and various parameters to suit the user requirements. The voiceactivated facility shall be provided for camera control.
(5)
The Total Solution shall connect using the LAN port available in the conference room
locally and it shall use the bandwidth available in the Company's backbone network,
which is using Leased Lines and PRI ISDN, seamlessly.
(6)
The Total Solution shall work in present-presenter mode, i.e., the system have the
requisite software and hardware interfaces to provide for computer connectivity to
- 128 -

(GTCL)

enable making Presentations, sharing of files, etc. across multiple locations. The Total
solution shall have duo video capabilities i.e. both Presenter and Presentation shall be
displayed. Either one display device splitting the area to display both, or two separate
displays like monitor and LCD shall be possible.
(7)
Dial-out service shall have a programmable retry facility, wherein the system will try to
reconnect automatically in case the receiving lines are in a busy/ no response condition.
The number of retry shall be configurable. The video output shall support minimum two
monitors and enable connectivity to a VCR or similar recording device.
(8)
There shall be automatic web enabled updation of the Video conferencing software for
the latest version/patches/upgrades.
(9)
The audio/video requirements, processing requirements, house-keeping requirements,

operational requirements and future capabilities, implementation requirements,
interfaces with other systems and issues relating to Security and Controls have to be
comprehensively taken care of and provided for in the Video Conferencing solution.
(10) The Contractor shall supply the necessary hardware, software for setting up the Video
Conferencing facility, including design, setup, operationalize and maintain the same at
all the locations to meet the requirements of the Company.
(11) Contractor must submit the list of Ports and Services require to be opened on the
Network equipment like Firewall, Router etc. at all the locations for implementing the
Total solution.
7.5.7.2 Technical Specification
a)
Multi Conferencing Unit (MCU)
Against some items, Functional requirement and Technical specifications of MCU (Multi
Conferencing Unit) are given. The Functional requirement needs to be complied mandatorily.
1. Functional Requirement
(1)
Will provide connectivity to minimum 30 users concurrently (upto 10 users in Full HD

mode 1080p), in upto 8 concurrent conferences.
(2)
Will be Full High Definition video capacity (1920x1080), and support users of same or
lower capacity i.e. 128 Kbps to 4 Mbps per user (port), and voice call.
(3)
Lower speed connection shall not affect higher speed connections (independent port
transcoding).
(4)
Will support IP and SIP protocols, and having 1 PRI Gateway scalable to 2 PRI.
(5)
Will be of open standards technology to allow connection from any other brand /
technology of MCU, end point or desktop Unit, including existing SD models.
(6)
Will allow video and Data concurrently.
(7)
Network interface minimum 10/100 Mbps, and manageable on network, SNMP supported
(8)
Shall have conference scheduling and management, user management, directory

management, call logging, etc.

- 129 -

(GTCL)
(9)

Shall be possible to initiate session recording from the MCU onto recording server, and
streaming / webcasting from the Server.
(10) Shall be IPv6 compliant or shall be software upgradable to IPv6 compliance in future at no
extra cost.
2. Equipment Specification
(1)
The MCU shall be real-time media conferencing platform providing a high performance,
scalable, IP-network (H.323) solution with feature-rich easy-to-use multipoint video and
integrated (video, audio, and content) conferencing features.
(2)
Bidders shall quote a hardware based standalone platform for MCU; software based
MCU and embedded MCU on video end points are not acceptable.
(3)
Capacity
(4)
a)
Up to 30 media and audio (H.323) resources with dedicated encode and decode
streams.
b)
Flexible resource capacity shall support up to 10 HD 1080 resources for CP and Up

to 30 CIF/SD resources for CP at 25-30 fps.
High Definition
Full High Definition (HD) refers to high-quality picture resolution. An HD-compliant
endpoint shall connect to a conference at a resolution of 1920x1080 and the bit rate of 128
Kbps~4 Mb.
(5)
Advanced Open IP Platform

Standards-based system, optimized for IP and easy application integration.
(6)
Simplified Management and Maintenance

Fast deployment with web-based wizard, tiered administration levels, and automated
hardware systems management.
(7)
(8)
Video Support
a)
H.261, H.263, H.264
b)
From QCIF to 1080
c)
Up to Full high definition (HD) 1080 in continuous presence (CP) transcoding
d)
720p Voice switching (VSW)
e)
Up to 30 frames per second
f)
16:9 and 4:3 aspect ratio
g)
H.239 content sharing resolution: VGA, SVGA, XGA
h)
H.239 Content in H264 Format
i)
Independent port transcoding
Audio Support
- 130 -

(GTCL)
(9)

a)
G.711a/u, G.722, G.728, G.722.1, G.722.1 Annex C, 22 kHz Stereo Surround
b)
IVR prompts for auto attendance
c)
User and managed mute control
d)
DTMF support
Management Tools
a)
Web-based management with support for multiple languages
b)
Administrator, operator, and chairman views
c)
System-generated emails to administrator in case of system alerts
d)
Onboard shelf management monitors and maintains hardware elements
e)
Complete XML API kit for 3rd party application integration
f)
On-board scheduling option or scheduling and gate keeping functions via external
server
(10) Network Support

a)
IP H.323 and SIP
b)
Dual Ethernet interface (10/100/1000 Mb )
c)
128 Kbps to 4 Mbps conference data rates per MCU port
d)
1 PRI ISDN Gateway inbuilt/ external upgradeable to support 2 PRI in future

without any change in main hardware
(11) Transcoding
a)
Audio algorithms
b)
Video algorithms
c)
Networks
d)
Resolution
e)
Frame rates
f)
Transcoding support up to HD resolution in CP
(12) IP QoS
a)
Packet Loss Recovery protocol
b)
Diff Serv
c)
IP Precedence
d)
Dynamic jitter buffer
(13) Security
a)
AES media encryption

- 131 -

(GTCL)
b)

Tiered permission levels include Administrator, Operator, Chairperson
(14) Conferencing Highlights

a)
Conference Mode: On demand, password protected, schedule
b)
Integration with recording and streaming solution
c)
Unified conferencing (voice, video and data)
d)
Up to 24 different conference layouts
e)
To allow multiple concurrent conferences (at least 8)
f)
Personal layout
g)
Auto layout
h)
Layout range 1x1 to 4x4
i)
Using DTMF and FECC user shall be able to perform actions on the conference
j)
Dialing to the MCU IP Address or Prefix
k)
Operations during a call for Chair Person and Normal User
l)
Chair person can invite participant by IP Address or E.164
m)
Camera Control
n)
Video Force
o)
Mute & Block Audio
p)
Mute Video
q)
Drop Participant
r)
Terminate Conference
s)
Video Invite
t)
Layout skins
u)
Lecture and presentation mode
v)
Conference profiles
w)
Far-end camera control (FECC)
x)
Conference dial out and dial in
y)
Up to 40 Meeting Rooms
z)
Advanced IVR flow
aa)
Multilingual site names
bb)
H.239 support over cascaded links
cc)
Address bookminimum 200 addresses capacity

- 132 -

(GTCL)
dd)

CDR (Call Details Record)
(15) H.239
The H. 239 protocol compliant endpoint can simultaneously send and receive two channels
of conference video streams : dynamic conference video and PC screen content.
(16) Media Encryption
The system shall provide the AES 128-based media encryption mode, so the conferencing
connection is more secure. There shall be no port loss when AES encryption is turned on.
(17) IVR-Enabled Conferencing
The Interactive Voice Response (IVR) function lets participants perform various operations
during ongoing conferences according to voice prompts. The participants use their
endpoints keypads and remote control to interact with the conferences menu-driven scripts
using DTMF codes.
(18) Recording Link
The MCU shall support the function of recording link. It can work with the Recording and
Streaming Server to record the content of the conference at the MCU.
(19) Setting up conferences
a)
Instant Conference - Convene an instant conference. The conference is deleted from

the MCU right after its completion.
b)
Meeting Room - The meeting room is stored in the MCU memory, without
occupying any resource. It can be activated anytime.
c)
Reserve a Conference (optional) - The reserved conference is stored at the MCU and
occupies resource. The system automatically convenes the conference according to
the reservation time.
(20) User Interfaces

a)
Web Interface
The system provides the Web-based user-friendly operation interface on Windows
and Mac / Industry standard open protocol UNIX / LINUX etc. To simply and
conveniently manage and monitor conferences, and maintain the device, the user
only needs to access the Web client program of the MCU by using the IE browser
at the PC. The Web interface is designed for the administrator and operator.
b)
Onscreen User Interface

The Onscreen User Interface is a menu-based interface on the endpoint of the
participant. The user can perform common conference operations through the
endpoints remote control and operation menus. The interface is designed for end
users.
a)
The MCU shall have three levels : Chair Person - A Chairperson can only manage ongoing conferences and
participants. The Chairperson does not have access to the MCU configurations
and utilities.

- 133 -

(GTCL)

Operator - An Operator can perform all the MCU tasks a Chairperson does. In
addition, Operators can also view the MCU configurations.
Administrator - An Administrator can perform all the tasks of Chairpersons
and Operator users. In addition, Administrators can perform all configuration
and maintenance tasks.
(21) Hardware Monitoring
Control function to monitor the usage of the system CPU, memory and resource usage and
other hardware parts of MCU.
(22) Signaling Monitoring
Monitors the LAN port connection status and gateway registration information of the device
you are using.
(23) Operating System
Linux or equivalent
(24) CDR
MCU shall support the Call Detail Record (CDR) utility, which enables you to view
summary information about conferences, and retrieve full conference information and
archive it to a file. The file can be used to produce reports or can be exported to external
billing programs. MCU shall be able to store details of up to 200 conferences.
b)
VC End Point
The proposed video conferencing system must include using a remote control interface or touch
panel control. The architecture must be based on industry standards wherever possible. This
includes standards such as the H.323 and SIP umbrella standards for IP-based audio/video and
H.320 umbrella standard for ISDN-based audio/video.
3. Functional Requirements
(1)
Will provide multi-conferencing for minimum 1+3 users concurrently in HD mode, with
upto4 Mbps on IP/SIP, and ISDN PRI / BRI port.
(2)
Will be High Definition video capacity (1280x1024), and support users of same or lower
capacity i.e. 128 Kbps to 2 Mbps per user (port), and voice calls through MCU.
(3)
Shall have PTZ camera, minimum 10X optical zoom, and 2 numbers microphones.
(4)
Lower speed connection shall not affect higher speed connections (independent port
transcoding).
(5)
Will be of open standards technology to allow connection from any other brand /
technology of MCU, end point or desktop Unit.
(6)
Will allow video and Data concurrently, from camera, computer and document camera on
input side, and to Display, Projector (i.e. dual display) and recorder on output side.
(7)
Network interface minimum 10/100 Mbps, and manageable on network, SNMP supported.
(8)
Shall have conference scheduling and management, directory management, call logging,
etc for the End Point.
- 134 -

(GTCL)
(9)

Shall be possible to initiate session recording from the End Point onto any recording
server.
(10) Shall be IPv6 compliant or shall be software upgradable to IPv6 compliance in future at no
extra cost
(11) The distribution of end points shall be as under:
i. Agargaon: 5 No.
ii. Petrobangla H.O: 5 No.
iii. Ashuganj: 2 No.
iv. Demra: 2 No.
7.5.8
STM-1 SDH Equipment

(1)
Microwave/IP Radio will be used for access link. Non licensed frequency available in
BTRC will be used for this Radio Link. However as a stand by communication link, FOC
access link shall also be used. The access link using Optical fiber shall be based on SDH
STM-1 equipment.
(2)
If FOC is used from MTS to BTCLs/Service Providers AP, SDH/Router and Ethernet
node will be installed at MTS end. Process signal from RTU will be interfaced with SDH
system/Router at electrical level 10/100 Base T level.
(3)
All the SDH equipment will be connected at STM-1 (1+0) optical level.
(4)
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the FOC based Access Link as per
the scope of work, which broadly includes the following system packages:
SDH STM-1 optical Fibre based digital telecommunication system
Integration of SDH nodes with Network Management System
(5)
Its aggregate rate shall be STM-1, and it will support tributary interfaces with various bit
rates including PDH, SDH and Ethernet interfaces. It will have higher order and lower
order cross-connect capability to realize various networking topology structures such as
ring and chain. It shall support 1:2 protection function of E1 card. Its functions and
technical specifications shall comply with the requirements of ITU-T recommendations
and other relevant standards.
(6)
STM-1 Optical to STM-1 Electrical converter is a compact solution housed in a 1U high

(44mm), 19-inch rack-mountable shelf, which can be installed in any DIN-standard 19inch rack.
(7)
This unit offers three power supply options. Options for the power supply to the equipment
include:
a) Dual DC - 48V Inputs (range -18V DC ~ -72V DC), for power input redundancy. b)
(8)
The STM-1 shall have the following features
1+0, STM-1 Optical / Electrical Converter version.

- 135 -

(GTCL)

19 inch, 1U (44mm) rack mounting chassis!19 inch, 1U (44mm) rack mounting

chassis .
Standard 75 BNC connector of the STM-1 electrical interface
Short haul (1310nm), long haul (1550nm)
Management options:
a) Serial RS232 Port (COM Port).
b) USB interface (COM Port).
c) 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Port allows the equipment to be remotely
accessed using
d) Telnet over a TCP-IP Network.
e) SNMP V2 monitoring.
f) Network Management System - Windows XP and Windows latest
licensed version / Industry standard latest licensed open protocol
UNIX / LINUX etc. compatible Network Management System (NMS)
High reliability, complies to ITU-T G.703 and G.957.

State-of-the-art design. Industrial Grade Temperature specifications - ensures normal
working under difficult environments.
Low power consumption.
Supports local and remote loop-back on electrical or optical interfaces for system
Diagnostics.
Simple operation and maintenance.
Compact.
75 Ohms (BNC connector) compliant with ITU-T G.703 and Telcordia GR-253
155Mbps Electrical interfaces
ITU-T G.783 compatible loss of signal detect.
STM-1 Electrical Interface - handles over 12.7dB of cable loss.
SFP - LC optical interface.
Hot-pluggable SFPs.
SFP with DDMI Interface - for read back of transmit and received optical power.
Class 1 laser safety.
Compliant with following standards
G.703
Provides one standard STM-1 electrical interface complying with G.703
G.707
Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
G.781
Structure of Recommendations on equipment for the Synchronous Digital

Hierarchy (SDH)
G.782
Types and characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment
G.783
Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional

blocks
Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.813

- 136 -

(GTCL)

G.825
Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Which are Based on the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.957
Provides one standard STM-1 optical interface complying with G.957
G.958
Digital line systems based on the Synchronous digital hierarchy for use on
optical fiber cables
(9)
The STM-1 specifications shall be as under.
a) STM-1 Electrical Interface

Data Rate
Standard
Impendence
Peak to peak voltage (signal)
Rise time between 10% and 90%
amplitudes of the measured steady
state amplitude
Maximum Attenuation
Jitter
Line Code
Physical Connector
155.52 Mbps
ITU-T G.703 Compliant
75 Ohms resistive
1 + 0.1 V
< 2 ns
12.7dB at 78MHz
As per ITU-T G.825
CMI
BNC Coaxial
b) STM-1 Optical Interface

Data Rate
Standard
Coding
Connector
Light source
Wave length options
Transmission type
Automatic Laser Shut Down Option
Transmit power
Receive sensitivity
155.52 Mbps
ITU-T G.957 STM-1
NRZ
LC
Laser Diode
850nm / 1310nm / 1550nm
Dual Fiber (standard)
Single Fiber Bi-directional (optional)
Provided - User selectable option
As per SFP used
As per SFP used
(10) The environmental specifications shall be as under
7.5.9
Working
temperature
-00C ~ +55 Deg C for operation
Relative humidity
< 95% (Non condensing)
Software
7.5.9.1 Integration

- 137 -

(GTCL)

(11) Bidder shall provide an open-architecture system that shall allow for future integration
of other systems that use standardized system interfaces.
(12) The System shall be capable of operating as a stand-alone system but shall have the
capability of integrating with existing and/or other types of Radio systems. Bidder shall
provide clearly defined test documents that demonstrate the capability to connect to
additional systems. Bidder shall describe all aspects of the expansion capabilities for future
connections.
(13) Bidder shall be responsible for the integration and overall system functionality of the new
systems with any Employer system, including Site Acceptance Test.
7.5.9.2 Overall Software Requirements
(1)
Bidder shall ensure that a complete set of support software and documentation is delivered
with the Radio System; this includes all disks, CDs and manuals that were received with
the original package.
(2)
All Commercial off the Shelf (COTS) software shall be the most current version at the
time of installation.
(3)
After initial system installation, all subsequent software development, configuration, and
testing shall occur without interfering with normal system operations.
(4)
Any custom developed software shall be programmed in a single, industry standard, highlevel language (Such as C) regardless of the platform.
(5)
Bidder shall provide a program for software configuration management.
7.5.9.3 Operating System Software

(1)
Operating System (OS) environment for all computers shall be a recognised industry
standard operating system available off the shelf. The preferred operating system shall be
the latest licensed version of Windows NT (or XP) / Industry standard open protocol
UNIX / LINUX etc.
(2)
Bidder shall supply the source code and unlimited license for any custom application
software developed under this contract (This requirement does not apply to COTS).
7.5.9.4 Applications Software

(1)
The use of software emulators to execute applications is not acceptable
(2)
Bidder shall provide a full set of technical manuals in books and CDs for all COTS
software. The application software shall require no source code modification to the
delivered operating system.
(3)
All software interfaces with the operating system shall be via OS interface standards.
7.5.9.5 Software Upgrades

Bidder shall advise Employer of any software revisions to the installed system that become
available as a standard product offering during the warranty period. Should Employer wish to
- 138 -

(GTCL)

incorporate any or all of the new software products into the System this shall be undertaken at
no additional cost to Employer.
7.5.9.6 Maintenance Utilities
(1)
The support software shall consist of all compilers, editors, loaders, debugging aids,
linkers, libraries, cross-reference, hardware diagnostic routines and other utilities required
in the generation, maintenance and modification of all system software and hardware.
(2)
Bidder shall provide software and hardware maintenance and diagnostic utilities.
(3)
Bidder shall also provide a list of these utilities cross-referenced by the sub-system to
which they apply and shall be part of database in which when report is needed; printing
will be available for the list.
(4)
Utilities shall allow the maintenance role to be carried out by individuals with little or no
understanding of, or experience with, the operations system. The utilities shall be user
friendly and require little training to use effectively.
7.5.9.7 Software Quality Factors

a) Bidder shall design the System to meet the requirements presented herein. Bidder
shall identify all sub-systems used throughout the System and shall categorise them.
b) Major categories shall be COTS (non-developed items), modified COTS, or systemdeveloped software.
c) Bidder shall establish and maintain an efficient software quality program for all
modified COTS and developed software. Bidder shall provide a field proven
software system. Where an integrated software package is required, bidder shall
utilize COTS software to the maximum extent possible

- 139 -

(GTCL)

8.
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
8.1
INTRODUCTION
Field Instruments like Differential pressure transmitter, Pressure transmitter, Temperature
transmitter, Turbine flow meter, Flow computer etc. will be used to measure and monitor gas
parameters at various sites on the GTCL pipeline network. The open / close status of gas
valves will be monitored and some main line valves and flow control valves will also be
controlled under this SCADA system.
Remote Telemetry Units (RTU) will be located closed to these field instrumentation devices
which in turn will report to the centralized SCADA system at MCC / ACC through suitable
communication system.
8.2
8.3
GENERAL
(1)
All electronic instruments requiring separate power supply shall generally operate on
24V DC.
(2)
Electronic transmitters shall generally be two-wire type. These shall have transmission /
output signal of 4-20 mA DC and shall be capable of delivering rated current into
external load of at least 600 ohm when powered with 24 V DC nominal voltages.
(3)
The meter signal processing unit shall be microprocessor-based redundant electronics

suitable for installation in the field under the ambient condition specified. Meter
electronics shall be Weather proof to IP 65 / NEMA 4 and flameproof suitable to install
in area classification IEC Zone-1, Gas Gr. IIA & IIB, and Temp. Class T3 by a statutory
body such as FM, UL, and ATEX etc.
(4)
All field instruments shall be suitable for reliable and continuous operation under the
project environmental conditions specified. The field electronic instruments and
Junction boxes shall be certified weatherproof to IEC-60529 classification IP 65 as
minimum for protection against moisture or dust ingress. All Junction boxes, cable
glands & accessories shall be certified weather proof to minimum IP65 and Flame proof
suitable for hazardous area classification IEC Zone 1, Gr. IIA, IIB, T3.
(5)
All field transmitters shall be weather proof to minimum IP65 and suitable for
hazardous area classification IEC Zone 1, Gr. IIA, IIB, T3.
(6)
Hand held configurator shall be provided for remote calibration, remote configuration
and remote diagnostics of the transmitters.
PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
(1)
The Contractor shall verify the process connection for pressure instruments at the sites.
As a reference, process connections for pressure instruments are normally 1/2" NPT.
(2)
At some sites, the Contractor shall make a branch on the existing impulse tubing as a
tapping point for pressure instruments. The Contractor shall survey the installation
condition, make hook-up drawings and install the pressure transmitters.
(3)
Pressure transmitters shall be electronic SMART type, two-wire, loop powered at

- 140 -

(GTCL)

24VDC with 4-20 mA output and an integral digital indicator meter in both SI and FPS
engineering units.
(4)
Transmitters shall have HART protocol for digital communication.
(5)
Material for construction for wetted parts shall be SS 316L as a minimum, except '"here
process conditions require more stringent materials. Materials for construction shall be
suitable for the process media and based upon the piping specification.
(6)
Pressure transmitters shall have minimum accuracy 0.075% of the calibrated span.
Transmitters shall have independent external screws for zero and span adjustment.
Pressure, Differential Pressure, Flow

01.
Working Principle
Smart
02.
Type
2-Wire
03.
Output signal
Simultaneous transmission of digital and 4-20 mA DC

signal, HART protocol.
04.
Signal Processing Unit :
Silicon solid-state electronic circuitry
05.
Measuring element
Capsule/Diaphragm
06.
Element material
AISI-316 (Stainless Steel) or better
07.
Over Pressure
150% of maximum pressure
08.
Turn-down ratio
10:1 for vacuum / very low pressure application.

30:1 for other application
09.
Span and Zero
Continuous non-interacting tamper proof, remote as well

as manual adjustable from instrument with zero
suppression and elevation facility.
10.
Enclosure
Epoxy coated Die cast aluminium. IP-65 (Explosion proof

for NEC Class-1, Division 1 area) with NPT (F) cable
entry.
11.
Output Indicator
LCD type
12.
Body
Forged Carbon Steel (SS for DM Water)
13.
Operating Voltage
24 V DC 10%
14.
Load
600 Ohms (min.) at 24 Volts DC
15.
Performance :a)
Accuracy
0.1 % of span or better
b)
Repeatability
0.05 % of span or better

- 141 -

(GTCL)

c)
Response time
d)
Zero & Span drift :
0.015% per Deg.C at max span

0.11% per Deg.C at min span
e)
Stability
0.1% of calibrated span for six months for ranges upto and
including 70 Kg/ sq.cm.
0.25% of calibrated span for six months for ranges more
than 70 Kg/ sq.cm (g).
16.
Process connection
NPT (F)
17.
Sealing / Isolation
Extended diaphragm with 5 meters SS armoured capillary

for corrosive, viscous and dirty fluid applications. Material
for separator diaphragm, depending on application.
18.
Nameplate
Tag number and Service engraved in stainless steel tag

plate
19.
Accessories
a)
Installation accessories such as mounting bracket,

high tensile carbon steel U-bolts suitable for pipe
mounting.
b)
NPT 2-valve stainless steel manifold, constructed

from SS316 bar stock for pressure transmitter. In case
it becomes necessary to use a DP transmitter for
pressure measurement then a 3 valve manifold should
be used in place of 2 valve manifold.
c)
NPT 5-valve stainless steel manifold, constructed

from SS316 bar stock for DP transmitter. 3 valve
manifold for DP application in flue gas and air.
d)
Companion flange with nuts, bolts and gaskets.

NPT cable gland
8.4
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
8.4.1
Thermowells
8.4.2
250 msec or better
(1)
Temperature measuring instruments shall be provided with thermowell. The boss on the
pipeline as a process connection for thermowell will be prepared by the Employer. The
Contractor shall verify the information of process connection and design suitable thermo
well.
(2)
Thermowells shall be constructed from one-piece bar stock, and machined to get a
smooth and tapered profile with no sharp edges. All insertion type temperature
instruments and indicators shall be provided with a thermowell. The thermowell
immersion depth in the pipe shall be between one-third and two-thirds of the internal
diameter of the pipe.
Temperature Transmitter
(1)
Resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) shall be used for centralized and multi-point
- 142 -

(GTCL)

indication. The RTDs shall be grade II. Platinum 100 ohms at 0 C (32 F).
(2)
A detector with head mounted transmitters shall be used with dual output 4-20 mA
signal directly proportional and linear to temperature.
Resistance Temperature Detector

01.
Type
Platinum (Duplex), Ungrounded
02.
Resistance
100 ohm at 0 degC
03.
Base
Wound on ceramic (anti-inductive)
04.
Wiring
3 /4 Wire
05.
Protecting Tube
:-
a)
O.D.
8 mm
b)
Material
SS-316, Seamless
c)
Filling
Magnesium oxide (Purity above 99.4%).
06.
Calibration
DIN 43760 Class A
07.
Characteristics
Linear with respect to temperature within % of top

range value
08.
Head :
09.
10.
a)
Type
IP-65 universal screwed type. (Explosion proof for NEC

Class-1, Division 1 area)
b)
Material
Epoxy coated Die cast aluminum or better
c)
Terminal blocks
Nickel plated Brass-screw type / silver plated
d)
Cable connection :
e)
Instrument connection : NPT to well
f)
Others
Terminal head cover with SS chain and suitable gasket
Accessories
a)
Adjustable nipple-union-nipple [1/2 Sch 80 X

NPT (M)] with thermowell connection
b)
Compression fittings/unions
c)
Flanges etc. (for flanged connections only)
d)
Forged / barstock thermowell as per ASME PTC 19.3

code. Process connection M33X2 (M).
e)
Material of construction of Thermowell: SS 316: In

general
Nameplate
NPT gland and grommet.
Tag number, service engraved in stainless steel tag plate
Thermowell
- 143 -

(GTCL)

01.
Material
AISI 316 SS drilled from bar stock
02.
Process connection
M33 X 2 (M).
03.
Max Internal bored dia :
Shall match with temperature Element
04.
Bore Connection
5% wall thickness
05.
Identification Mark
Tab Number punched on head
06.
Surface Treatment
Polish after machining
07.
Element Connection
NPT (F)
08.
Certification
ASME Performance Test Code 19.3
09.
Accessories
Plug and chain for test thermo wells
Field Mounted Temperature Transmitters

01.
Working Principle
Smart
02.
Type
Two wire
03.
Input
RTD (Pt 100)-3 / 4 wire
04.
Isolation
500V AC
05.
Output Signal
Simultaneous transmission of digital and dual output 4-20

mA DC signal with HART protocol.
06.
Signal Processing
Circuitry
Microprocessor based Solid State Electronic
07.
Span and Zero
Adjustable in field, Non-interacting facility for elevation

and suppression of zero.
08.
Enclosure Class
IP-65 (Explosion proof for NEC Class-1, Division 1 area)
09.
Output Indicator
LCD type
10.
Span Adjustability
Yes
11.
Nameplate
Tag number to be engraved on metallic tag plate rigidly

fixed to the body.
12.
Body
Die Cast aluminum
13.
Operating Voltage
16-48 V dc
14.
Load
600 Ohms at 24V DC (Min.)
15.
Performance
a)
Accuracy
0.4% of span
b)
Repeatability
0.05% of span
c)
Cold Junction
Compensation:
Built-in

- 144 -

(GTCL)
d)
16.
8.5
Calibration
Accessories

As per N.I.S.T Monograph 125 for T/C and European

Curve Alpha = 0.00385 for RTD
a)
Universal mounting bracket suitable for pipe and

surface mounting.
b)
Hi-tensile Carbon Steel U-bolts.
c)
NPT cable gland
PICK UP SIGNAL FROM THE EXISTING TURBINE METER

The Contractor shall supply and install a dual pulse output pickup head in place of the single
pulse output pickup in the existing turbine flow meter sensor head at sites specified in this
document. The output signal from the existing turbine flow meter shall be cabled via junction
box to RTU.
Turbine Flow meter
Sensor
01.
Type
Turbine (in line full-bore, based on magnetic pick of

pulses)
02.
Output Signal
Pulse
03.
Material of
Construction
a)
Body : AISI 316
b)
Rotor: AISI 431 or 410
c)
Bearings: Tungsten Carbide / Stellited Sleeve
04.
Flow rate range
As required.
05.
Linearity
+
_ 0.25% or better.
06.
Repeatability
+
_ 0.02% or better.
07.
Mounting
On-Line, flanged
08.
Enclosure
IP 65
Transmitter
01.
Electronics
Solid State
02.
Power Supply
240V AC10%, 50Hz.
03.
Input
Input from Sensor
04.
Display
4 1/2 digit LCD
05.
Output
Isolated 4-20mA DC

- 145 -
8.6

(GTCL)

06.
Measuring Accuracy
+
_ 0.5% of full scale range
07.
Totalized Value
Required
08.
Housing
Epoxy coated Die cast aluminium. IP-65 (Explosion proof

for NEC Class-1, Division 1 area) with NPT (F) cable
entry.
09.
Nameplate
Tag number, service engraved in stainless steel tag plate
10.
Accessories
a)
Mounting accessories, prefab cable etc.
b)
NPT cable gland
FLOW COMPUTER
The flow computers shall be microprocessor based, with digital display, data entry keypad
and alphanumeric display with AGA firmware for natural gas flow measurement. Flow
computer electronics shall be protected from industrial interferences; and shall be shock and
vibration proof shall have low power consumption.
The flow computers shall compute and display the instantaneous and totalized flow rate for
each stream corrected for pressure and temperature variations. The flow computers receive
data from the Gas chromatograph for calculation of compressibility factor as per AGA-8
detail method. The flow computers shall be linked to the RTU for providing the flow
measurements of the individual stream runs and related process variables.
The flow computer shall be certified for custody transfer applications by laboratory /
institutes authorized by weights and measures authorities of their country.
The flow computers shall have an audit trail facility. It should be able to store data for 30
days.
Contractor has to submit the flow chart for FDS (Functional Design Schematic) of the flow
computer.
All the licensed configuration software shall be supplied with flow computers.
Mounting shall be Flush panel type in General purpose enclosure.
POWER SUPPLY: 230 V AC 10%, 50 Hz 3% (UPS) or 24 VDC or in some cases Solar
powered with battery back-up suitable for 30 no-sunny days. The system shall be designed
for supplying power to field mounted electronic instruments like PTs, TTs, DPTs etc.
INPUT SIGNAL CAPABILITY:
a)
Pulse / frequency signals from dual HF signals from turbine meter
b)
4-20 mA D.C. (2 wire) superimposed with digital signal (HART protocol) from
SMART differential pressure transmitter representing differential pressure across
orifice for flow measurement.
c)

- 146 -

(GTCL)

SMART pressure transmitter representing line pressure.

d)
SMART temperature transmitter representing line temperature.
e)
Other standard inputs available.
INTERFACE CAPABILITY:
Contractor shall provide serial links along with cables and connectors at both ends for all the
signals with MODBUS protocol. The communication between flow computers and on line
RTU & SCADA, shall be through serial communication and also through GPRS enabled
GSM modem in-built or separately installed with the flow computers.
Flow computers shall be interfaced with Employers RTU for flow metering and gas
composition data such as gas temperature and pressure, energy flow rate and total energy,
corrected volumetric flow rate and total flow, last days cumulative energy and volume,
current days running volumetric total and energy total, volume and energy integrated at 6
a.m., gas composition (C1, C2, C3, iC4, nC4, iC5, nC5, C6+, Specific gravity, Calorific
value, mol% of N2, CO2) etc. Contractor to note that SCADA Sub Contractor / Contractors
shall provide RS 485 serial link at the RTUs for interfacing of intelligent electronic devices
like flow computers. For flow computer interface to RTU, Contractor shall accordingly
provide RS 485 link (Modicon Modbus ASCII & RTU protocol supporting IEEE single
precision floating point no. with user configurable register).
The digital and analog data shall be made available to RTU (SCADA) and it shall be mapped
in the contiguous registers so that data can be fetched / written in minimum transactions.
Flow computer shall have provision to configure an IEEE floating point in two 16 bit modbus
register. Provision shall also be kept at flow computer for writing data from RTU e.g. in some
Flow computer there will be requirement of downloading gas compositions, calorific value
and flow set point etc. from RTU.
Contractor shall furnish all details like pin configuration and signal wise MODBUS address
mapping list etc. for smooth interfacing of this communication link with RTU (SCADA).
Contractor shall also furnish the details of implemented MODBUS protocol like function
codes for read and write, CRC implementation, BCC implementation, register addressing
methods / mapping etc. during detail engineering for serial interfaces to SCADA (RTU).
Contractor shall supply 25 meter of interface cable between the Flow computers and RTU
along with connectors at both ends & necessary converters and other cables accordingly for
each flow computer.
KEYPAD CAPABILITY:
The data entry keypad shall have the provision to enter the following:
a)
Pressure and temperature base factor
b)
Specific gravity and scaling factor
c)
Mol % or composition of the gas to be metered
d)
Report headings, frequency and timing of reports
e)
Selection of parameter to be displayed and on-demand printing of reports
f)
Calorific value

- 147 -

(GTCL)

g)
Flow, pressure, temperature and density values and give compensated flow for any
external conditions
h)
Gas Compressibility
i)
Other standard features available
The flow computer shall have provision to enter default values of all inputs (inclusive of gas
chromatograph) low / high alarms for all inputs (inclusive of gas chromatograph) and shall be
user configurable. The flow computer shall use the default values in case any input goes
beyond low/high limit.
OUTPUT CAPABILITY:
a)
4-20 mA compensated volume flow rate output & Flow set point (as external remote
set point) for flow controller, energy rate (or mass flow rate),
b)
Contact alarms output for unit malfunction, process alarm etc. (3 nos.).
c)
RS 485 serial output link for telemetry link for all signals as specified
d)
RS232C serial link for Employers PC for reports
e)
Other standard outputs available (Minimum 2 nos. 4-20mA analog output for
pressure & temperature) (Galvanic isolation is required for all inputs and outputs)
COMPUTATIONAL CAPABILITY:
a)
Volume flow rate at standard, normal or operator specified base conditions (Sm3/hr)
b)
Integrated corrected volume
c)
Mass flow rate and integrated mass
d)
Energy flow rate and integrated energy.
e)
Linearization of temperature input
f)
Generation of standard and user defined reports at ticket printer. All reports shall be
user configurable.
g)
Co-efficient of deviation from ideal gas law as per AGA 8 on the basis of specific
gravity, temperature, pressure and mol % of N2 and CO2 and other compositions for
all flow computers
h)
Previous days flow / energy (i.e. yesterdays 6.00 A.M total volume / energy to
todays 6.00 A.M total volume / energy) & current running total for the day (i.e.
volume tantalizer/ integrator value at 6.00 A.M from first day) to be stored in a
separate location (register) and these shall be user configurable.
i)
Todays accumulated flow /energy (running total since morning 6.00 A.M to current
time) and shall be user configurable.
j)
Generation of reports for totalized volume & energy at daily (6 am), weekly,
fortnightly & monthly intervals etc. shall be user configurable.
k)
All the above data shall also be made available by Contractor in the serial links to
RTU.
STANDARDS USED:
For the above, applicable standards are:
- 148 -

(GTCL)

a)
AGA report 3 and 7 for flow rate and total flow for all tags for Orifice meter and
turbine type flow meter (as applicable).
b)
AGA-8 characterization method to determine density, compressibility, super

compressibility factor etc. for flow computers
c)
AGA Report 5 for energy rate and integrated energy & if any other statutory
standard required.
ENGINEERING UNITS:
Volume flow rate - MMSCFD, Mass - kg/hr, Pressure - PSIG / BARG, Temperature -C / F,
Energy - Kcal
MEMORY TYPE : Non-Volatile
A/D AND D/A CONVERTORS:
Calculation accuracy shall be better than 0.05% of full scale including linearity, Hysteresis,
repeatability and resolution. Accuracy for analogue inputs to be minimum 0.05% and for
analogue outputs accuracy shall be minimum 0.1%.
SCAN PROCESSING TIME:
a)
The interval between computer readings of Process variables shall not exceed 1 sec.
b)
The interval between each cycle for computation of instantaneous flow rate and
totalized flow shall be less than 1 sec.
c)
Algorithm and rounding off error for computation shall be with in 0.001% of
computed value.
SECURITY:
Key lock shall be provided for prevention of unauthorized data entry. One hardware and two
software security levels shall be provided.
DISPLAY CAPABILITY:
The flow computer shall have the capability to display any two of the following parameters at
a time:
Uncompensated volume flow rate, Compensated volume flow rate, Integrated volume
(corrected and not corrected), Mass flow rate, Integrated mass, Density/Specific gravity,
Pressure, Temperature, Energy rate & total energy, Complete gas composition, Calculated
parameters (compressibility factor etc.), Current accumulation, previous day accumulation,
Data entry, Error codes, Selected parameter codes, Alarms (process and systems) including
diagnostic message, Engineering units as per selected parameter, Other standard displays
available, Custody transfer flow computers shall have audit trail, All the above data shall also
be made available by Contractor in the serial links to RTU.
DISPLAY TYPE: Alphanumeric LCD display
DIAGNOSTICS:

- 149 -

(GTCL)

Flow computers shall have elaborate and sufficient on-line diagnostics to ascertain accurate
and proper functioning of the flow computer. Results of diagnostics / checking shall be
displayed. Facility for easy testing of the accuracy shall be provided. Provision for high and
low limit check for each input, sensor break, saturation and alarms shall be provided.
8.7
LIMIT SWITCH
Limit switches for open / close valve position indication shall be of proximity type. The
switch enclosure shall be copper free cast aluminum, weather proof (NEMA 4X) and it shall
be intrinsically safe.
8.8
8.9
SOLENOID VALVE
01.
Operating Principle
Electromagnetic (noiseless)
02.
Coil voltage rating
24 V DC
03.
Pick-up / Drop-out voltage
60%/ 40% of rated coil voltage
04.
Ways
3 ways in general, other depending on

requirement
05.
Port size
1/4" NPT all ports
06.
Body
SS Bar Stock
07.
Trim
AISI SS-316
08.
Manual Operator
In built
09.
Duty
Suitable for continuous energization
10.
Sealing
Airtight and leak proof
11.
Ambient Temperature
0 - 55 OC
12.
Fluid Temperature
0-150 OC (approx.)
13.
Coil Enclosure
Stainless Steel
14.
Insulation
Class-H
15.
Coil Casing
IP-65
16.
Mounting
In epoxy painted enclosure
17.
Cable Connection
NPT
18.
Accessories
Mounting block, bolts etc.
19.
Special feature
LED indication
TUBING SYSTEM

- 150 -


(GTCL)
8.10
(1)
Stainless steel ANSI 316 tubing and fittings shall be used for the instrument gas supply
distribution system. Double compression fittings shall be used. Pneumatic devices shall
be stainless steel. Tubing shall be protected so that no galvanic corrosion will occur.
(2)
The tubing system shall be capable of continuously withstanding the design pressure
and temperature.
(3)
All materials for pressure lead pipe including valves, regulators and accessories, shall be
stainless steel. Pressure lead pipes and fittings shall be 316 SS with double compression
fittings.
(4)
Contractor shall supply 1/2" OD x 0.065" thick ASTM A 269 TP 316 stainless steel
fully annealed, cold drawn and seamless tubes as a minimum for impulse lines upto 600
# class. Higher thickness according to pressure rating shall be considered for higher pipe
classes.
(5)
Contractor shall supply a minimum of 20% of pipe / tubes as spare.
ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX

(1)
Junction boxes shall be of intrinsically safe types. Material for construction of junction
boxes shall be LM-6 cast aluminum.
(2)
Terminals shall be vibration proof, mounted on nickel-plated steel rails complete with
end covers and clamps for each row. All terminals shall be suitable for accepting a
minimum 2.5 mrn2 copper conductor in general. Sizing shall be done with due
consideration for accessibility and maintenance.
(3)
Plugs shall be of Nickel plated brass.
(4)
Cable glands shall be double compression type for use with armored cables. They shall
be made of Nickel plated brass. All cable glands shall be provided with rubber cable
hood. All cable glands shall be supplied to suit the cable dimensions. Various
components like rubber rings, metallic rings, metallic cones and the outer/inner nuts,
etc. shall be capable of being adjusted according to the cable tolerances.
01.
Type of enclosure
02.
No. of ways
As required plus 20% spare terminals
03.
Material
LM6 Cast Aluminum
04.
Type of cover :
Screwed at all four corners for door.
05.
Gasket
Neoprene
06.
Mounting
Surface
07.
Cable entry
Cable glands
08.
Grounding
Brass earth lug with green screw head.
09.
Number of Drain Holes

Dust tight & weatherproof conforming to IP 65
At bottom capped.
- 151 -

(GTCL)
8.11
8.12

10.
Identification
Label for JB and Tags for cable
11.
Colour
Outer Colour RAL 7032, Siemens Grey; Inner Colour

Brilliant White
12.
Accessories
a)
Rail mounted cage clamp type screw less terminals

suitable for conductor size up to 2.5sq.mm with
markers.
b)
Aluminum back panel
c)
Cable gland
d)
Ferrules & lugs
e)
Mounting brackets, bolts and nuts made of

brass.
INSTRUMENT STAND WITH SUNSHADE

a)
Transmitters / instruments / devices located in the field shall be grouped together and
shall be installed in Open Type Rack with canopy. Racks shall be factory prefabricated
& painted and complete with internal piping, tubing, manifold valve, isolation valves,
blowdown valves, integral explosion-proof junction box, wiring, illumination etc.
b)
The local instrument racks shall be free standing type constructed from suitable 3 mm
thick channel frame of steel and shall be provided with a canopy at top to protect the
equipment mounted in racks from falling objects, direct sun and water etc. The canopy
shall not be less than 3 mm thick steel and extended beyond the ends of the rack.
c)
The ex-proof junction box for racks shall conform to IP 65 protection class. Junction
box shall be complete with DIN rail mounted terminals, MCB, receptacles and earth
bar. All wiring shall be laid in PVC cable tray. Cable gland plate shall be provided for
cable entry from bottom. Earth bar shall be made of tinned copper continuous and of 25
X 6 MM size.
d)
Each rack shall be provided with receptacle, light fixture with wire guard and lighting
switch. Light fixtures shall be installed on the ceilings of rack.
e)
Contractor shall furnish the drawings showing detail arrangement of racks and hook up
along with instrument grouping at detailing stage for Owners approval.
INSTRUMENT CABLING
Instrumentation Cable (Screened Multi Pair Cable)
0.6/1 KV screened low smoke flame retardant cable
a)
Conductor
Tin coated copper Class-2 stranded conforming to IEC

60228
b)
Size
1.0 sq. mm.
c)
Insulation
XLPE conforming to IEC 60502
d)
Pair Formation
Two conductors twisted each other to form a pair

- 152 -

(GTCL)
e)

Screen
Laminated aluminum polyester tape with tinned copper

drain wire of 0.5mrn2.
Individual and overall screen shall be provided as
follows:
i) Individual & Overall screen for all analog
application
ii)
Overall screen for all digital application
f)
Drain wire
Tin coated solid copper drain wire of 0.5 sq. mm.
g)
Inner sheath
Extruded PVC, Type-ST-2 conforming to IEC 60502-1
h)
Armour
Helical stranded galvanised single round steel wire

armour.
i)
Outer Sheath
Extruded PVC Type ST-2 compound conforming to

IEC 60502-1 with flame retardant low smoke
properties conforming to IEC 60332-3 Category A
j)
Cable Identification
Manufacturer's standard
k)
Standard
BS 5308
8.12.1 Serial Link or Control Bus Cable

Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) cables, RS 232 for serial link. RS 485 or LEC 1158-2 for control
bus. The cables shall have mechanical protection, be isolated from electromagnetic
interference and be routed separately from power cables.
8.13
CABLE GLANDS
(1)
The Contractor shall supply air cable glands required for glanding the above mentioned
cables both at field instrument and local control panel locations, junction box locations
and at control room locations.
(2)
All cables glands shall be made of nickel-plated brass and they shall be double
compression type suitable for armored cables.
(3)
Flameproof glands shall be supplied wherever required with EXd certification.
Cable Gland
8.14
01.
Type
Double compression
02.
Entry Thread
NPT
03.
Material
Brass
04.
Finish
Nickel Plated.
05.
Protection
IP 65 or better
06.
Accessories
Neoprene gasket, locknuts, reducers etc.
INSTALLATION

- 153 -

(GTCL)

(1)
Contractor shall be responsible for installation of all the items in their scope of supply
including supply, fabrication and erection of all installation / erection material. The
scope of installation shall include all field instruments and control systems like field
instruments, flow computers, gas detector systems, control system equipment i.e
SCADA system in MCC / ACC including supply / fabrication / erection / installation of
all erection material i.e. cables, cable glands, junction boxes, cable ducts, Trays,
conduits, instrument supports, trenches, instrument road crossing as required
completing the job in all respect.
(2)
Supply / fabrication and installation of instrument mounting posts, support stands /

frames, fittings, brackets and other consumables for mounting and supporting all
instruments, instrument system components and fixing the same.
(3)
Whenever installation is beyond the scope of Contractor, employer or its authorized

representative shall install the instruments as per the drawing / document / details
provided by the Contractor. However, in such a case it must be ensured that complete
installation materials shall be supplied.
(4)
Installation of any underground cables shall include excavation, cable segregation,

support, back filling with grades of sands, tiling, trench makers etc. In case of
underground cables are required to be in RCC trenches, all installation shall be carried
out except excavation. Suitable cable markers made of MS shall be provided for all
underground cabling.
(5)
Installation of aboveground cables includes identification, suitable supports, and angle /

perforated / ladder tray duct fixing and fire proofing (if required as per job
specification).
(6)
Installation of cable tray / ladder tray, ducts and miscellaneous support materials, clips
as required for supporting aboveground instrument cable, tube etc.
(7)
Installation of suitable cable clamps / tray for multicore cables just before termination
into the junction box or panel such that the weight of cables is not supported by the
cable glands.
(8)
Marker, gland and connect all instrument cables, supply and install markers / ferrules
etc for cable identification in accordance with the specification.
(9)
All instruments including direct mounted instruments like RTDs, thermowells,

temperature gauges, pressure gauges, pressure switches etc. shall be installed in such a
way that they have good readability and accessibility. Platforms and ladders shall be
provided to meet this requirement, if necessary.
(10) The capillary of all capillary type instruments shall be supported properly and shall be
protected against mechanical damage.
(11) All pressure / differential pressure instruments shall be provided with block and bleed /
by-pass, drain / vent valves etc. as per the installation standards, and shall have
accessibility.
(12) All primary piping / tubing (impulse lines) shall have a slope of 1 in 12 on the
horizontal run.
(13) All welding shall be carried out as per the relevant codes with proper electrodes. Any
testing (non-destructive) like D.P. test and radiography on root weld and final weld shall
be carried out as per PMS. All consumables shall be part of Contractor's scope of
supply. Any pre / post weld treatment as required by the relevant codes and piping
material specification shall be carried out. All non-destructive tests shall be carried out
as per piping material specification.
- 154 -

(GTCL)

(14) All threaded joints shall be joined by PTFE tapes only.

(15) All impulse lines shall be supported at regular intervals.
(16) Instrument drain / vent connections shall be piped to safe area like oily water sewer or
above pipe racks to avoid accumulation of hazardous fluid in the plant atmosphere. For
hydrogen and lethal services like CO etc. all vent / drains shall be connected to closed
system even it is not shown in the P&IDs.
(17) Steam tracing wherever required shall be carried out by 10 mm OD x 1 mm thick
copper tubes and condensate traps shall be provided to collect all the condensate and
shall be piped to the nearest pipe drain funnels.
(18) All tubes / cables shall be properly laid on cable trays which shall be supported at
regular intervals.
(19) Separate routing or physical separation shall be maintained between signal cables, shut
down and power cables.
(20) Wherever intrinsically safe system cabling is employed, the minimum separation of 150
mm shall be adhered between IS (intrinsically safe) and non IS signal cables.
(21) The cases of instruments shall be earthed by earthing wire to the nearest earth bus bar
for safety reasons.
(22) Painting of angle trays, instrument supports and all structural supports shall be painted
as under: a) The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush sand paper to
remove all scales. After cleaning, one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer shall
be given and allowed to dry. One coat of final when paint shall be applied. Second
and final coats of paint of final colour shall be given before handing over the plant/
commissioning.
b) Instrument impulse lines shall be painted as per painting requirements of main pipe
and equivalent pipes in case of vessel / equivalent / reactor.
(23) For the purpose of installation planning and scheduling shall be made on daily and
entire installation period with other disciplines co-ordination shall be done with other
Contractors for common area of work.
(24) Mounting of instrument / junction boxes shall be at a height of 1.3 metre from grade
level / finish floor level.
(25) Temperature extension of suitable length shall be provided in the impulse line of the
instrument installation where process fluid temperature is higher than the Maximum
withstanding temperature of the instrument.

- 155 -

(GTCL)

9.
ELECTRICAL WORKS REQUIREMENTS
9.1
The Contractor shall design and provide AC power and backup power supply for the New
SCADA System and New Communication System equipment. The existing rated Power
supply is 230V single phase 2 wire, 50Hz.
Power supply rated for the SCADA equipment viz. HMI, Severs, Networks equipment etc. at
MCC & ACC shall be 230V AC, single phase, 2 wire, 50Hz. Existing UPS systems shall be
replaced and New 230V AC, 50Hz UPS systems shall be provided for this purpose.
Power supply system for RTUs at sites where AC mains power exist shall be 24V DC to be
derived from 230V AC, single phase, 2 wire mains supply and 24V DC backup battery &
battery charger system. Slave telemetry radio equipment and GPRS Modem to be installed
within RTU enclosure will be powered from the 24V DC system of RTU. Power supply
system to the RTU at sites where AC mains power do not exist shall be obtained from solar
panel. Diesel generator sets shall be provided at selected sites for emergency charging of
batteries.
Power supply for Communication system including Telemetering equipment at MCC & ACC
shall be 48V DC to be derived from 230V AC, single phase, 2 wire mains supply and 48V DC
backup battery & battery charger system. Telemetry equipment in Master Telemetry Station
(MTS) will be powered from 48V DC battery charger system. Portable standby Diesel
generator sets shall be provided at selected sites to meet complete power requirement of MTS
in emergency situation.
Power supply systems shall have adequate surge protection device to protect the downstream
equipment from excessive power swing which is normal with the mains power available and
severe climatic condition i.e. thunder storm and lightning in Bangladesh.
9.2
POWER SUPPLY FROM EXISTING / NEW POWER SOURCE
9.2.1
Master Control Centre (MCC) and Auxiliary Control Centre (ACC)

(1)
The Contractor shall install Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems at MCC and at
ACC to provide 8 hours backed-up power supply for the New SCADA and
Communication Systems and 4 hours backed-up power supply for building emergency
lighting in the event of a failure or outage of the incoming main AC power. The
capacity of the respective UPSs shall be 15 kVA (minimum) or more.
(2)
The Contractor shall install Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems at Demra
SCADA Office (old MCC) to provide 4 hours backed-up power supply for the New
SCADA and Communication Systems and 2 hours backed-up power supply for building
emergency lighting in the event of a failure or outage of the incoming main AC power.
The capacity of the respective UPSs shall be 10 kVA (minimum) or more.
(3)
Existing Power Distribution Panels (DP) shall be made available by the Employer, at
MCC, ACC and Demra SCADA Office Buildings, to provide incoming power supplies
to all the SCADA and Communication equipment to be installed at MCC, ACC and
Demra SCADA Office Buildings. All cabling including conduit / raceway / fittings /
glands / all other cables accessories from existing distribution panels to the
Contractors new distribution panels and all cabling from the new distribution panels to

- 156 -

(GTCL)

each piece of SCADA & Communication equipment shall be designed and installed by
the Contractor.
9.2.2
RTUs
All Existing RTUs that are presently installed at Original Sites shall be replaced and New
RTUs shall be installed at that place. New RTUs shall be provided at all additional sites where
at present RTUs & associated Power supply systems are not installed. New power supply
arrangement shall be made for all new RTUs.
Necessary double insulated armored cable with MCB shall be provide to feed power from the
existing power source. MCB units shall be provided within RTU enclosure to provide power
to each piece of 15A power receptacle for maintenance works, Space heater & Thermostat,
Power modules of RTU, Slave radio / Modem of Telemetry system, GPRS Modem etc. Each
RTU including Future RTUs shall be provided with rechargeable battery and battery charger
system. Battery shall have adequate capacity to provide backed-up power at rated voltage and
current for at least 24 hrs. In the event of the battery voltage drops below a certain level, an
alarm signal shall be sent to MCC and ACC to protect batteries against over discharge.
Portable standby diesel generator sets shall be provided at some selected sites to cater
emergency charging of batteries for the sites where AC mains power is not available.
Power supply arrangement for RTUs shall be made as follows:
(1)
Power supply to the New RTUs at original sites where AC power exists:
Existing RTU is connected to AC power feeder (Single Phase, 230 V, 50Hz) of existing
power Distribution Panel (DP) located in a building. New RTU will be connected to
Contractors new power Distribution Panel (DP). Necessary MCBs and cabling from
existing DP to the new DP shall be installed. Existing Power supply cable from existing
DP to existing RTU shall normally be re-used at original site. Presently, these power
cables appear to be good. However, contractor shall verify himself about quality of the
cable by conducting tests such as Insulation, Continuity check etc. prior to its reuse. In
case of any defect found, the same cable shall be replaced by a new cable to be provided
by the Contractor.
(2)
Power supply to the New RTUs at the original site where AC power does not exist:
At present there is no AC mains power available at smaller site. Existing RTUs in the
sites are powered from the Solar Panels installed on the roof of RTUs sunshade.
Existing solar panels and solar controller along with associated cabling shall be replaced
with a new solar panels and solar charge/discharge controller & associated cabling. The
solar controller shall be equipped with necessary charging/discharging equipment for
24V DC backup battery system.
(3)
Power supply to the New RTUs at the Additional Site where AC power exists:
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCB) Box shall be installed adjacent to the
existing DP installed in building at the Additional Site. Cabling from the existing
DP to the MCB Box and from the MCB Box to the New RTU shall be installed.
(4)
Power supply to the New RTUs at the Additional Site where AC power does not
exist:

- 157 -

(GTCL)

Solar panels shall be installed on the roof of the new RTU shed. Solar controller
and cabling from the solar panel to the New RTU shall be installed. The solar
controller shall be equipped with necessary charging equipment for 24V DC
backup battery system.
9.2.3
UPS for the Operating Company Terminal

At present there are Computer Terminals (OCT) located in the premises of Operating
Company. These OCTs will be replaced by Contractors supplied new OCT. The Contractor
shall install UPS system at each Operating Company with 30 minutes of backup power for the
new Operating Company Terminal. Input power of 230V AC, Single phase, 50Hz will be
provided by the Employer. UPS shall be sized according to the new supplied Operating
Company Terminal.
9.2.4
Communications Equipment
(1)
Slave Telemetry Radio Equipment

The slave telemetry radio equipment installed in the RTU shall be powered from the
24V DC system with backup battery installed in the RTU.
(2)
Master Telemetry Stations (MTS) and Service Providers Access Point/Base

Station
Contractor shall provide 48 volt DC power supply with backup battery system for the
new communication equipment to be installed in the Master Telemetry Stations and
service providers base stations. Power supply systems and Batteries will be sized
according to the new supplied communication equipment and will have the capacity to
cater emergency power for a period of 48 hours in case of mains AC power fails. AC
Power supply will be derived from Employers existing DB. Necessary double insulated
armoured cable (3 Phase, 4 wire) with MCB shall be provide to feed power from the
existing power source. Required MCBs and cabling in between Employers DB to
Contractors DB and to Telecommunication panels will be supplied and installed by the
Contractor.
In addition to the battery backup of 48 hrs, for communication equipment at Master
Telemetering Stations, standby diesel generator sets will be provided to augment
duration of emergency power back up. These sets are proposed to be installed at the
following Master Telemetering Stations:
Fenchugonj
Monohordi
Mirasarai
Emergency Generator will have capacity of minimum 15 KVA, 400V & 3 phase 4 wire
and 1500 rpm. It shall have automatic voltage regulator, push buttons, indicating lamps
and meters. All required protection shall be in built.
(3)
Service Providers Access Point/Base Station

Contractor shall provide 48 volt DC power supply with backup battery system for the
new communication equipment to be installed in the Service Providers Access Point
and service providers base stations. Power supply systems and Batteries will be sized
- 158 -

(GTCL)

according to the new supplied communication equipment and will have the capacity to
cater emergency power for a period of 24 hours in case of mains AC power fails. AC
Power supply will be derived from existing DB. Necessary double insulated armoured
cable (3 Phase,4 wire) with MCB shall be provide to feed power from the existing
power source. Required MCBs and cabling in between existing DB to Contractors DB
and to Telecommunication panels will be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
9.3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.3.1
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for MCC & ACC and Demra SCADA Office
(1)
General
The capacity of each UPS shall be designed by the Contractor based on the proposed
equipment's power consumption. The UPS shall be manufactured in accordance with
IEC or equivalent standards as below.
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 1: General and safety requirements for UPS.
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
requirements.
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 3: Method of specifying the performance
and test requirements
UPS shall be configured in parallel redundant configuration.
(2)
Components of UPS
The UPS system shall comprise the following major components:
(3)
a)
Battery charger
b)
Static inverter
c)
Bypass switch
d)
Battery
e)
Operating and Status monitoring panel
Rating
Output
Nominal Output Voltage
AC 230V full sine wave
Capacity
min.15kVA /12KW for MCC & ACC and min. 10KVA

for Demra SCADA Office.
Efficiency
87.4% or better at 100% load and nominal voltage
Recovery time
98% in less than 20 msec (after full load change 100-0100%)
Audible noise
< 65dBA

- 159 -

(GTCL)

Enclosure
CRCA steel sheet
Cooling
Forced air fan cooling
Input Voltage
Single Phase AC 230V or 3 Phase 4 wire 400/230 V
Frequency
:
:
50 0.001 Hz (when in internal oscillator)

47 Hz ~ 53 Hz (synchronizing range)
Power factor
0.8 at rated load
Input
(4)
Battery Charger
a)
The battery charger shall be automatic solid state type, capable of rated output
with an input voltage tolerance of+10% to -15% and input frequency 10%.
b)
The battery charger shall be capable of automatic recharge, equalizing and

floating and boost operations to suit the battery type.
c)
Voltage regulation :
1%
d)
Ripple
1% (without batteries)
2% (with batteries)
(5)
Static Inverter
The inverter shall be solid state static type, capable of supplying full load, continuously
with overload capability, performance characteristics shown below are for 0 to 100%
load at 80% power factor, and for input variations from battery discharged value to
charger maximum output value:
(6)
a)
Voltage regulation
1% voltage steady rated
b)
Frequency regulation
0.001Hz when operating on internal

frequency : 47Hz~53Hz Synchronizing range
c)
Wave shape
:
possible operating conditions.
Less than 5% harmonic distortion for all
d)
Efficiency
92% at 100% load.
e)
Power factor
0.6~1.0 within KVA & KW rating
Bypass Switch
a)
Static bypass switch shall be solid state type and provide no-break transfer of AC
loads from the inverter to the alternative supply (in <4 msec in synch. mode) and
back to the inverter, and have performance characteristics equal to those of the
inverter.

- 160 -

(GTCL)
b)
(7)

A manual bypass switch (make before break) shall be provided and be mounted in
the same cubicle/section as the static switch to allow manual transfer in the event
of maintenance or failure of equipment.
Batteries
a)
Maintenance free Nickel cadmium high performance stationary type batteries

shall be employed and the guaranteed life of battery shall be a minimum of 15
years.
b)
The battery capacity shall be 20% in excess of what is required to achieve the
specified emergency discharge duty.
c)
The battery back-up power supply duration is 8 hours for SCADA and
Communication Systems and 4 hours for building emergency lighting.
(8)
Silicon Controlled voltage Stabilizer
(9)
LCD display shall be provided on the panel for the followings metering and alarm
annunciation:
Electrical Parameters as follows:
Voltage
Input
Alternate
Battery
Inverter
Load
Current
Frequency
Input
Alternate
Battery Charging /
Discharging
Inverter
Load
Input
Alternate
X
Inverter
Load
Alarm annunciation shall be provided:

Input
Battery
Inverter
Overvoltage
Discharging
Overload
Under
voltage
End of
Discharge
Low battery
Under
Voltage
Alternate
Static
Switch
Over voltage Transfer to
Alternate
Under
Voltage
Frequency
out of Limit
System
Service mode
Access
DC Ground
In addition to above at least following alarm shall be generated during UPS fault:
DC Overvoltage, Inverter Over-voltage, Inverter Overload Trip, CPU fault, OverTemperature etc.
All alarms shall be with audible and flashing display. A common alarm contact O/P
shall be provided for remote alarm in SCADA.
9.3.2
Backup Battery

- 161 -

(GTCL)
(1)
(2)
General
a)
The Contractor shall provide battery backup for all RTUs and Master Telemetry
Stations (MTS) and Service Providers Access Point. Nominal battery voltage will
be DC 24V for RTUs and DC 48V for MTS and Service Providers Access Point
respectively.
b)
The backup duration of the batteries for the RTU and Providers Base station is 24
hours. The backup duration of the batteries for the Master Telemetry Station 48
hours. The Contractor shall design the capacity (kVA) of the batteries based on
the power consumption of the relevant equipment.
c)
The batteries for the RTUs shall be housed within RTUs Enclosures and the
batteries for the Master Telemetry Stations shall be mounted on a steel rack. The
steel rack shall be epoxy painted to resist the corrosive properties of the
electrolyte.
d)
Batteries and chargers shall be complete with control panels. The battery charger
panel shall incorporate an input switch and an output switch to allow the charger
to be readily isolated for maintenance.
Batteries
b.
c.
d.
(3)

For MTS: Maintenance free Nickel cadmium high performance stationary type
batteries shall be employed and the guaranteed life of battery shall be a minimum
of 15 years.
For RTU:and Service Providers Access Point ,Maintenance free sealed lead acid
high performance stationary type shall be used and the guaranteed life of each
batteries 10 years.
The battery capacity shall be 20% in excess of what is required to achieve the
specified emergency discharge duty.
Battery Charger
a)
The charger shall be suitable for supplying the initial charging requirements, boost
charging a battery subsequent to an emergency discharge, supplying the
maximum DC load during float charging of both batteries and providing 20%
spare capacity.
b)
DC output shall be suitable for DC24 / 48V nominal load voltage with float and
boost charging.
c)
A change over switch for float / boost charging shall be provided.
d)
The charger shall be provided with protection devices such as over-voltage and
under-voltage cut relays to protect the equipment against fluctuation in voltage.
e)
Charger shall be full wave solid state thyristor bridge or better.
f)
Charger shall have voltage regulation (Float mode) of 1% with supply voltage
variation of 10%.
g)
Output shall have ripple contain 1%

- 162 -

(GTCL)
h)

Charger shall have alarm annunciation not limited to following:

Overcurrent, Charger failure, Current limit, Input fuse failure, Rectifier fuse fail,
Filter capacitor fuse fail, Output fuse failure, AC input supply trouble, DC Under
voltage & DC overvoltage, Common contact O/P for remote alarm in SCADA.
9.3.3
Solar Panel with Battery

At sites where no AC 230V power is available, the Contractor shall provide solar power
supplies consisting of solar panels, a charging and discharging controller and batteries. The
specifications for the batteries are referred to in Section 9.3.2.
(1)
Solar Panels
(2)
General
Solar panels are to be installed in a very limited space (on the roof of the RTU
shed). The Contractor shall design a solar panel that has the smallest solar panel
footprint.
(3)
a)
The solar panel shall be of a durable construction and designed for use in a
tropical environment.
b)
The Contractor shall design the exact number of solar panels required based on
the solar radiation of Bangladesh and required power consumption of the
equipment in the RTU to keep continuous operation of the RTU. Regarding
tentative battery capacity, 24 hours as specified, the Contractor shall design the
specified capacity based on the solar panel output and power consumption. All
calculation data shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to install the equipment.
Charge and Discharge Controller

a)
A charging and discharging controller together with overcharging protection and a

low voltage disconnector to protect the battery from over discharge shall be
provided. This controller shall be equipped with back-flow (battery to solar panel)
prevention device.
b)
The charging and discharging controller shall be provided with an AC 230V input
terminal for boost charge of the battery. The boost charge will be carried out by
using a portable type AC 230 V generator.
Common remote alarm shall be provided.
9.3.4
UPS for Computers installed at the Operating Company

The Contractor shall provide the smart UPS for the HMI installed in the Operating Company.
The capacity of the battery shall be calculated by the Contractor based on the electrical
demand of the HMI.
(1)
Output
Nominal Output Voltage
AC 230V full sine wave
Output Voltage Distortion
Less than 1% at full load

- 163 -


(GTCL)
Output Frequency
47Hz - 53 Hz (adjusted 50 Hz)
Input Voltage
Single Phase AC 230V + 10%/-15%
Input Frequency
50 Hz 10%
Surge Protection
to be provided
(3)
Capacity
min. 30 minutes operation of HMI in the event

failure/outage of the incoming mains supply
(4)
Battery
Maintenance free Lead Acid Battery.
(5)
Unattended shutdown
(2)
Input
Provision of an unattended shutdown device for HMI.

A software interface shall provide automatic, unattended shutdown when the battery
voltage drops below a certain level.
9.3.5
Generator at Demra and Ashuganj

There are two 243 KVA gas generators at each location in Demra SCADA ofiice (Old MCC)
and Ashuganj ACC. Generally one generator runs as the main unit and the other set remains
in stand by in each location.
The overhauling and maintenance of these existing Generators at Demra SCADA ofiice (Old
MCC) and Ashuganj ACC shall be carried out by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall replace the existing Control panels to make two generators functional for
each location. The Contractor shall supply and install circuit breakers, magnetic contactors,
change over units, gas regulator, necessary power cables and related components for
maintenance works.
9.3.6
Emergency Generator
a)
Frequency
50 Hz
b)
Output
15 kVA
c)
Rated Voltage
400V, 3 phase 4 wire
d)
Power Factor
0.8 (lagging)
e)
Voltage Regulation
2% of nominal from no-load to full load
f)
Excitation
Brushless, Rotating Exciter (with AVR)
g)
Engine
Diesel engine including all required accessories.
h)
Panel
For engine and generator
4 sets of emergency generators shall be provided and will be kept at the selected Master
Telemetry Stations.

- 164 -


(GTCL)
9.3.7
Portable Generator for Maintenance

Portable generator sets shall be provided for emergency maintenance of the battery in case of
complete discharge for the RTUs located where AC power is not available.
a)
Frequency
50Hz
b)
Output
l kVA
c)
Rated Voltage
230V single phase
7 sets of generators shall be provided and will be kept at the Master Telemetry Stations
monitoring RTUs without AC power supply.
9.3.8
MCB Box
The Contractor shall provide a MCB Box for feeding AC 230V to the New RTU.
9.3.9
a)
Rated MCB
required
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
2 pole 50 A / 20 A as
b)
Box
The MCB shall be installed in an IP55 enclosure
Cables
(1)
General
The cables shall be flame retardant low smoke cable and shall have copper conductors
with minimum cross section area shall be as follows:
(2)
a)
Power Cable
: 2.5 mm
b)
Control Cable
: 1.5 mm
c)
Instrumentation cable
: 1.0 mm
Power Cable / Control Cable

a)
0.6/1.1KV grade 90 C continuous rating under normal condition and 250C

under short circuit condition rating, Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) heavy
duty cable conforming to IEC 60502 (Part-I).
b)
Conductor
Stranded and compacted plain aluminum of grade H2

for cable sizes above 2.5 mm2 and class 2 stranded
high conductivity annealed plain copper for cable sizes
up to 2.5 mm2 conforming to IEC 60228.
c)
Insulation
XLPE conforming to IEC 60502
d)
Core Identification
By color coding conforming to IEC 60502
e)
Inner Sheath
Extruded PVC, Type-ST-2 conforming to IEC 60502-1
f)
Armour
Helical stranded galvanised single round steel wire

armour for twin and multicore cables. Non-magnetic
hard drawn aluminum single round wire conforming to
H4 grade for single core cables

- 165 -

(GTCL)
g)
Overall Sheath

Extruded PVC Type ST-2 compound conforming to

IEC 60502-1 with flame retardant low smoke properties
conforming to IEC 60332-3 Category A
9.3.10 Cable Laying and Cable support

(1)
Cables laid directly in the ground shall have the following depth of cover:
a)
Power cable
500 mm
b)
Control cable
500 mm
Cables shall be installed correctly spaced in the trench. Pipe sleeves shall be provided at
cross-overs like roads, drains etc. and relevant drawings shall be approved by Engineerin-charge. Before laying of cable, the trench bottom shall be filled with 100 mm layer of
sand and leveled. Each layer of cables shall be covered with 150 mm of sand on top and
sand shall be lightly pressed. A protective covering of 75 mm thick second class red
bricks shall be placed flat on the final layer of sand. The remaining portion of the trench
shall be then back filled with soil compacted and leveled. On completion of every group
/ layer of cable laying and before sand filling, every cable shall be given insulation test
and test result shall be certified by Engineer-in-charge. Any cable proved to be defective
shall be replaced before the next group of cables is laid. Pipe sleeves shall be made of
Galvanized Iron. Free space of 40% shall be provided in pipe sleeves.
Cable route markers at every 20 meter interval, indicating number of cables, depth and
direction, shall be provided to identify the buried route including crossovers / turnings
etc.
Cable tags shall be provided on each cable at every 5 meter interval. Tags shall also be
provided at each end of road crossing, turning, bridge etc.
(2)
Cable Tray
a)
All tray work and accessories shall be heavy duty and sized to provide 25%
additional free space.
b)
The minimum clearance behind the tray shall be sufficient to allow for fixing of
cables, which shall relate to tray width, but shall not be less than 25 mm.
c)
The galvanized cable tray shall be perforated, heavy-duty return flange type, hot
dipped galvanized after manufacturing. All cut ends shall be made good to equal
protection as uncut lengths, using "galvanized" paints. It shall be used at all sites
except for gas field sites.
d)
The plastic coated cable tray shall be diamond pattern, and covered with heavy
duty, black PVC. It shall only be used where, for reasons of corrosion, galvanized
tray work is impracticable. It shall generally be used at gas field sites which are
generally corrosive areas.
e)
Stainless steel tray shall generally be used inside the buildings such as in Master
Control Centre, Auxiliary Control Centre, Operating Company Terminals and
Control Centre at Dhaka etc. for durable, corrosion free, aesthetic view.

- 166 -

(GTCL)
f)
(3)

The rigid PVC cable tray shall be manufactured from rigid un-plasticized PVC
having a thickness of not less than 3 mm. It shall be perforated and have provision
for a cover. The manufacturing material shall be self-extinguishing and nonflammable and suitable for use in ambient temperatures of 00C to 800C.
Conduit
a)
The steel conduit shall be heavy duty, welded, screwed and galvanized to Class 4
of the relevant British Standard.
b)
They shall be sized to enable satisfactory accommodation of the cables required

for the contract with a further 40% free space for future installations.
c)
Conduit systems shall be completely installed before commencing cable

installations.
d)
They shall be securely fixed by means of distance saddles not more than 400 mm
apart. 6 mm clearance between the conduit and the building wall shall be
maintained to avoid accumulation of dust.
9.3.11 Lightning Protection and Tower Earthing

A one-meter long lightning rod (Air terminal) complete with a two down conductor (50 RM
insulated cable) and earthing system shall be provided. There shall be minimum two boring
with a minimum depth of 30 meters. The earthing cable from the lightening rod shall be
connected to the earthing chamber and from the earthing chamber, the earthing cable shall be
laid to the bottom of the boring with earth electrode. The earthing resistance for the lightning
protection shall be less than 1 ohm. Earth electrode shall be provided near to the mast. This
earth electrode shall be connected to the main earth at pit level. Contractor shall furnish
lightning protection scheme for Engineers approval.
9.3.12 Aircraft Warning Light
Aircraft warning light with proven digital LED technology shall be provided at all twenty (20)
MTS locations. The aircraft warning light with adequate illumination level as permissible
under Civil Aviation Authority shall have sensor,controller,flashing unit etc. The no. of
lighting units shall be five (5) for towers with height of 50 meters and three (3) for towers
with height of 30 meters. All necessary electrical cables with switch board,protection device
shall be provided.
9.3.13 Earthing
(1)
All new power cables from the existing distribution board to the MCB Box and the
MCB Box to the New RTU shall be of 3 cores (Live, Neutral and Earth). The earth core
shall be terminated at the SCADA earth star point.
(2)
All equipment enclosures to which an electrical power supply is connected shall have a
main earth connection point suitable for a 10 mm2 wire. The exposed metal cases of all
electrical apparatus shall be connected to the SCADA earth star point unless the
apparatus is nearer to the system earth point, in which case the connection shall be
- 167 -

(GTCL)

directly to the system earth point. The protective and non-live metal work of the panel
shall have a maximum resistance not exceeding 10 milliohms to the SCADA earth star
point. An earth cable shall then be taken from the SCADA star point earth to the system
earth point within the building containing the SCADA equipment. The maximum
resistance between the SCADA star point earth and the system earth shall not exceed 10
milliohms.
(3)
All equipment to be earthed shall be connected to the SCADA earth star point using
green/yellow PVC insulated cable of the appropriate size.
(4)
The steel wire armored power cable shall not be used as the earthing conductor.
(5)
Equipment shall not be earthed to its chassis but shall have the earth points brought to
an insulated point from which the connection to a special logic earth can be made.
(6)
Provision shall be made for the termination of signal screens, or to maintain the
continuity of isolated screens as required.
(7)
The minimum earthing conductor shall be 2.5 mm.
(8)
Contractor shall furnish Grounding scheme for Engineers approval.
(9)
All towers shall be earthed in accordance with international standard and earthing
resistance measured less than 01 ohm.
(10) Earthing specification shall be confirmed to ANSI/TIA/EIA-J-STD607A and607B.

(11) Tower & Telecommunication earthing shall be made separately.
9.3.14 Cable Terminals
9.4
(1)
A steel wire armored (SWA) cable shall be terminated by using a cable gland. The cable
gland shall be suitable for the environment in which they are to be used, and shall be
complete with PVC shrouds, back nuts and bonded earth tags. Generally cable gland
shall have protection of IP-65.
(2)
AC / DC power cables shall be terminated in a screw clamp terminal.
(3)
Instrument cable cores and internal connection cores shall be terminated with polyamide
type terminals, having socket screw clamp connections with a knife-edge switch
disconnection.
ELECTRIC WORKS AT MCC, AGARGAON, DHAKA, ACC, ASHUGANJ, DEMRA SCADA

OFFICE (OLD MCC) AND OTHER MTS AND RTU SITES
The Contractor shall supply and install all electrical wires, fittings for the electrification of the
newly constructed MCC at Agargaon, Dhaka. The Contractor shall replace the existing
electrification system at Ashuganj ACC and Demra SCADA Office (Old MCC). The
Contractor shall also replace the existing electrification system of all MTS

- 168 -

(GTCL)

The Contractor shall supply and install the power cables, circuit breakers etc. from the
existing substation to Battery Room at MCC, ACC and Demra SCADA Office.
The Contractor shall supply and install the power cables, circuit breakers etc. from the
existing DB to MTS.
Power cables sizing shall be as under .
a. MCC at Agargaon, Dhaka: 4x150 sq. mm approximately 300 ft.
b. ACC at Ashuganj:
4x150 sq.mm approximately 300 ft.
c. Demra SCADA Office:
4x150 sq.mm approximately 300 ft
d. MTS locations:
4x50 sq. mm approximately 300 ft at each location
Dismantling of existing electrical wiring and electrification system shall be under the scope of
the Contractor.
9.4.1
Standard Codes and Regulations

a) The installations in general shall be carried out in conformity with the Electricity
Rules of the Government of Bangladesh (Indian Electricity Act and Rules as adopted
and amended in Bangladesh), and British Standard Code of Practice, American
National Electric Code and VDE Regulations for the relevant works.
b) Where the specific specifications called for below differ from these Rules and
Standards, The specifications described below shall be followed.
c) Any special requirement of the Electrical Inspector, Government of Bangladesh or the
Power Development Board, or the Bangladesh Telecommunication Company Ltd., or
the Electrical Licensing Board, or any legal authority shall also be complied with.
d) The electrical design requirements specified in Part-II,Section-6 shall apply to the
supply of control panels for building services.
9.4.2
Workmanship and Materials

a) The material used or supplied by the Contractor and workmanship shall be of
approved quality. The Contractor shall supply and fix all cables, wires, conduits,
switches, ceiling roses, board, consumables and materials complete in every respect.
9.4.3
Samples
a) Samples of conduit, cables, bends, socket outlets, fans, luminaries, switched sockets,
steel installation boxes, various fittings, etc, shall be submitted to the Employer for
his approval prior to use. Materials actually used in the work shall conform to such
- 169 -

(GTCL)

approved sample.
9.4.4
Progress of Work
a) The Contractor shall be responsible for completion of all electrical works before the
building finishing work. Fitting of conduit pipe and recessed boards shall be done
before plastering.
9.5
Material Specification
9.5.1
PVC Conduit
a) PVC conduit shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and WL 651 designed for installation
underground in slabs, encases or exposed. PVC Conduit shall not be threaded. There
shall be no taper to the conduit unless one end is formed as a fitting and is especially
suitable for the purpose. The material shall be such that when bends are formed, the
conduit shall not break, crack or be deformed. Limits on the wall thickness and
diameter of PVC conduits shall be as below:
9.5.2
Nominal
Size (mm)
Outside
Diameter (mm)
Inside
Diameter (mm)
Wall
Thickness
(mm)
Pipe Weight
(kg)
12.7
21.54
16.00
2.77
0.238
19.1
26.92
21.18
2.87
0.327
25.4
33.66
26.90
3.38
0.476
38.1
48.56
41.20
3.68
0.774
50.8
60.63
52.81
3.91
1.027
Galvanized Iron (GI) Pipe

a) GI pipes shall be free from any burrs. All GI bends shall be pre-formed and shall be
of same material as of the pipe. Recommended Specifications of GI pipe are as
follows:
Nominal Size
(mm)
Outside
Diameter
(mm)
Inside
Diameter
(mm)
Wall
Thickness
(mm)
Pipe
Weight
(kg)
25.4
33.66
26.90
3.38
2.50

- 170 -

(GTCL)
9.5.3

38.1
48.56
41.20
3.68
4.05
50.8
60.63
52.81
3.91
5.44
63.5
73.03
65.25
5.16
8.63
76.2
88.90
77.93
5.49
11.29
Junction, Pull and Circular Boxes

a) Junction boxes and pull boxes shall conform to BS 4662 and shall be made of 16
SWG (minimum) sheet steel galvanised, or any other materials as approved by the
Employers Representative, depending on where it is installed, to match with the
existing construction if any, in which these are installed. The circular boxes shall be
of PVC. Circular boxes made of aluminium shall not be acceptable. The covers of
metallic boxes are to be fixed by using countersunk brass screws or galvanised
machine screws. Box ears shall be at least 2 mm thick. Each box except circular
boxes shall have an earth block of copper or brass of appropriate size. Circular boxes
shall have at least 13 mm long hub.
9.5.4
Conduit/GI Pipe Bends

b) No bends other than at the end curve of a gooseneck shall be sharper than 90 degrees.
The sharpest acceptable end curve is 135 degrees. The length of straight portions at
end of bend and bending radius of a bend shall not be smaller than indicated in the
following table for each acceptable size of conduit/pipe.
c) Use of bends shall normally be avoided and the pipe should be bent to the required
angle by moderately shaping and fixing for PVC conduits and by using pipe bender
for GI pipes. The minimum bending radius for conduit run shall comply with the
specification for bends in cables, and in addition the internal radius of bends shall not
be less than 25 times the outside diameter of the cable.
d) No inspection bends shall be used and at places inspection is required, steel boxes
shall be used.
e) Separate bends shall be used only after obtaining approval of the Employer.
f) In case of GI pipe, long radius pre-formed bend of same material and of required
angle (22.5, 45, 60 and 90 degrees) shall be used.

- 171 -

(GTCL)

g) GI pipe may be bent to required angle only on approval of the Employer.

h) Minimum acceptable dimensions of PVC bends are as follows:
Diameter of Conduit
(mm)
9.5.5
Radius of Bends (R) (mm)
Length (L) of Straight End

Portion (mm)
19.05
114.30
38.10
25.40
146.05
47.62
31.75
184.15
50.80
38.10
209.55
50.80
50.80
241.30
50.80
63.50
266.70
76.20
76.20
330.20
79.38
Conduit/GI Pipe Termination and Fittings

a) At the end of a run, GI pipe shall terminate in metal box, galvanised or black
enamelled.
b) When a conduit is terminated in a metal box excepting circular box, a smooth bore
brass/PVC bush or ring bush shall be used along with 2 brass locknuts of the
following specification:
Locknuts
Conduit Size
(mm)
Thickness
(mm)
Outside Diameter
(mm)
No. of Threads
19.05
26.99
25.58
25.40
30.16
31.75
Conduit Size
(mm)
Thickness
(mm)
Outside Diameter
(mm)
No. of Threads
19.05
22.23
8.73
25.40
28.58
10.72
Bushes

- 172 -

(GTCL)
9.5.6

Conduit/GI Pipe in Floor

a) All conduits and GI pipes shall be installed having a slope of 1:1000 towards the floor
mounted pull box or cable duct so that condensate or leakage water drains out easily
to the pull box or cable duct. For run of more than one conduit in the same floor the
direction of slope of different conduits should be decided in such systematic manner
as to ensure a uniform drain out of the leakage. All socket joints shall be made water
tight. No U-bends shall be installed in floors.
9.5.7
Cable work
a) The cable distribution from bus bar to switch boards through different stages are
furnished as under:
9.5.8
i)
Cable size from bus bar of the building to DB:
ii)
Cable size from DB to SDB:
4X25 sq.mm
iii)
Cable size from DB to SDB:
4X16 sq.mm
iv)
Cable size for internal wiring:
10 sq.mm
4X35 sq.mm
Material specification
a) Single Core Electrical Cable and Conductor
i)
Single-core low voltage cables and conductors shall be as per BS 600, or BS 6346
(1977), or equivalent VDE specifications, of copper conductor, and PVC
insulated. Conductors shall have 600/1000 volt grade of PVC insulation. All sizes
over 2.5 sq. mm shall be stranded.
ii)
All flexible cables shall be as per BS 6004 (1975) unless otherwise specified.
b) Multi-Core Electrical Cable

i)
Multi-core low voltage cables shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed nonarmoured direct burial type, termite proof, made and tested according to VDE
0472/6.65 and VDE 0472/3.69 for this type of installation, rated voltage being
600/1000 volts.
c) Telephone Subscriber Cables

- 173 -

(GTCL)

i)
The subscriber cables shall be suitable for earth laying and shall be made
according to VDE 0816, of 0.6 sq. mm/0.8 sq. mm (as applicable) copper
conductors, with PE (Polyethylene) insulated and laminated PE sheathed, starquad formation, basic unit stranding and core wrapping.
ii)
The cables shall be tested (at 20C) for voltage not less than 500 volts (RMS)
wire to wire and 2000 volts (RMS) wire to shield with operating voltage of 150
volts (RMS), shall have minimum insulation resistance (tested with min. 100 volt
DC) of 500 mega ohm/km, and mutual capacitance of not more than 50 Farad/km
for both 0.6 sq. mm and 0.8 sq. mm.
d) Cable Colour
i)
For two wire final sub-circuits whether AC or DC supplying lighting fan or

power circuits, the neutral or middle wire shall always be black, and the phase or
outer wire (no matter which phase it is connected to) shall always be red. The red
wire shall always feed the switch, and the same wire shall always be used from
the switch to the light, fan and power outlet.
ii) All cables used shall be coloured as per the following table:
CONDUCTOR
Phase/Switch
Neutral
Two Wire Single

Phase AC System
Red / White / Blue
Three Wire
Two Phase AC
System
3 or 4 Wire Three
Phase AC System
Two Wire DC
System
Red & White
Red, White & Blue
Red
Black
Common Return
Black
Black
Negative
Earth
Black
Green / Yellow Striped
e) Earth Trench
i) The size of the trench shall be of minimum 650 mm depth and 450 mm width for
HV incoming cable and of 400 mm depth and 200 mm width for telephone
incoming cable.
ii) A 150 mm thick cushion of sand of FM 1.6 is to be placed over bed of the trench
over which cables are to be laid. After laying of cable first class brick on edge of
flat are to be placed as separators in between the cables. After placement of brick
separators, sand filling is to be done up to 150 mm from the top of the bigger cable.
Then two layers of first class brick flats are to be placed along the length and
breadth of the trench as a protection against injury and indications that a power
- 174 -

(GTCL)

cable is laid. The rest of the trench shall be filled with earth, watered and rammed
at 150 mm layers. After cables are laid the original ground conditions shall be
restored. But if brick pavement drain, concrete road or bituminous carpeted road
are cut across or damaged, they shall be remedied and restored to the original
specification.
f) Concrete Trench
i) Trench for running cables shall be made of concrete (1:2:4) base and first class
brick walls (1:4) with inside plastering (1:4) including neat cement finishing and as
per dimension shown in the drawings. Trench shall be constructed with a slope of
about 1:600 starting from some midpoint of the trench for disposal of sewage, if
any, at out side the building including taking proper care for final disposal of
sewage. Specification for materials and construction for trench shall be the same as
provided for similar works in the specification of civil works.
ii) Trench shall have cover with slip resisting checked steel plates of minimum 13 mm
inch thickness and non-corrosive surface. Cover plates shall be of stiffened type to
have sufficient strength to take care of vehicle load. Cover plates shall be placed in
such a way that those can easily be opened and surface level remains in the same
plane of the floor having smooth finishing.
9.5.9
Cable Laying
a) The cable route shall be as direct as possible and shall receive the Employers
Representative's approval before excavation.
b) All cables bends shall have a radius of not less than 2 times diameter of the cable
drum, or 25 times the diameter of the cable, whichever is greater.
c) GI pipes shall be provided for all road and drain crossing. These pipes shall be laid
direct in the ground without any sand bed, sand layer, brick or cable covers.
d) Cables shall always be laid out or laid into the ground through GI pipe of size as
indicated in the drawing or as decided by the Employer. The length of the pipes over
the ground shall not be less than 1200 mm. The exposed end of the pipes shall be
sealed using PVC or wooden plugs.
e) Great care is to be exercised in handling the cable and avoid forming kinks. The cable
drum shall preferably be conveyed on wheeled cable drum carried and unrolled and
laid directly from the drum carrier. Carriage by trailer or trucks can be allowed only if
proper care is taken during unloading the drums, and unrolling is done after placing
- 175 -

(GTCL)

the drum on drum-jacks and spindle. The cables shall be unrolled in the direction
indicated on the drum by the manufacturer.
f) A cable marker on GI plate shall be installed at every control point of the trench.
g) After the cable is laid, it shall be tested in presence of the Employer. If the test is
unsatisfactory, the cable shall be repaired/replaced as decided by the Employer.
h) All the surplus earth shall be removed to the indicated place. Any damage done to any
other services for the cable laying operation shall be made good.
i)
Insulation Test
j)
Insulation test of the whole installation shall be carried out using 1000 volt megger, in
presence of and to the approval of the Employer.
k) Traywork
l)
All traywork and accessories shall be heavy duty and sized to provide 25% additional
free space above that required for the Contract.
m) The minimum clearance behind the tray shall be sufficient to allow for fixing of
cables, which will relate to tray width, but shall not be less than 25 mm.
n) At structural expansion joints, tray runs shall be broken with joints bridged and
bonded with a flexible earth continuity conductor capable of absorbing all movement
without strain.
o) Galvanised cable tray shall be perforated, heavy duty return flange type, hot dipped
galvanised after manufacture.
Fixing shall be carried out using manufacturer's
brackets, purpose made spacing brackets galvanised after fabrication, or galvanised

"Unistrut" support channels. All cut ends shall be made good to equal protection as
uncut lengths, using galvanised paints.
p) Plastic coated cable tray shall be diamond pattern, heavy duty, black PVC covered. It
shall only be used where, for reasons of corrosion, galvanised is impracticable.
q) Rigid PVC cable tray shall be manufactured from rigid unplasticized PVC having a
thickness of not less than 3 mm. It shall be perforated and have provision for a cover.
The material of manufacture shall be self extinguishing or non flammable and
suitable for use in ambient temperatures of 0C to +80C.
- 176 -

(GTCL)

r) Cable tray support shall be afforded by proprietary galvanised channel,

manufacturer's or purpose made brackets, treated in similar manner to the traywork
following fabrication.
s) All traywork shall be suitably earthed.
9.5.10 Cable Trunking
a) Where trunking is specified it shall be constructed from zinc coated mild steel with a
minimum thickness for the steel of 1.65 mm. It shall have a removable cover
throughout its length with centre screw latch fixings. Trunking shall be rigidly fixed
and supplied complete with purpose manufactured fittings, connectors, dividers,
flanges, cable retaining clips, racks and copper earth continuity links.
b) As an alternative, if approved, a proprietary brand of heavy duty plastic trunking may
be acceptable. When submitting details for approval, full installation instructions as
recommended by the manufacture shall be included in the details.
c) All cables installed in trunking shall be labelled and identified in an approved
manner. Clips shall be at 600 mm centres. Vertical cable trunking shall be fitted with
cable pin racks arranged to avoid any strain on the cables.
d) All metal trunking shall be rust proofed, primed and painted and fixed at intervals not
greater than 1.0 metre.
e) All trunking shall be suitably earthed.
9.5.11 EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR
1)
Earth continuity conductors shall be electrolytic annealed copper of 100 percent
conductivity at 20C, International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS), with weight
resistivity of 0.15328 ohm-gram/m2 at 20C and density of 5.746 gram/m3, for meeting
requirements of BS 6360:1969 or its metric adoption.
2)
Installation
The earth continuity conductor and earthing lead shall be run in accordance with the
drawings and direction, and all metal fittings shall be earthed with continuity conductors.
All the earth continuity conductors from the various circuit, sockets, etc. shall be
- 177 -

(GTCL)

connected to the earthing block located near the CDB/MDB/DB/SDB. Sizes of the earth
continuity conductors shall be as stated in drawings. All CDB/MDB/DB/SDB/ESDB
shall be inter-connected with earth continuity conductor. The earth continuity conductor
shall be drawn along with the cables and no joints shall be allowed from earthing block to
the respective earth point. Light and fan points, except where indicated, shall not be
earthed.
9.5.12 LIGHT FITTINGS
1)
a) The light fitting shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with the
relevant requirements of applicable BS including BS 4533 or VDE 0710.
b) The chokes, if applicable, shall comply with the requirement of BS 2818 or VDE
0712, and shall have appropriate power factor correction capacitor 220 volts, 3.0
micro Farad for 20 watt and 40 watt tubes, 7 micro Farad for 65 watt tubes, and 8
micro Farad for 80 watt tubes.
c) The starter shall be 91 watt lamp type and shall have built-in radio interference
suppresser capacitor.
d) All incandescent light fittings, except where specifically stated otherwise, shall have
un-switched brass holder for BS 22/25 x 26 lamp caps complying with BS 52:1963
(1978).
e) Appropriate sample of light fittings with chokes and starter (if any) shall be submitted
prior to installation.
9.5.13 EXHAUST FAN

a) The work under this item shall consist of supply and installation of exhaust fan along
with 2 x 1.5 mm2 (round) connection cable in accordance with these specifications
and plan and as per direction of the Employer.
b) All the fans shall have thermostatically controlled switches so that when temperature
exceeds a predetermined level they starts automatically and stops in the similar way
when temperature comes down.
c) The exhaust fan shall be 16" sweep 220 V, single phase, 50 Hz, 2000 rpm, axial flow
type, manufactured to British Standard specification or equivalent.

- 178 -

(GTCL)

9.5.14 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1)
a) Distribution Board shall be as per drawings shall be safely dead-front fixed type
having circuit breakers and isolators. The Distribution Board shall have three
phase/single phase energy meter, ammeter and voltmeter with phase selector switch,
on/off indicating lamp. The meters shall be installed in a separate compartment in the
Distribution Board and provision shall be made such that the meters can be read
directly without opening the front cover of the boards by providing glass/transparent
perplex covering on the meter opening or by installing the meter scales flushed with
the door. Panels shall be designed for operation on a 220/400 volts 50 Hz 3 phase 4
wire system. Breakers shall have inverse time tripping with thermal magnetic trip
elements.
b) All circuit breakers shall be trip-free and shall be of the indicating type. The panels
shall have the phase clearly marked, and where required, shall have solid neutral
buses. The panels shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with relevant
requirements of BS including BS 4649 or VDE 0100, where applicable, and would be
painted with 2 (two) coats of grey Duco, with standard concentric knockouts of
required sizes all round. The panels shall have directory frames and printed directory
on/in side of door. The door is to be provided with flush lock and handle. All doors
are to be keyed alike. All hinges shall be concealed.
c) The MCB/MCCBs shall be quick-make, quick-break type, and shall have inverse
time limit characteristics with instantaneous magnetic trip elements functioning on
overloads above the normal operating range. All circuit breakers shall be trip-free.
Ratings and frame sizes of breakers shall be in accordance with schedule. All lugs
shall be of the solderless mechanical type.
d) The miniature circuit breakers shall comply with BS 3871 Part 1 (1965) category M4
(5A-60A) or VDE 0660 with rated voltage 220/400 AC 50 Hz interrupting capacity
4000 amps, capable of providing overload and short circuit protection through
thermal and magnetic trip actions respectively; temperature rating, 40 degrees C,
tropicalised (moisture, fungus, corrosion treated), with contacts of silver alloy.
e) The MCCB shall comply with BS 3871 Part 2 (1966) or VDE 0660 with rated voltage
of 600 V AC 50 Hz with magnetic tripping action; interrupting capacity as indicated
in the schedule, temperature rating 40C, tropicalised (moisture, fungus, corrosion
- 179 -

(GTCL)

treated).
f) The busbar shall be of copper having the rating as per schedule of items and the
unrestricted short circuit current of 25 kA at 0.25 PF for 1 sec.
9.5.15 SWITCH BOARD
1)
a) Switch boards and fan regulators box shall be as per drawing and shall have
rocker/piano switches. The rocker/ piano switches shall be vertical single pole (1 way
or 2 way) 6 amps AC architrave rocker/piano operated switches white in colour,
complying to BS 3676:1963 and the test requirement for inductive, fluorescent or
resistive loads specified, and satisfy the best requirements of the circuits or three
types in fluorescent lamp circuits, up to the ratings or these switches, as set out in BS
3676 amendment 3:1969. The switches shall have a minimum clearance of 3 mm
between the contacts, and a similar minimum creepage distance. All contacts shall be
faced with pure silver or silver cadmium oxide alloy. The switch operating member
shall pivot independently of the rocker, making the speed make and break
independent of the speed at which the rocker is operated. Terminal capability shall be
minimum 2 x 2.5 mm2 conductors for each end. Appropriate sample shall be
submitted prior to installation of switches.
b) Each board shall have an earthing block of copper/brass of size 50 x 10 x 10 mm with
8 x 5 mm drilled holes and 8 x 3 mm machine screw tapped hole for 10 threads per
cm. The box of switch boards shall be made of 16 SWG sheet steel and shall be
painted with three coats of approved anti-corrosive grey paint. Box ears shall be at
least 14 SWG for connecting ground wires.
9.5.16 SOCKET/MCB/MCCB OUTLETS

1)
a) All socket outlets, except the shaver sockets, shall be 13 A, 3 square pin type, double,
switched, white in colour, conforming to British Standard. The socket shall be self
adjusting for pitch with non expanding size limiting entry to protect the internal
contacts from distortion. All sockets and switches (where applicable) shall have silver
or silver cadmium oxide alloy contacts in which contact pressure shall be
permanently maintained by subsidiary helical compression springs. All mouldings
shall be made of aminoplastic urea moulding powders to BS 1322:1956 and shall
possess high track resisting qualities. These shall be supplied with countersunk
- 180 -

(GTCL)

cadmium plated fixing screws and mounted in 16 SWG hammer painted sheet steel
box having brass earth point as per drawing and direction.
b) The controlled sockets of MCB/MCCB, if applicable, shall be unswitched and the
box shall have earth point.
9.5.17 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
1)
a) Air Terminal/Surge Diverter
Air terminal shall be of copper of grade required for commercial electrical works,
generally designate as being of 98 per cent conductivity when annealed. The Air
Terminal shall be 1.0 metre long 19 mm copper solid rod electroplated 3 mm thick
pointed at upper end and threaded and welded at lower end along with base plate of
size 150 x 100 x 13 mm. The terminal shall be spot welded at the base.
b) Roof Conductor
Roof conductor shall be made of copper of 98% conductivity commercial grade and
of size 16 mm2 unless otherwise specified in the drawing as indicated in the drawing
and schedule.
c) Down Lead
Down earthing lead from roof shall consist of copper conductor, bare stranded of size
16 mm2 (6 SWG). All terminal lugs shall be copper and nut-bolts of brass. Down
earth lead will take the shortest route to the mesh point as shown in the drawing and
shall be plaster covered. The other end of the copper shall be welded with the
grounding network by means of welding.
d) Test Point
The test point shall be made as per schedule and detail drawing. The conductor
terminals shall be provided with copper lugs of size as detailed in the schedule and
drawings.
9.5.18 Air Terminal

a) Air terminals shall be clamped with building, as per detail drawing and in a manner
that there is no possibility of over turning. An air terminal shall be fixed with
copper/bronze metal base by means of brass nut-bolt-washers. All air terminal shall
- 181 -

(GTCL)

be interconnected by means of roof conductor. Subsequently the entire air termination

through down conductor shall be connected to the earthing mesh.
b) The supporting base for air terminal shall be of extra heavy duty copper/bronze with
arrangements for fixing to RCC Column, the sockets having female thread for fixing
the air terminal and with clamp type fasteners to suit the sizes of horizontal and down
conductors.
9.5.19 Roof Conductor and Down Lead
a) Roof and down lead conductors shall be continuous and without any joint between
termination. All termination shall be permanent, both electrically and mechanically.
Where joints in a conductor is absolutely unavoidable, it shall be made mechanically
strong and electrically perfect conductive and or as directed by the Employers
Representative.
b) No bend in the conductor shall have radius of less than 200 mm and the angle any
turn shall not be lesser than 90 degrees. All conductor runs shall preserve a downward
or horizontal course.
c) The Roof Conductor shall be securely attached to the building by means of fasteners
at intervals not exceeding 600 mm and shall be embedded under roof finish or
concealed in plaster. Fasteners shall have cross section not less than 14 SWG and
shall be made of brass or copper.
d) Down conductor shall be securely installed by two screw masonry fastener or through
pipes, if specified in the drawing.
e) Appropriate sample shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.
9.5.20 Joints
a) Joints in the entire system shall be avoided as far as possible. However, any joint
found necessary shall be made with approved type and size of heavy duty jointing
clamps of bronze, brass/copper. All joints and bends of the conductors shall be
mechanically effective, ie. clamped, screwed, bolted, crimped, riveted or welded,
with over lapping points, the length of overlap being not less than 25 mm and shall be
electrically continuous.
9.5.21 Test Point
a) Each down conductor shall be provided with a test point (MS box of 16 SWG sheet
- 182 -

(GTCL)

steel) and earth termination in accordance with drawings, installed at a height

specified in the drawing or as per direction of the Employers Representative.
b) The test point shall be installed during construction of building wall, and made flush
with the outside wall finish.
c) Copper lugs shall be press-fitted with the conductor terminals with crimping tools, or
shall be brazed, or shall use cast brass lug-hook. The lug shall be bolted with bus bar
by means of brass nut and bolts.
d) Earth terminals shall be bare copper stranded wire and shall connect the test points at
the end of the down conductor directly to the earth electrode.
9.6
SYSTEM AND SUBSTATION EARTHING
9.6.1
General
a) The earthing of all equipment shall be in accordance with the IEE Recommendation
No. 80:1976 - Guide for Safety in Alternating Current Sub-station Grounding, the
British Standard Code for Practice CP 1013:1965 or other approved standard.
b) The Contract includes the provision of materials and installation of the complete
substation earthing system, including the earth connections of all equipment supplied
under this Contract, earth connections to panels and any other auxiliary equipment,
commissioning and testing of the earthing system.
c) The Contractor shall prepare installation drawings and schedules of material to be
provided for the earthing system. These shall include calculations of resistance,
potentials and current rating for current flowing into or out of the ground. Stop and
touch voltages both inside and outside the station shall not exceed 110 V. These
drawings and schedules shall be submitted to the Employers Representative for
approval together with calculations of step, touch and mesh potentials.
9.6.2
Earthing System
a) The earthing system shall be based on soil resistivity of 1 ohm-metre for wet soil and
10 ohm-metre for dry soil.
b) Earthing points shall be provided such that the combined resistance of the earth
network and earthing points does not exceed 1.0 ohm under any climatic conditions.
c) The operating mechanisms of isolators, earth switches and circuit breaker kiosks not
- 183 -

(GTCL)

integral with the circuit breaker shall be connected to the earth system by a branch
entirely separate from that employed to earth their bases. The bench is to be installed
such that the connection would pass beneath where an operator would stand, so as to
minimise step potential.
d) Connections to plant and equipment shall be made using the earthing terminals
specified in the Contract. Where a strip has to be drilled to fit an earth terminals, the
diameter of the hole shall not be greater than half the width of the strip.
e) Joints in earthing strip shall employ chemical welding or high compression joints of
clamps.
9.6.3
Earthing Mesh and Lead

a) If not otherwise mentioned, earthing mesh shall consist of bare stranded copper
conductor of size 50 mm2 for the main sub-station area mesh and 35 mm2 for area
coverage grounding mesh. All connections between the earthing mesh, earth
electrodes and earthing leads shall be welded and all terminal lugs shall be of copper
and all nuts and bolts brass. All joints shall be protected against corrosion.
b) Earthing conductor shall be of annealed high conductivity copper and shall be
stranded in accordance with IEC 228/VDE 0190, 0100.
9.6.4
Earthing Block
a) The earthing block shall be of solid electrolytic copper, cast and machined, of size as
per schedule, having at least 15 Nos. 6.35 mm dia. drilled holes for accommodating
the terminal of the earth continuity conductor. Requisite number of brass nuts and
bolts shall also be provided.
9.6.5
Earth Inspection Pit

a) Bricks used shall be first class. Only approved quality cement shall be used. For RCC
cover, 12.7 mm (1/2") rods at 152 mm (6") c/c. with two 9.53 mm (3/8") MS hook of
50.8 mm (2" dia.) shall be provided in the cover slab.
9.6.6
Earth Electrode
a) Pipe Electrode

- 184 -

(GTCL)

i) Where applicable, the pipe earth electrode shall be buried below ground level, as
per schedule, by tube-wall sinking method. the earthing lead from the substation to
the main earth electrode shall be installed in GI pipe of specified diameter. The
terminal connected to the earth electrode shall use a brass clamp. After making the
connection, the clamp shall be covered with bitumen poured hot and covered with
jute cloth.
b) Plate Electrode
i) Where applicable, the plate earth electrode shall be buried below ground level as
per schedule and installed in an upright position and completely surrounded by a
bed of at least one foot of charcoal mixed with sodium chloride salt, lime and
packed hard as per drawing. Distance between any two earth electrodes shall be at
least 7.62 m or as per direction of the Employer.
c) Earthing Leads
i) The earthing leads from the earth electrode shall be connected to the earthing block
HT and LT panels. A double run of specified copper conductor shall be brought out
as earth lead for the earth electrode through GI pipe from the electrode and
connected to the earth blocks. There shall be no joint in the copper earth lead. All
earthing lead shall follow the shortest and most direct route to earth electrode and
sharp bends and joints shall be avoided. The earthing leads shall be connected to
the earth electrode as per drawings. The joints shall be made mechanically strong
and electrically continuous with minimum of resistance.
9.6.7
Maximum Earth Loop Resistance

a) The maximum earth loop resistance from any point in the installation including
earthing lead to the earth electrode shall not exceed the resistance one ohm, or that
indicated by the Employer.
b) It shall be ensured that the leads are efficiently bonded to all metal works other than
the current carrying parts, so that the above resistance level is not exceeded.
c) The Contractor shall provide earth tester, test the installation in presence of and
submit earth test report to the Employer for approval.

- 185 -

(GTCL)
9.7
Control Panel
9.7.1
Construction

a) The panel shall be suitable for installation in a non air conditioned concrete block
built or pre-fabricated switch room in the ambient conditions stated and being
protected to IP42/BS5420 (IEC 144).
b) The panel may be standing alone, an addition or extension to or part of the main LV
switchboard/MCC at the discretion of the Contractor.
c) In either case responsibility for ensuring overall continuity and compatibility of
ratings, size, layout style, finish, standards etc. shall rest with the Contractor.
9.7.2
Control Panel - Internals

a) The Control Panel shall contain the following items:
(i)
Automatic Voltage Regulator to be self-protected against under and over

voltage and frequency.
(ii)
Automatic Governor Controllers.
(iii)
Automatic Check Synchronisers.
(iv)
Battery Charger (unless a separate unit).
(v)
Contactors for Alternator anti-condensation heaters, immersion heaters, oil

pumps.
(vi)
Alarm Annunciator System, of the new signal/new alarm type with separate
first failure indication.
b) Generator shall feed the main 415V Distribution Switchboard/MCC incoming

breakers via suitably sized cable.
9.7.3
Control Panel - Front Face

a) The following shall be mounted for generator set on the front face of the panel at
suitable viewing and operating heights:
(i)
Voltmeter and selector switch (Suitable current transformers are to be

provided by the Contractor and located to suit his arrangement or on
associated circuit breaker section).
(ii)
Frequency meter (45-55 Hz).
(iii)
Voltmeter for battery voltage (If not fitted on a separate charging unit).
(iv)
Selector switch, key operated, having positions:-

- 186 -

(GTCL)
(v)

Manual / Locked Out / Auto / Standby (Key to be removable in the Locked

Out position only).
(vi)
Raise/Lower Alternator Voltage adjuster.
(vii)
Synchroscope and switch.
(viii)
Generator Space Heater switch.
(ix)
Push buttons (The start push button to be functional only when the control
selector switch is at the manual position.)
9.7.4
Contactor Open
(Red)
Contactor Closed
(Green)
Increase Speed
(White)
Decrease Speed
(White)
Start
(White)
Stop
(White)
Sequence Reset
(White)
Lockout Reset
(White)
Check Alarm
(White)
Lamp Test
(White)
Control Panel - Lamp Indications

a) Contactor tripped
(White)
b) Alarm Checked (White)

c) Incomplete Starting Sequence
d) Overspeed
(White)
(White)
e) Fuel low level (or low pressure) (White)

f) Coolant High Temperature
(White)
g) Lubricant High Temperature
(White)
h) Charging Fail
i)
(White) (If not on a separate charging unit)
Push buttons and lamp indicators may be combined together where appropriate (eg.
Check Alarm/Alarms Checked).
9.7.5
Control Panel - Audible Alarm

a) The alarm shall be provided for mounting externally on the switch room wall.
- 187 -

(GTCL)

b) Emergency engine and generator shutdown from alarms as specified shall activate
engine lock out and generator circuit breaker trip.
c) Monitoring and control relays as necessary.
9.7.6
Overall Testing
a) The complete system including gas engine driven generators control panel shall
undergo a combined performance and functional test at the suppliers works. Such
tests will be witnessed by the Employer and the Contractor shall give a minimum of
two weeks notice of the impending test date.
9.8
INSPECTION
9.8.1
General
a) Every installation shall, on completion and before being energised or commissioned,
be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of IEE Wiring
Regulations 611 to 614 to verify, as far as practicable, that the requirements of these
regulations have been made.
b) The methods of test shall be such that no danger to persons or property or damage to
equipment can occur even if the circuit tested is defective.
9.8.2
Visual Inspection
a) An inspection shall be made to verify that the installed electrical equipment is:
(i)
In compliance with the applicable British Standards or IEC or any other

Standard mentioned in the Specification.
(ii)
Correctly selected and erected in accordance with these Regulations.
(iii)
Not visibly damaged as to impair safety.
b) Appendix 14 of IEE Wiring Regulation lists the principal features of an installation to

be visually inspected in order to verify compliance with the regulations.
9.9
TESTING
9.9.1
General
a) The following items, where relevant, shall be tested in the sequence indicated whether
or not mentioned in any part of the specification of installation and sub-station and in
- 188 -

(GTCL)

addition to those test mentioned elsewhere in the specification. Standard method of

testing, in respect of some of the test are given in appendix 15 of IEE regulations, the
use of other methods is not precluded provided that they give no less effective results.
(i)
Continuity of Ring Final circuits conductors.
(ii)
Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary

equi potential bonding.
(iii)
Earth Electrode Resistance.
(iv)
Insulation Resistance.
(v)
Insulation of site-built assemblies.
(vi)
Protection by electrical separation.
(vii)
Protection by barriers or enclosures provided during erection.
(viii)
Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls.
(ix)
Polarity.
(x)
Earth Fault Loop Impedance.
(xi)
Earth continuity conductor.
(xii)
Operation of Residual Current Devices.
b) In the event of any test indicating failure to comply, that test and those preceding, the
results of which may have been influenced by the fault indicated, shall be repeated
after the fault has been rectified.
9.9.2
Continuity of Final Circuit

A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the protective
conductor) of every ring final circuit.
9.9.3
Continuity of Protective Conductors

Every protective conductor shall be separately tested to verify that it is electrically sound
and correctly connected. This test shall include all conductors and extraneous conductive
parts used for equi-potential bonding.
9.9.4
Earth Electrode Resistance

Where it is necessary to measure the resistance of an earth electrode, the test method
described in item 4 of appendix 15 of IEE regulation shall be used.
9.9.5
1)
The tests described in regulations 613-6 to 613-8 shall be made before the installation is
- 189 -

(GTCL)

permanently connected to the supply. For these tests installations may be divided into
groups of outlets, each containing not less than 50 outlets. For the purpose of this
regulation the term outlet includes every point and every switch except that a socket
outlet, appliance or luminaries incorporating a switch as an outlet. A DC voltage not less
than twice the nominal voltage of the circuit concerned (RMS value for an AC supply)
shall be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance, provided that the test
voltage need not exceed 500 volts DC for installation rated up to 500 volts, or 1000 volts
DC for installation rated above 500 V up to 1000 V.
2)
When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches (including, if practicable, the
main switch) closed and, except the TN-C system, all poles or phases of the wiring
electrically connected together, the insulation resistance to Earth shall be not less than 1
mega ohms.
3)
When measured between all the conductors connected to any one phase or pole of the
supply and, in turn, all conductors connected to each other phase or pole, the insulation
resistance shall not less than 1 mega ohm. Where practicable, so that all parts of the
wiring may be tested, all lamps shall be removed and all current using equipment shall be
disconnected and all local switches controlling lamp or other equipment shall be closed.
Where the removal of lamps and/or the disconnection of current using equip is
impracticable, the local switches controlling such lamps and/or equipment shall be open.
Particular attention shall be given to the presence of electronic devices connected in the
installation and such devices shall be isolated so that they are not damaged by the test
voltage.
4)
Where equipment is disconnected for the tests prescribed in regulations 613-6 and 613-7,
and the equipment has exposed conductive parts required by these regulations to be
connected to protective conductors, the insulation resistance between the exposed
conductive parts and all live parts of the equipment shall be measured separately and
shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate British Standard for the equipment.
If there is no appropriate BS the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega
ohm.
9.9.6
Insulation of Site-Built Assemblies

Where protection against direct contact is intended to be afforded by insulation applied to
live parts during erection in accordance with regulation 412-2, it shall be verified that the
insulation is capable of withstanding, without break down or flash over, an applied
- 190 -

(GTCL)

voltage test equivalent to that specified in the BS for similar factory built equipment.
Where protection against indirect contact is provided by supplementary insulation applied
to equipment during erection in accordance with regulation 413-18 to 413-26, it shall be
verified by test that the insulating enclosure affords a degree of protection not less than
IP2X (BS 5490), and that the insulating enclosure is capable of withstanding, without
breakdown or flash over, an applied voltage test equivalent to that specified in the BS for
similar factory built equipment.
9.9.7
Electrical Separation of Circuits

Where protection against electric shock is provided by safety extra-low voltage
(Regulation 411-2 to 411-10) or by electrical separation (Regulation 413-35 to 413-39),
the electrical separation of the separated circuits shall be inspected and/or tested.
Where the source of the separated circuit is other than a safety isolating transformer
complying with BS 3535 or a source independent of higher voltage circuit, it shall be
verified that the source provides a degree of safety equivalent to that of a BS 3535 safety
isolating transformer, if necessary by performing the applicable tests of insulation
resistance and electric strength specified in BS 3535.
It shall also be verified that the live parts of equipment of the separated circuit, other than
cables, have a degree of electrical separation from other circuits not less than that between
the input and output windings of a BS 3535 safety isolating transformer (Regulations
411-6 and 413-37 iv), if necessary by performing the applicable tests of insulation
resistance and electric strength specified in BS 3535.
For cables of separated circuits, Regulations 411-7 and 413-37(iii) of IEE Wiring
Regulations shall be followed.
9.9.8
Protection Against Direct Contact by Barriers or Enclosures

Where protection against direct contact is intended to be afforded by barriers or
enclosures provided during erection in accordance with Regulations 412-3 to 412-6, it
shall be verified by test that the enclosures or barriers afford a degree of protection not
less than IP2X or IP4X as appropriate, where those regulations so require.
9.9.9
Insulation of Non-Conducting Floors and Walls

Where protection against indirect contact is to be provided by a non-conducting location

- 191 -

(GTCL)

intended to comply with Regulations 413-27 to 413-31 and 471-19, the resistance of the
floors and walls of the location to the main protective conductor of the installation shall
be measured at not less than three points on each relevant surface, one of which shall not
less than 1m and not more than 1.2m from any extraneous conductive part in the location.
Any insulation or insulating arrangement of extraneous conductive parts intended to
satisfy Regulation 413-31(a) item (iii) shall be able to withstand a test voltage of at least 2
kV, and shall not pass a leakage current exceeding 1 milli-amperes in normal condition of
use.
9.9.10 Polarity
A test of polarity shall be made and it shall be verified that all fuses and single pole
control devices are connected in the phase conductor only, that centre-contact bayonets
and Eddison type screw lamp holders in circuits having an earthed neutral conductor have
their outer or screwed contacts connected to that conductor, and that wiring has been
correctly connected to socket outlets.
9.9.11 Earth Fault Loop Impedance
Where protective measures are used which require a knowledge of earth fault loop
impedance, the relevant impedance shall be measured, or determined by an equally
effective method.
9.9.12 Earth Continuity Conductor
Earth continuity conductor or the entire earthing network shall be tested to verify the
earth continuity.
9.9.13 Operation of Residual Current Operated Devices
Where protection against indirect contact is to be provided by a residual current device its
effectiveness shall be verified by a test simulating an appropriate fault condition and
independent of any test facility incorporated in the device.
9.10
Air Condition Unit

1)
All MTS locations and RTU Room at Bibiyana shall be equipped with air condition
units with capacity of 1.5 Ton.
2)
Air condition units, split (Inverter) type shall be provided for newly built MCC at
Agargaon, Dhaka. The capacity of A.C unit shall be minimum 3 Ton. Server Room,

- 192 -

(GTCL)

System Management Room, Battery Room etc. shall have stand by A.C units as back
up. The qty of A.C units shall be twenty nos. (20) as a minimum.
3)
Air condition units, split (Inverter) type of minimum 3 Ton capacity shall be provided
for Demra SCADA Office (Old MCC) and ACC at Ashuganj The quantity of A.C units
shall be twenty nos. (20) for each location as a minimum.

- 193 -

(GTCL)

10.
CIVIL WORKS REQUIREMENTS
10.1
GENERAL INFORMATION
10.1.1 Introduction
This part provides a general description of the civil works required for the Project.
10.1.2 Scope of Work
(1)
The Contractor shall design, construct and furnish all buildings to support GTCLs
operations, accommodate the SCADA operator positions and associated equipment or
house SCADA and Telecommunications equipment as appropriate.
(2)
The Contractor shall also carry out pre-installation civil works to provide foundation or
to prepare sites and buildings for the installation of the System, whenever required.
(3)
The Contractor shall carry out refurbishment, repair, painting, replacement of existing
false ceilings, false floorings, building earthing and all other necessary civil and
architectural works.
(4)
The Contractor shall conduct refurbishment of existing all antenna masts, towers
,earthing system of masts and towers at all RTU sites, twenty MTS locations.
(5)
The Contractor shall provide both temporary and permanent facilities which shall
include but not be limited to:
(6)
a)
Office and accommodation facilities (Temporary Site camps) at four suitable

places during the whole contract period, including the two years warranty.
b)
Local site facilities in areas where return to either Dhaka or Temporary Site
camps is not practical at the end of the working day.
Permanent facilities shall include, but not be limited to the following

a)
Necessary construction of Master Control Centre at GTCL Head Office building.
b)
Microwave tower/mast foundations and associated works.
c)
Provision of new radio rooms.
d)
Provision of concrete plinths for RTU / shelters, including sunshades.
e)
Preparation of office space for Operating Company Terminal.
f) All other works as described and / or implied in the Tender Documents to complete
the Contract.
g)
The works shall also include if required the refurbishment of existing buildings
where equipment is installed at GTCL and Network Providers end under this
Contract.
h)
Provision of temporary store houses for storing of removed and disposable

materials viz. electronic equipment, cable, cabinet etc.at four locations
,Ashuganj,Demra,Feni and Mirasarai/Foujdarhat

- 194 -

(GTCL)

10.1.3 General Requirements

(1)
Foundations shall be designed per BS 8004 / Bangladesh National Building Code

(BNBC) or equivalent to suit the ground conditions.
(2)
The Contractor shall carry out all geotechnical investigations (as per BS 5930 or
equivalent) necessary and submit the reports to Employers Representative for approval
within two (2) months of award of contract. A Geotechnical Report giving bore hole
logs, all test results and a summary of recommended allowable ground bearing
pressures, anticipated settlements, depth and capacities of piles to provide for the design
of foundations shall be produced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall evaluate
liquefaction resistance of sands as per latest international Practice. The Contractor shall
use the approved Geotechnical Reports for designing all foundations.
(3)
Associated facilities of the existing system, such as communication towers and radio
rooms are still in usable condition. Therefore, these existing facilities will be
refurbished and used for the new system.
(4)
Foundation of the Antenna masts of existing as well as new RTUs (wherever required
for microwave communication with MTS) will be refurbished / constructed to suit new
system.
(5)
All designs shall be prepared in accordance with International Standards and codes of
practice or other equal national standards approved by the Employer, except for
earthquake design which shall be in accordance with Indian Standard IS 1893:1984. In
particular reservoir and liquid retaining pits/chambers shall be designed in accordance
with BS 8007. Any departure from these standards and codes shall be subject to
approval by the Employer.
(6)
All work is to be carried out in accordance with recognized standards of safety. The
Employer shall have the power to instruct the Contractor to comply with the safety
requirements. This shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
contract.
(7)
The Main Control Centre building shall be architecturally compatible and conform to an
overall architectural concept. They shall be suitable for the operating and climatic
conditions at the site.
(8)
During the refurbishment works,the design of Walls, roof membranes, windows and
doors shall take into account the effects of monsoon rains and cyclones and shall
provide adequate protection from solar gain and glare. Windows and doors shall be well
recessed into walls, fitted with glass and shaded by projecting surrounds or canopies.
Where opening windows are provided security metallic grills shall be fitted. All
windows shall be designed to be easily cleaned. Windows in rooms shall be fitted with
Venetian blinds.
(9)
Foundation shall be designed to suit the ground conditions and in compliance with the
associated soil investigation report.
(10) Through inspections, meetings and discussions the Employer will ensure that the
Contractor executes the construction work through competent and strict supervision of
his workforce. For any deviation from the approved specification and quality, the
Employer will have the authority to instruct the Contractor to reinstate such work to the
- 195 -

(GTCL)

required standard or if this cannot be done order compensation to be paid.

(11) The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design and design check of the
works which shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.
(12) The Contractor shall ensure that the submitted design is adequate in all respects for
proper functioning of the System.
(13) The Contractor shall employ suitably qualified competent civil engineers to be fulltime
on the site to supervise the work and ensure the quality and progress of the civil works
is achieved and maintained. The site engineers shall be responsible for liaising with the
Employer.
(14) The Contractors engineers shall inspect, check and test the work and having confirmed
that the work is done as per approved design, standard and specification shall submit
records to the Employer for approval.
(15) The Civil Engineering Works shall be carried out to a standard of workmanship
compatible with the best practice or, as precedence, this Specification. All elements
shall be designed to require minimum maintenance and be of durable construction.
(16) All work shall be constructed to the lines and levels shown on the approved drawings.
(17) The Contractor shall ensure that the materials to be used either in temporary or in
permanent works comply with the approved quality, standard and specification.
(18) The Contractor shall also ensure that progress is maintained in accordance with the
contracted programme of work.
(19) The Contractor shall carry out all excavations required for the permanent works in
whatever material may be encountered. All excavation works shall be as per design.
(20) Excavation shall be carried out by the Contractor in such a way as to avoid disturbance
to the surrounding ground. The Contractor shall make good / reinstate or compensate
any damage to the existing structure if occurred during execution of the works. The
Contractor shall be responsible for supporting the sides of any excavations in
accordance with maintaining the safety of the Works and to personnel.
10.2
FOUNDATIONS & SUNSHADES FOR EQUIPMENT
10.2.1 General
(1)
New stands, foundations and sunshades shall be designed and constructed for the
installation of new RTUs and instrument for the Project at Additional and Original Sites.
(2)
Existing stands, foundations and sunshades shall be refurbished at Original Sites, if

necessary.
(3)
A typical indicative plan and elevation for new stand, foundation and sunshade are
shown in Figure 10.1.

- 196 -

(GTCL)

10.2.2 Requirements
(1)
The Contractor shall design and construct reinforced concrete foundation as per BS
8004/ACI 318-2011 or equivalent with sunshade for New RTU at Additional Sites.
(2)
The Contractor shall remove and dispose the existing RTU, and refurbish the existing
foundation and sunshade of existing RTU, in order to install New RTU at Original
Sites.
(3)
The Contractor shall design and construct new Instrument Stand with reinforced
concrete foundations as per BS 8004 / ACI 318-2011 or equivalent and sunshades for
new instruments installation at Original and Additional Sites.
(4)
The Contractor shall refurbish the existing Instrument Stand with foundation and
sunshade for the existing instrument(s), if necessary for the continuous use of the
existing instrument(s).
(5)
The new foundation shall be designed to suit ground conditions and to resist possible
loads on the structure per BS 8004 / BNBC or equivalent.
(6)
New sunshades shall be designed to adequately house the RTUs and instruments to
provide ample protection against sunlight and rain.
(7)
Ducts for cables shall be properly embedded into reinforced concrete foundations.
(8)
At remote sites without commercial power supply, new sunshades for RTUs shall be
designed to support solar power panels on the roof.
(9)
New RTU Room, 5 meterx5 meterx3.5 meter shall be built at Bibiyana gas field.New
tower for installing radio antenna of height 40 meter from the ground level with
necessary pile foundation shall be built at Bibiyana gas field.
10.3
REFURBISHMENT OF RADIO ROOMS / BUILDINGS
10.3.1
General
(1)
There are a total of eleven (11) existing radio rooms / buildings at Master Telemetry
Stations to be refurbished for the installation of new communication equipment
collecting natural gas process data from RTUs and sending it to Control Centers through
BTCL's leased network.
(2)
The existing radio rooms / buildings are listed in Table 10.1 with further details.
Table 10.1 Radio Rooms and Buildings at Master Telemetry Stations
Old
Site
Code
608
New Site
Code
Master
Station
10-JALJalalabad
600T
Status of the existing

Radio Rooms/Buildings
This is Radio Room of
JGTDSL.GTCLs
telecommunication system

- 197 -
Approximate Size of Existing

Rooms/Buildings for
Refurbishment
Radio
Battery
Entire
Room
Room
Building
6.9m x
3.1m
3.1m x
2.9m
10m x 6m

(GTCL)
Old
Site
Code
405
604
302
400
120A
118
New Site
Code
Master
Station


for the existing SCADA

System, kept in this room .
shall be refurbished to
accommodate
new
equipment.
This is GTCLs radio
building entirely dedicated
to the telecommunication
10-KAI- Kailashttilla2 system for the existing
400M Radio
SCADA System. Entire
building shall be refurbished
to
accommodate
new
equipment.
This is GTCLs radio
system for the existing
10-FCH- Fenchugonj
600M
Radio
SCADA system. Entire
to
accommodate
new
equipment.
This is GTCLs radio
10-RAS- Rashidpur Gas system for the existing
300M
Field
to
accommodate
new
equipment.
This is GTCLs radio
10-ASH- Ashuganj New system for the existing
400M
Radio
to
accommodate
new
equipment.
This is GTCLs radio
20-BKB- Bakhrabad
100M
New Radio
to
accommodate
new
equipment.
20-MIRDemolish
the
existing
Mirasarai
100M
building and reconstructing
- 198 -

Rooms/Buildings for
Refurbishment
Radio
Battery
Entire
Room
Room
Building
4.1m x
3.5m
3.1m x
2.9m
10.6m x
4.6m
4.1m x
3.5m
3.1m x
2.9m
10.6m x
4.6m
4.1m x
3.5m
3.1m x
2.9m
10.6m x
4.6m
4.1m x
3.5m
3.1m x
2.9m
8.5m x
4.6m
4.1m x
3.5m
3.0m x
2.9m
10.6m x
4.6m
3.0m x
3.0m
3.1m x
1.8m
10.7m x
4.7m

(GTCL)
Old
Site
Code
New Site
Code
Master
Station
105
20-FAU100M
109
30-DMRDemra
100M
510
40-MHDMonohordi
500M
508
40-ELE500M
10.3.2
Faujdarhat
Elenga


the
existing
building
including soil test and
pilling work or any other
work, deemed necessary.
This is GTCLs radio
to
accommodate
new
equipment.
Demolish the existing radio
rooms building and clear the
site.
A part of GTCLs office
building is currently used for
the
telecommunication
system of the existing
SCADA System.
Cleaning and refurbishment
are required only for rooms
used
for
the
telecommunication system
and no refurbishment is
required at other part of the
building.
Refurbishment of Radio
Room is not required.
Preparatory
works
for
installation radio equipment
is necessary in WCC
Building, Elenga.

Rooms/Buildings for
Refurbishment
Radio
Battery
Entire
Room
Room
Building
3.5m x
2.4m
3.0m x
2.0m
7.8m x
4.1m
3.0m x
2.7m
3.5m x
2.8m
5.0 x 4.9m
6.3m x
3.9m
3.3m x
3.0m
Not
Applicable
Requirements
(1)
The Contractor shall remove and dispose of the existing radio equipment that is no
longer required for the new Communication System.
(2)
The Contractor shall examine the condition of the existing radio room and repair defects
if they are found in bad condition.
(3)
The Contractor shall clean and neatly touch-up the external and internal finish of
existing radio rooms / buildings to accommodate new radio equipment.
(4)
The Contractor shall make the provision of storing the removed and disposable radio
equipment, antenna, cable, battery, battery charger, antenna fixtures, cabinets etc which
are dismantled and non-usable materials from RTU sites in newly constructed store
- 199 -

(GTCL)

house. Such store houses shall be built in four locations viz. Ashuganj, Demra,Feni and
Foujdarhat/Mirasarai within the Employers land area. The stores shall have brick walls
and covered top with for protection of stored materials and also protection against theft.
There shall be brick wall of height 2 meters from ground level around the store house.
The floors in store room shall have cement flooring. The dimension of the store house
shall be 30 meterx30meter x5meter. A complete lighting system for the total floor of
store houses and its surroundings shall be provided to maintain service illumination.
Lighting shall be designed to produce adequate visual performance, safety and amenity.
Single-phase, 13A, 3 square-pin double socket outlets shall be installed at suitable
height above floor level. The number of sockets in each room/area shall be determined
during the detailed design.
10.4
CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS OF MCC
10.4.1 The specifications for civil works of MCC shall be as under:

Office and accommodation Facilities at Master Control Centre (MCC), Agargaon, Dhaka
having approx. 5000 sq.ft area shall include but not limited to:
a) Control Room
b)
System Management Room
c)
Equipment Room
d)
Electrical, Battery & UPS Room
e)
Workshop Room
f)
Engineer-1 (One) Office (1 Person)
g)
Engineer-2 (Two) Office (1 Person)
h)
Engineers Staff Office (4 Person)
i)
Shift In-Charge (1 Person) Room
j)
Engineers-3 (Three) Office (2 Person)
k)
Engineers-4 (Four) Office (2 Person)
l)
Store Room minimum 100 sq.ft
m) Records Room & Conference room minimum 500 sq.ft

n)
Rest Room and Kitchen
o)
Cleaners Store
p)
Reception Office
10.4.2 Civil Works for MCC

1.
General Requirements for MCC shall be as under:
a. The Contractor shall carry out survey work necessary for MCC floor design work.
b. The entire area of the MCC floor of the building shall be cleared of all debris and
levelled to provide a uniform formation fixed level at a value to be advised according
to Public Works Department (PWD) Datum.
- 200 -

(GTCL)

c. The Contractor shall design simple frame structure of Thai aluminum partition of
each rooms of the MCC floor except. Equipment room and Electrical, Battery & UPS
Room.
d. Equipment room and Electrical, Battery & UPS Room shall be designed with Brick
wall.
e. The Control Room shall be designed in accordance with ISO, Ergonomic Design of
Control Centre.
f. Internal walls shall be separated using Thai aluminium/Brick partition.
g. The dimensions of all the rooms of the MCC floor shall be adequate for proper
operation and maintenance of all plant and equipment and shall make allowance for
the future expansion facilities.
2.
Rooms
a. All internal walls shall be of Thai aluminum/Brick wall (with plastering and other
necessary works for completeness of rooms) partition, quality & color shall be
approved by the Employer.
b. All Rooms shall be free from exposed internal columns.
c. All offices shall be fully furnished with standard office furniture appropriate to the
proposed occupancy.
3.
Flooring and Ceilings

a. The floor in the foyer area shall have high quality marble tiles 500 x 500 x 25 mm
non-slip in main walkway with polished edge strips and with 150 mm skirting, as
elsewhere unless otherwise stated.
b. Floors in equipment room, office and other occupied rooms shall have high quality
foreign tiles.
c. The floor to ceiling height shall be minimum of 3.5 m.
d. The false floor and ceiling shall be used in the Control Room. Roof and Ceiling voids
shall be of 1 meter.
e. The false ceiling shall use minimum 25 mm thick and mineral fiber, acoustical, noncombustible board MS/hang-wire suitable for control Room as approved by the
Employer.
4.
Kitchen and Rest Room

a. The Kitchen shall be fully equipped with double sink, double wash basin, draining
board, cupboards, Modern Electronic Water purifier, Modern energy saving
- 201 -

(GTCL)

refrigerator, Modern high quality energy saving microwave oven, Modern gas
cooker/Electrical Induction Cooker with air filter, Modern Electrical Kettle and all
necessary utensils, cutlery(SS) and crockery (Best Quality) as a minimum consistent
with the occupancy of the building.
10.4.3 Civil Works for ACC and Demra SCADA Office (Old MCC)
A) General Requirements for ACC:
a) The Contractor shall carryout survey work necessary for ACC and Demra SCADA
Office building design work.
b) The entire area of the ACC and Demra SCADA Office building shall be cleared of all
debris and levelled to provide a uniform formation fixed level at a value to be advised
according to Public Works Department (PWD) Datum.
c) Equipment room and Electrical, Battery & UPS Room shall be refurbished.
B) Rooms
a) All internal walls of the building shall be refurbished. Necessary plustering and
painting of the rooms shall be carried out by the Contractor.
C) Flooring and Ceilings
a) Floors in equipment room, office and other occupied rooms shall have high quality of
paint & refurbishment.
b) The false floor and ceiling shall be used in the Control Room. Roof and Ceiling voids
shall be of 1 meter.
c) The old false ceiling of each room the building shall be change with new one.
d) The false Roof and Ceiling shall use hard-wood or ply-wood timber with on the
Carpet, each timber tiles (2' x 2') shall be a minimum 25 mm thick and mineral fiber,
acoustical, non-combustible board with tiles hung by MS/metal suspension grid in
reveal T-bar section with T-bar, cross T-bar, hold-down frame/clip, MS/hang-wire
suitable for control Room as approved by the Employer.
e) Galvanized steel cable trays shall be fixed above the false ceiling. All cabling run in
the false ceiling shall be run on cable tray.
D) Kitchen and Rest Room
a) The Kitchen shall be fully equipped with double sink, double wash basin, draining

- 202 -

(GTCL)

board, cupboards, Modern Electronic Water purifier, Modern energy saving

refrigerator, Modern high quality energy saving microwave oven, Modern gas cooker
with air filter, Modern Electrical Kettle and all necessary utensils, cutlery(SS) and
crockery(Best Quality) as a minimum consistent with the occupancy of the building.
b) The ACC and Demra SCADA Office building shall be fully furnished and equipped
for operational use of the System. All furnishings shall be approved by the
Employers Representative. The minimum furniture requirements for each area/room
are described as follows.
10.4.4 Air Conditioning Works for MCC,ACC and Demra SCADA Office
a) Split type air conditioners (ACs) shall have 2 separate units both heating and cooling
systems shall be provided in the Control Room, Engineer Room, Equipment Room
and Electrical, Battery & UPS Room.
b) The old ACs of the building shall be transported to the designated store yard of
GTCL.
c) All rooms equipped with split type ACs shall have 2 separate units each capable of
handling 100% of the duty.
d) All ACs shall incorporate both heating and cooling systems to maintain
standard/comfortable temperature conditions both in summer and in winter.
e) All connections between the outdoor units and indoor units shall have concealed
piping connections without disturbing the aesthetic looks of the walls.
f) Condensed or dripping water from the outdoor units as well as indoor units
conditioners shall be routed in to a drainage system with standard piping
arrangements.
g) For the safety and security of the ACs galvanized steel grilled protective covers shall
be provided where deemed necessary by the Employer.
10.4.5 Office Furniture and Equipment of MCC ,ACC and Demra SCADA Office
a) The total MCC floor shall be fully furnished and equipped for operational use of the
system. All furnishings shall be approved by the Employer. The minimum furniture
requirements for each area/room are described as follows.
A) Control Room
a) Desks, consoles, chairs shall be provided based upon facilities for three (3) operator
- 203 -

(GTCL)

positions and two (2) printer positions to complement the specified the equipment.
Additional furniture shall be provided to fully equip the Control Room for operational
use.
B) Engineers Rooms
a) Furniture shall be provided to complement the specified equipment.
b) Two suites fire-proof cabinets to store and safeguard software, backups and
associated documentation shall be provided.Two suites/cabinets shall be provided,
One suite shall be used for the storage of duplicate software etc. for the Auxiliary
Control Centre (ACC).
C) Equipment Room
a) Hard-wood or composite desks for technician and engineering terminals, housing for
printers, 3 high backed adjustable swivel chairs and lockable cabinets for
documentation, software and hardware shall be provided.
D) Workshop
a) Work benches for two persons, chairs, cupboards, desks, comprehensive set of tools
suitable for electronic equipment, adequate shelving/racking and also lockable storage
cabinets shall be provided.
E) Senior Executives Office
a) A hard-wood or composite desk, high backed, adjustable swivel arm chair, visitors
chairs (at least four), and executive style table, filing cabinets, glass door fronted book
case and open shelving for files shall be provided.
b) A reputable brand name PC system shall be provided comprised of as a minimum:

(i)
Latest maximum GHz speed processor.
(ii)
Keyboard with English and Bangla characters, mouse.
(iii)
Latest maximum GB high performance RAM, internal Latest maximum GB
cache.
(iv)
2 Latest maximum capacities make hard disk.
(v)
Graphics Sub system with driver s/w: PCI VGA with Latest maximum GB
RAM
(vi)
Latest high quality RW Drive.
(vii)
Latest LED Monitor (21 inch.)

- 204 -

(GTCL)

(viii)
Internal/External modem
(ix)
HP LaserJet latest model printer.
(x)
All necessary cabling
(xi)
UPS
(xii)
Standalone computer furniture and chair
c) The latest release of the following software shall be pre-loaded on the PC system and
also provided on CD-ROM:
(i)
Genuine Microsoft Windows latest version operating system
(ii)
Genuine Microsoft Office latest version edition including Excel, Word,

PowerPoint, and Access
(iii)
(iv)
Microsoft Project
(v)
On access licensed virus checking software, with updates provided for the
Contract duration
(vi)
Genuine latest Auto CAD software
F) Engineers Office
a) A hard-wood or composite desk, high backed, adjustable swivel arm chair, visitors
chairs (at least four) and executive style table, filing cabinets, glass door fronted book
case and open shelving for files shall be provided.
b) A reputable brand name PC system shall be provided comprising a minimum:

(i)
(ii)
(iii)

cache.
(iv)
(v)
RAM
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
UPS

- 205 -

(GTCL)
(xii)

c) The latest release of the following software shall be pre-loaded on the PC system and
(i)
Licensed Microsoft Windows latest version operating system
(ii)
Licensed Microsoft Office latest version edition including Excel, Word,

(iii)
(iv)
Licensed Microsoft Project
(v)
Contract duration
(vi)
G)
Licensed latest Auto CAD software
Managers Staff Office
a)
Four hard-wood or composite desks, four arm chairs, book case with glass front
and open shelving cabinet suitable for files, and lockable filing cabinets shall be
provided.
b)
An A3/A4 plain paper photocopier with reduction/enlargement, manual and

automatic feed, and accessories/paper storage facilities shall be provided.
c)
Lockable cabinet for office stationery storage shall be provided.
H) Shift Charge Engineers Room

(a) One hard-wood or composite desks, one arm chair, book shelf with glass front and
open shelving cabinet suitable for files, and lockable filing cabinets shall be provided.
(b) A reputable brand name PC system shall be provided comprised of as a minimum:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

cache.
(iv)
(v)
RAM
(vi)
(vii)

- 206 -

(GTCL)

(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
UPS
(xii)
(c) The latest release of the following software shall be pre-loaded on the PC system and
(i)
Licensed Microsoft Windows latest version operating system
(ii)
Licensed Microsoft Office latest version edition including Excel, Word,

(iii)
(iv)
Licensed Microsoft Project
(v)
Contract duration
(vi)
I)
Licensed latest Auto CAD software
Engineers No. 1 Office Room

(a) Two hard-wood desks, two adjustable swivel arm chairs, two visitors chairs, a table
and filing cabinets shall be provided.
J)
Engineers No. 2 Office Room

(a) Two hard-wood desks, two adjustable swivel arm chairs, two visitors chairs, a table
and filing cabinets shall be provided.
K) Store room, Record Room & Conference room

(a) Standard hard wood or steel racks, cabinets, tables and chairs shall be provided.
L) Rest Room and Kitchen
(a) A fully fitted kitchen with table and chairs suitable for six persons shall be provided
to the approval of the Employers Representative.
M) Reception Office
(a) Reception console/desk with work area, chair and storage cupboards, etc., shall be
provided to the approval of the Employers Representative.
N) Keys
- 207 -

(GTCL)

(a) Suitable facilities for safe keeping of all keys shall be provided. A set of three (3)
keys for each lock and set of master keys shall be provided.
O) Labeling
(a) All equipment shall be fitted with labels. Size, text, material, fixing etc., shall be
P) Signs
(a) Signs for the building and surrounds shall be provided. Size, text, material, fixing,
etc. shall be approved by the Employer.
Q) Inventory
(a) An inventory of all items shall be provided by the Contractor.
R) Office Consumables
(a) Office consumables shall be provided by the Contractor until three (3) months after
the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate
10.4.6 Electrical Works
10.4.6.1
General
(a) The electrical installation shall be carried out in conformance with the Electricity
Rule of the Government of Bangladesh and International standard code of Practice.
Any special requirement of the Electrical Inspector, Government of Bangladesh,
Power Development Board, Dhaka Electric Supply Authority, or the Electrical
Licensing Board or any other legal authority within Bangladesh shall also be
complied with.
(b) The Contractor shall establish the total loads of the MCC and surroundings.
(c) Single-phase, 13A, 3 square-pin double socket outlets shall be installed at suitable
height above floor level. The number of sockets in each room/area shall be
determined during the detailed design.
(d) The socket outlets in the kitchen shall be at 1.2 m height from the floor or 0.25 m
above a work-surface. The number shall be adequate for a modern office kitchen.

- 208 -

(GTCL)

(e) Calling bell and push buttons shall be provided with all necessary fittings and cabling
for all rooms except the kitchen which shall accommodate the control panel.
10.4.6.2Lighting
(a) A complete lighting system for the total floor of MCC and its surroundings shall be
provided to maintain service illumination. Lighting shall be designed to produce
adequate visual performance, safety and amenity and shall be free from excessive
glare, stroboscopic effects and flicker from discharge lamps.
(b) Light fittings shall generally be fluorescent type and in accordance with IEC
Publication No.-162. they shall be complete with instant start control gear, 2-pin lamp
holders with totally enclosed pins, of minimum width beams and suitable for flush
mounting in the false ceiling and surface mounting on the ceilings of other areas. On
walls, incandescent lamp fittings shall be installed at proper height.
(c) Fluorescent light fitting shall be in accordance with IEC Publication No. 81 and shall
have color rendering values of x=0.335 (ie. color) and y=0.342 on the IEC chromatic
scales.
(d) The lighting system shall include provision for ease of erection, maintenance,
cleaning, lamp replacement and future extension. Lamp replacement and maintenance
should, unless otherwise approved be possible without outage of the main supply.
(e) All light fittings, sockets, fixtures cables shall be best quality, designed to ensure
satisfactory operation and service life under all service load frequency, temperature
and variations.
(f) In the event of mains failure of the lighting system, the illumination level in the
Control Room, Equipment Room and Engineers Room shall be maintained at the
specific level. For other rooms/areas general lighting shall be provided to ensure the
safe movement of personnel enable essential operations to be carried out at all times.
(g) Minimum level of illumination in different areas shall be as follows:
Area
Illumination Level
Control and System Management Rooms
10.4.6.3
500-550 Lux
Workshop
300-350 Lux
All other room
200-250 Lux
Fire Detection and Alarm System

- 209 -

(GTCL)

(a) All rooms/areas of the MCC shall be equipped with fire, smoke and heat detectors,
manual call points and firefighting equipment in accordance with a recognized
international standard, NFPA/local rules or equivalent.
(b) A fire, smoke and heat alarm system panel with mimic showing the MCC area
shall be provided in Control Room within easy viewing distance of the operators.
One audio level horn shall be provided to sound on fire. A common repeat fire
contact shall alarm on the SCADA System.
(c) Firefighting equipment shall be provided to enable MCC, ACC, Demra SCADA
Office building personnel to deal with fires. The equipment shall conform to local
fire fighting rules. Firemans personal equipment such as breathing apparatus and
ladders shall be provided.
(d) Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in all areas of the MCC, ACC, Demra
SCADA Office building of the relevant type consistent with function of the area.
10.5
REFURBISHMENT OF CONTROL CENTERS
10.5.1
General
(1)
10.5.2
There are two existing Control Centers for the Existing System. One is the Main Control
Center located at Agargaon, Dhaka and the other is the Auxiliary Control Center located
at Ashugonj. The old MCC located at Demra. Existing equipment of these control
centers shall be replaced with new equipment. Therefore the existing equipped rooms
shall be refurbished for the installation of new equipment after the removal of existing
equipment.
Requirements
(1)
The Contractor shall remove and dispose of existing SCADA equipment that is no
longer required for the new SCADA System and transport it to the designated storage
locations of the Employer.
(2)
The Contractor shall examine the present condition of the following existing rooms at
both Control Centers and repair defects if they are found in bad condition.
a)
System Management Room
b)
Equipment Room
c)
Battery Room
(3)
The Contractor shall clean and neatly touch-up the internal finishes of these rooms at
old control centers at Demra and Auxiliary control center at Ashugonj. Both Control
Centers shall accommodate the new SCADA equipment.
(4)
The Contractor shall refurbish existing radio rooms prior to installation of new
equipment. The refurbishment work shall include roofs, walls and floors, but not be
limited to:
a)
Removal of existing bad plaster and renewing the same.

- 210 -

(GTCL)

b)
Painting of the walls, ceiling, doors, windows and steel works.
c)
Repair or replace defective doors, windows, shutters, frames and other fittings.
d)
Make safe electrical installation, wiring, and earthing system and bring up to
standard necessary for the new telecommunications equipment.
e)
Install window type air-conditioner. ACs shall incorporate cooling system to

maintain temperature to a maximum 24C and relative humidity to a maximum
of 65%. Window type ACs shall be installed on the external wall at a standard
height. Dripping water from the units shall be routed into a drainage system with
piping arrangement. Galvanized steel grilled protective covers shall be fitted.
10.6
REFURBISHMENT OF THE ANTENNA MASTS / TOWERS
10.6.1
General
(1)
The Contractor shall remove and dispose of the Antenna masts ( which are unusable) of
existing as well as new RTUs.
(2)
The Contractor shall examine the condition of existing microwave Tower Foundations
and rectify the defects (if any) for all twenty MTS locations.
(3)
The contractor shall replace Guy wire, nut bolt ,clamps and necessary accessories and
install the mast within proper and safe working condition as per the international safety
rules.
(4)
The Contractor shall dismantle existing feeder cable, antenna and accessories from
existing MTS sites and shall install new antenna, feeder cable of new radio systems.
(5)
The Contractor shall paint all existing antenna masts at RTU sites and towers at MTS
locations with epoxy paints.
(6)
Radio and other equipment at all MTS locations shall be dismantled and stored in the
designated storage locations of GTCL.
(7)
Antenna, cable, batteries and accessories shall be removed from all RTU sites and taken
to designated storage locations of GTCL.
(8)
Unused RTU rack & unused radio rack shall be transported to designated storage
locations of GTCL.
10.6.2 Painting
(1)
The Contractor shall remove the existing painting ,carry out all requisite pre painting
works such as using primer etc and shall paint all masts, towers with high quality epoxy
paints.
10.6.3 Requirements
(1)
The Contractor shall design and construct / erect the Antenna masts of existing as well
as new RTUs for this Project.
(2)
The Contractor shall clean the steel surfaces of the existing microwave steel Towers
- 211 -

(GTCL)

with iron brush / emery papers and apply zinc-rich paints on the steel surfaces of
Towers.
(3)
10.7
The Contractor shall design and construct / erect the Self Supported Antenna tower of
40 meter height at Bibiyana Gas field with proper foundation.
Tower/ Mast Foundations

a)
New Towers for the Radio System shall be located at Bibiyana and other specified
locations.
b)
Where new Towers are specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for their design,
supply, construction and commissioning.
c)
The number of tower required and height of each tower shall be determined by the
Contractor and identified in the Radio Path Engineering Report. The height of the
tower as a minimum shall be 40 meter from the ground level at Bibiyana Gas field.
d)
Tower shall be designed to support both microwave antennas and UHF radio Aerials.
e)
The following investigations shall be undertaken for each new tower site:
f)
i)
2 nos. bore holes 45 m in depth.
ii)
Cone penetration test at each tower location.
Construction
i)
The new towers shall be four legged self supporting and designed,
constructed and installed in accordance with EIA -222 or equivalent. Tower
loading shall be calculated in accordance with EIA-222
ii)
Antenna towers shall be designed to support at least twice the initial design
load to provide for antenna loads of future requirements.
f) Where new Masts are required, the Contractor shall be responsible for their design,
supply, construction and commissioning. The number of masts required and height of
each masts shall be determined by the Contractor and identified in the Radio Path
Engineering Report.
10.7.1 Civil Works for Foundations
a)
Tower foundations shall be of reinforced concrete construction, piled as necessary

depending upon ground condition and shall ensure differential and total settlements
are restricted to acceptable limits.
b)
The Contractor shall determine the tower height and tower loading (antenna size and

- 212 -

(GTCL)

number) and design the self supporting tower foundation to support at least twice the
specified loading.The minimum height of tower at Bbiyana shall be 40 meter from the
ground level.
c)
Antenna tower foundations shall be designed to withstand maximum anticipated

winds whilst maintaining the specified system performance requirements. Tower twist
and sway in these wind conditions shall not exceed one quarter of the antenna beamwidth.
d)
Trenches for pipes or cables shall be provided in reinforced concrete construction and
with connections to the site drainage system to allow dispersal of unforeseen water
within the trench, and shall be fitted with manually removable well fitting covers such
that they will stand all loading from traffic without rocking or excessive leakage.
Ducts for cables shall be properly surrounded with concrete. Cable trays for
communication cables shall be made of galvanised steel.
10.7.1.1 Earthing
a)
All Tower shall be earthed in accordance with the MPT-1331 and EIA 222 with the
former taking precedence. Earthing components shall conform to BS - 6651 or
equivalent.
10.7.1.2 Tests
a)
The detailed log shall be made of each bore hole showing the various types of strata
encountered. The following tests shall be undertaken:
i)
Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) values are to be obtained at every 1 m depth

for the first 5 m, thereafter 2 m intervals or wherever strata changes. The first
SPT shall be at 0.5 m depth.
ii)
Samples to be taken at 1 m intervals at each change of atrata.
iii)
Sieve analysis to be carried out on disturbed samples to determine particle

size distribution, wherever the strata changes.
iv)
Compressibility of soil samples at 2 m depths at each bore hole to be

determined.
v)
Moisture content and specific gravity determination of soil samples from

different bore holes.

- 213 -

(GTCL)

vi)
Elevation of the bore holes is to be related to the Datum.
vii)
Ground water level in each bore hole is to be recorded and a standpipe

installed into two bore holes of appropriate depth.
Water level to be
measured every day for 6 months.

viii)
Dynamic shear modulus to be determined at 2 m intervals of each bore hole.
ix)
Any other tests necessary for ground improvement and/or piling works.
x)
In-situ testing and sampling shall be supervised and recorded by a qualified

person. Sample testing shall be done in an approved laboratory.
10.8
RADIO /RTU ROOMS
10.8.1 General
a)
At Mirasarai and Bibiyana, new Radio Room/RTU Room shall be constructed to
house the radio equipment.
(b)
At existing microwave radio sites the radio rooms shall be refurbished.
(c)
Radio /RTU rooms shall be single story buildings and shall have air conditioning and
electrical power facilities. A typical indicative plan of a Radio Room is shown in
Figure
10.8.1.1
New Construction
(a)
Radio/RTU rooms at Mirasarai and Bibiyana shall consist of :

(i) Radio room.
(ii) Battery room.
(iv) Toilet.
(b)
The building shall be suitably sized and furnished to accommodate all equipment and
associated supervisory personnel.
(e)
Air conditioning shall be provided to maintain the temperature to a maximum 240C

and relative humidity to a maximum of 65%.
(f)
Hardwood flush doors in timber frames, complete with door furniture of robust
- 214 -

(GTCL)

quality shall be provided.

(g)
An adequate number of ceiling fans, fluorescent light fittings and 220 V, 13 A, 3

square pin double switched socket outlets shall be provided in all rooms.
(h)
The building shall be provided with proper Earthing and lighting protection in
accordance with the BS 6651 or local standard as per National Building Code.
(i)
Provision shall be made for cabling to enter and be terminated within the building.
(j)
All rooms shall be interconnected via a plated concrete trench.
(k)
Toilet facilities shall be provided with necessary fittings.
(l)
Security and suitable fire fighting equipment shall be provided in all rooms.
10.8.2 Refurbishment of Existing Facilities

(a)
The Contractor shall refurbish existing radio rooms prior to installation of new
equipment. The refurbishment work shall include roofs, walls and floors, roofs but
not be limited to:
(i)
Removal of existing bad plaster and renewing the same.
(ii)
Painting of the walls, ceiling, doors, windows and steel works.
(iii)
Repair or replace defective doors, windows, shutters, frames and other

fittings.
(iv)
Make safe electrical installation, wiring, and earthing system and bring up to
standard necessary for the new telecommunications equipment.
(v)
Install window type air-conditioner. ACs shall incorporate cooling system to

maintain temperature to a maximum 24C and relative humidity to a
maximum of 65%. Window type ACs shall be installed on the external wall at
a standard height. Dripping water from the units shall be routed into a
drainage system with piping arrangement. Galvanised steel grilled protective
covers shall be fitted.

- 215 -

(GTCL)

11.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
11.1
GENERAL
(1)
At stages throughout the Contract, formal tests shall be carried out and all test result
shall be submitted by the Contractor. These test procedures shall be designed to show
that the System meets the requirements of the Specifications, and shall be completed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer before subsequent stages can proceed.
(2)
The procedures shall define detailed test method and procedures, measuring items,
testing equipment to be used and recording forms for test results, and shall contain
design values and tolerances which will be treated as the criteria for evaluation of each
test. The test procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
respective test.
(3)
All equipment and components of the system shall be subjected to inspection and testing
both during and upon completion of manufacturing and at site. Contractor shall provide
full details of all type tests carried out on boards and modules and tests normally carried
out in their works including to what standards these are carried out. These test
preferably in accordance with International / National Standards.
(4)
All factory tests will be witnessed by Employer / Engineer.
(5)
Employer / Engineer shall have free entry and access at all phases of the project to all
parts of Contractor's facilities associated with manufacturing and testing of system.
(6)
Contractor shall invite Employer / Engineer well in advance with minimum 2 months
notice of the date at which the system is ready for testing.
(7)
The equipment will not be shipped before they have been officially released in the form
of release notes by Employer / Engineer.
(8)
Contractor shall provide Employer / Engineer with all reasonable facilities necessary to
determine compliance to the system specification.
(9)
Contractor to note that acceptance of the equipment and the system of inspection and
testing shall in no way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility to deliver the
equipment meeting all the requirements specified in the specification. Contractor shall
be responsible till the completion of the warranty, for any corrections / modifications
including supply and implementation of hardware & software to fulfil the requirements
of the contract. If after acceptance of the system certain changes are required such as
debugging of the software supplied or any other related issues which cannot be
ascertained during the final handover of the system, these changes shall be carried out
by the Contractor at their cost.
(10) Contractor personnel shall be actively involved during factory acceptance and site
acceptance testing
(11) The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT), Site Acceptance Test (SAT), Commissioning Test
and the Final System Test to be carried out by the Contractor shall include but are not
limited to the following:
a)
Visual check

- 216 -
INSPECTION & TESTING

(GTCL)
11.2
b)
Name plate check
c)
Dimensional check
d)
Cabling, wiring, and grounding check
e)
Protective and safety system function check
f)
Testing of system passwords and security features.
g)
Functional test
h)
Operation test
i)
Performance test
j)
Checking of system loading w.r.t CPU, memory, disk, as per the requirements.
k)
Checking of system diagnostics for all the equipment as per the requirements,
power failure and system restarts.
l)
Redundancy check for dual communication channel
m)
Pipeline shutdown and various sequences and interlocks as per pipeline Operation
and Control Philosophy.
TEST EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES

(1)
(2)
11.3

The Contractor shall provide for the purpose of the tests all equipment and services
required for testing, including but not limited to:
a)
Laboratory test instruments
b)
Special test equipment, simulators and test software
c)
Other items of equipment and software specified elsewhere as part of the

Contractor's supply, or required for the purpose of conducting a test
d)
Consumables
e)
Payment of all communications charges during the Factory Acceptance Test

including local and international telephone calls.
All test instruments shall be subject to routine inspection testing and calibration, by the
Contractor. All test instruments shall be subject to approval by the Engineer, and if
required by the Engineer shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by an
approved standards laboratory.
TESTS
The following tests shall be carried out by the Contractor
(1)
Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
(2)
Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
(3)
Commissioning Test
(4)
Final System Test
11.3.1 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)

- 217 -

(GTCL)

(1)
Before any item of the equipment is packed or delivered from the manufacturer's
factory, all tests itemized in the relevant sections of these Technical Specifications shall
be carried out by the Contractor as far as practicable to prove compliance with the
requirements of the Specifications. All parts of the SCADA and Telecommunication
System shall be assembled in the manufacturer's factories prior to shipment and tests
shall be performed by the Contractor as may be required to demonstrate the adequacy of
the systems and its component parts. All tests should simulate normal operating
conditions as closely as possible.
(2)
The Contractor shall prepare FAT documentation covering all hardware, software
including SCADA software and system functionalities including system expansion
requirements and submit it 3 months in advance for Employer / Engineer review and
approval. Factory acceptance test will be done based on the stipulations in the approved
FAT document, which shall completely fulfil the contract requirements and approved
SCADA/RTU FDS documents.
(3)
The Employer / Engineer shall be free to request any specific test on any equipment and
the system considered necessary by him, although not listed in the testing documents to
verify the compliance with the specifications.
(4)
In order to successfully conduct the FAT, it is advisable that the Contractor conducts a
PRE-FAT test to ensure that the system performs in compliance with the specification
requirements .These tests shall enable the Contractor to detect and correct most design,
integration and performance problems before FAT. The signed and approved Pre-FAT
reports shall be submitted to the purchaser. Based on these reports the clearance for
conducting FAT shall be given by the purchaser.
(5)
The Contractor shall give the call regarding FAT well in advance with a minimum of 30
days notice of the date at which the system is ready for testing.
(6)
FAT shall be carried out in SCADA / RTU Contractor's premises. FAT shall cover the
testing & Integrated SCADA / RTU System with RTUs.
Testing shall systematically, fully and functionally test all the hardware and software in
the presence of Employer / Engineer inspectors to ascertain compliance with the
contract document and approved FDS documents. Test Bed shall be prepared with all
the equipment (SCADA Servers, HMI, RWSs, RTUs, Routers, and Peripherals etc.)
interconnected to actual configuration to perform the testing of integrated SCADA
system. All the workstation desks, cabinets with mounting, wiring, interconnection of
the equipment shall be available for this testing.
The equipment to be supplied shall be type-tested for electromagnetic compatibility.
11.3.2 Site Acceptance Test (SAT)

After the equipment has been fully assembled / installed, the Contractor shall carry out the
Site Acceptance Test.
(1)
The SAT shall be carried out on all equipment and software supplied under the
Contract.
(2)
The SAT shall be carried out after the equipment has been installed at the site.

- 218 -

(GTCL)

(3)
The SAT shall be performed with equipment at the locations in which they will
eventually operate, or in a typical location in the case of portable equipment.
(4)
The SAT shall demonstrate that the overall design of the System meets the requirements
of the Specification in the field, using the actual communications network, including
equipment supplied by others.
(5)
The installation shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the installation manual and
cable drawings and to verify satisfactory condition of all equipment.
(6)
SAT shall involve integrated testing of complete RTU / SCADA system. Site
Acceptance Testing will be done based on the stipulations in the approved SAT
document. Once the test is successfully performed, then the system would be ready for
commencement of test run.
11.3.3 Commissioning Test

The Commissioning Tests shall be performed following completion of the installation of
equipment at each site. The Commissioning Test shall be carried out under the conditions of
connecting all the equipment.
(1)
The Contractor shall carry out the Commissioning Tests in the presence of the
Employer's Personnel and the Engineer to demonstrate that all guarantees and technical
particulars as listed in the Contract Documents are satisfied and that all the equipment is
properly installed.
(2)
The Commissioning Test shall be conducted on all equipment and software supplied
under the Contract in accordance with the SAT document approved by the Employer.
(3)
The Commissioning Test shall establish all aspects of functionality, including proving
of all types of communication link.
(4)
The Commissioning Test shall include both polling of the RTU by the SCADA Server
and generating an alarm in the RTU to ascertain it can initiate a call to the Server. The
necessary test software / configuration to perform the above shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
(5)
Whenever all or part of a SCADA system is modified, repaired or replaced, recommissioning is required to verify that the portions of the system affected function
correctly and that the work has not affected other portions of the system. The extent of
re-commissioning required should be determined from the extent of the modifications.
11.3.4 Final System Test

(1)
The Final System Test shall be carried out to confirm continuous functional operation of
the systems with the required system reliability and availability. This test aims at
keeping the complete integrated system operating for 24 hours a day for a period of 14
days.
(2)
In case of failure, the tests shall be restarted till the system operates without failure of
any system functionality for 14 days.
(3)
Failure of test shall be limited to such system failures which will affect system
- 219 -

(GTCL)

availability and reliability and shall not be dependent upon established failure of third
party supplied items. Employer / Engineer shall have the right to reject the complete
system or part thereof in the event of two successive failures of test run.
(4)
Functional performance testing for system certification must take place without operator
intervention in the processor from beginning to end of the test. For this reason it is
highly recommended that a complete pre-test be conducted, using the full functional
performance test procedure, prior to undertaking the certification test.
(5)
The Final System Test shall be carried out in accordance with a test plan and procedures
(6)
The test result obtained during the Final System Test shall be documented in the form of
report and submitted to the Employer for approval within 15 days of completion of Test
Run.

- 220 -

(GTCL)

12.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT AND SPARE
12.1
INTRODUCTION
The New System is required to provide full operational facilities for a minimum of ten (10)
years. The Contractor shall ensure that supplier is able to provide spares for 10 years.
12.2
OPERATION SUPPORT
12.2.1 General
(1)
In addition to or as part of the staff required for maintenance support and training, the
Contractor shall provide two engineers in Bangladesh for the 24 months period from
System Take-over to Contract Completion. The two engineers shall be a SCADA
engineer and a communication engineer
(2)
The engineers shall be based amongst Agargaon MCC, Ashuganj ACC and Demra
SCADA Office. In addition they will be required to travel to all sites covered by the
Contract as and when required. The engineers shall work under the direction of the
Engineer and / or as directed by the Employer. Each engineer shall work a minimum of
42 working weeks per year in Bangladesh. At all times at least one engineer shall be
working in Bangladesh.
12.2.2 Qualifications and Experience
12.3
(1)
The said two engineers shall be degree qualified with a minimum of five years practical
experience in the relevant area.
(2)
The SCADA engineer shall have experience in SCADA systems configuration and
maintenance, and shall advise and assist the Employer in configuring and maintaining
the System.
(3)
The Communication engineer shall have experience in communication systems

configuration and maintenance, and shall advise and assist the Employer in configuring
and maintaining the System.
MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY
(1)
The Contractor shall provide all maintenance services for the System during the two
years warranty period following System Taking-Over.
(2)
The system shall be guaranteed to give specified performance of 99.99% for a period of
24 months from the date of acceptance of the system by the Employer. This warranty
shall start from the date of acceptance of the system.
(3)
During the warranty, the Contractor shall use his own instrument, spares, man-hour,
communication facilities, hardware, software, materials, etc. for the rectification of any
problem.
(4)
System Warranty including all services and spares including consumables for operation
and maintenance of the system.

- 221 -
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE SUPPORT

AND SPARES

(GTCL)
12.4
12.5

(5)
On completion of the warranty period, the Employer will enter maintenance contracts
for all maintenance activities for the System and the provision of spare parts.
(6)
The Contractor shall support these maintenance contracts through the Contractor and/or
relevant maintenance service provider for the following services:
a)
Routine maintenance
b)
First level hardware maintenance
c)
Repair of all items replaced under first level maintenance
d)
Emergency call-out
e)
Software maintenance
(7)
First level maintenance and support shall include identification of faults down to module
or card level and on-line replacement of faulty equipment.
(8)
Notwithstanding this requirement to maintain the System, the Contractor shall provide
documentation and training of the Employer's staff during the Contract period, to a level
that would allow first level and routine maintenance to be performed.
DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE

(1)
The System shall have remote and local diagnostic facilities to allow for identification
of faults necessary for first level maintenance.
(2)
Equipment shall be designed to allow the on-line replacement of modules or cards

without affecting System operation.
(3)
Peripheral equipment shall be easily removable from service and either replaced by
standby equipment or spare equipment without affecting System operation.
SPARE PARTS
(1)
For Mandatory Spares, Contractor to supply 10% of total installed quantity (rounded
off to 2 nos. as minimum) for electronic cards / modules of each type of each system,
subsystem of SCADA, RTU and Communication Equipment, IPPBX, Video
Conferencing System, UPS, Power Supply System, Battery & Battery Charger System,
Solar Power System etc.
10% spare instruments or minimum one of each range, type and material of construction
for Field instruments and Flow computers.
100 % spares shall be provided for consumables e.g. fuses, lamps, plugs, clamps etc.
However, any other mandatory spares not mentioned above but required for any item
shall also be supplied by Bidder.
Bidder shall provide a list of mandatory spares at the time of offer and price of these
spares will be included in main offer.
(2)
During two (2) years O & M period, the Contractor shall provide all spare parts and
consumables required for maintaining the System (O & M Spares).

- 222 -

AND SPARES

(GTCL)

(3)
Contractor to note that the mandatory spares are the inventory of the spares to be kept
by the Employer and the same shall not be utilized by the Contractor at any stage of the
project till completion of warranty, without Employer's prior concurrence. Any
mandatory spares utilized by the Contractor during Warranty period shall be replenished
within 45 days.
(4)
The Commissioning spares for all the items / equipment shall be included along with
commissioning services as required to commission the complete system. The
consumable required during commissioning of system shall be included as part of
commissioning spares.
(5)
The Commissioning spares shall be arranged by the Contractor to cater to the needs /
requirement during installation, commissioning, site acceptance testing, trial run and
warranty period. These spares will be the part of the tender. These spares shall be
readily available with the Contractor. If the spares not used they may be retained by the
Contractor for maintenance.
These commissioning spares are different from Mandatory spares and Contractor
shall not use mandatory spares as commissioning spares, whatsoever.
Bidder shall provide a list of commissioning spares (with Serial & Part number for each
system, sub-system) at the time of offer and price of these spares will be included in
main offer.
(6)
For spares Contractor shall provide the address, contact person, fax and telephone
numbers of the manufacturer for spare parts. The Contractor shall warrant that spare
part for the system would be available for minimum of 10 years after warranty
period after system commissioning. After this period if the Contractor discontinues
the production of the spare parts, then he shall give at least 12 months notice prior
to such discontinuation so that Employer may order the requirements of spares in
one lot.
In the bid, the Contractor shall provide unit price (year wise and % escalation per year)
of each Spare Module card, which shall be valid for the procurement of the spares for
operation and maintenance in subsequent years.
(7)
All spare parts shall be identical, electrically and mechanically, to the corresponding
parts in the equipment provided and shall be suitably packed and clearly marked, ready
for storage.
(8)
Spare or replacement parts shall be fully compatible with and necessarily similar to
items previously supplied.
(9)
The Contractor shall furnish full contact address of all the equipment suppliers with
their (supplier's) commitment letter to support spares provision to the Employer, the
local associate or any other party undertaking maintenance contracts with the Employer
to maintain the System availability for its lifetime.
(10) The Contractor shall guarantee that the suppliers shall maintain the availability of spares
or replacement parts for the System lifetime.
(11) The Contractor shall guarantee, if the supplier intends to discontinue the manufacture of
spare or replacement parts for the works during the maintenance Contract with the
- 223 -

AND SPARES

(GTCL)

Employer, the supplier shall supply such spare or replacement parts required to maintain
the System availability for the remainder of the maintenance Contract to the local
associate. This shall include any repair service that may be discontinued.
(12) The Contractor shall guarantee, if the supplier intends to discontinue the manufacture of
spare or replacement parts for the works, the supplier shall either:
12.6
a)
Forthwith give notice to the Employer of such intention and afford the Employer
the opportunity of ordering all spare or replacement parts required to maintain the
System availability for its lifetime.
b)
Or sell to the Employer such drawings, patterns, specifications and other

information as he may have in his possession to enable him to make or have made
such spares or replacement parts.
MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS
12.6.1 General
(1)
The maintenance Contractor shall provide maintenance contracts for all System
hardware and software:
(2)
Hardware maintenance contracts shall conform to the Model Form of Conditions of

Contract for the Servicing (Maintenance) of Computer Equipment of The Institute of
Purchasing and Supply, 1988. The Contract shall provide for both preventive and
remedial maintenance to a specified standard of service.
(3)
Software maintenance contracts shall be to the Model Form of License Agreement for
the use of Computer Software Products of the Institute of Purchasing and Supply, IPS
Model L 1987, The Contract shall provide remedial maintenance to a specified standard
of service.
12.6.2 Routine Maintenance

(1)
Routine maintenance on the System shall be based on the recommendations of the

maintenance Contractor to maintain the System availability. The maintenance shall be
performed at no additional charge, at a time agreed with the Employer, but only during
normal working hours (Sunday to Thursday, 09:00 to 17:00).
(2)
The maintenance Contractor shall be responsible for detailing the necessary procedures
to be carried out to fully comply with the Manufacturers recommended preventive
maintenance requirements.
(3)
During routine maintenance visits, the maintenance Contractor shall replace or repair
any defective equipment at his own expense.
(4)
The maintenance Contractor shall provide a detailed report on all findings within seven
calendar days of a routine maintenance visit.
(5)
To the extent that the Standard of the works has not been specified in the Contract, the
Contractor shall use good quality materials, techniques and standards and execute the
Contract with the care, skill and diligence required in accordance with best engineering
practice.

- 224 -

AND SPARES

(GTCL)

12.6.3 Hardware Remedial Maintenance

(1)
A remedial maintenance service that takes the form of fault diagnosis and repair or
replacement of defective parts of the System shall be provided
(2)
The coverage and response time period shall be 7 days a week 24 hours a day; however
the contract shall provide different call out charges for weekdays, weekends and visits
outside of normal working hours. The Contractor shall attend to the site within 24 hours
or as directed by the Employer of the report of a fault.
(3)
The Contractor shall be responsible for attending sites with all relevant spare parts and
test equipment to enable a speedy and effective repair.
(4)
If a replacement unit is supplied under the maintenance contract it will remain in the
equipment under normal circumstances. In such cases the original unit in the equipment
shall be vested in the Contractor and become his absolute property at the time of
replacement, and the replacement unit shall be vested in the Employer and become their
absolute property at that time.
(5)
The Contractor shall not have access to the Employer's system manuals and or drawings.
(6)
The Contractor shall make repairs within an MTTR (Mean Time To Repair) specified in
the maintenance contract.
(7)
The Contractor shall provide a detailed written report of the visit, which shall only be
certified by the designated maintenance engineer.
12.6.4 Software Remedial Maintenance

(1)
A software remedial maintenance service that takes the form of fault diagnosis and
correction of software shall be provided.
(2)
The coverage and response time period shall be 7 days a week 24 hours a day however
the contract shall provide different call out charges for weekdays, weekends and visits
outside of normal working hours. The Contractor shall attend to site within 24 hours of
the report of a fault.
(3)
The Contractor shall be responsible for attending sites with all relevant equipment to
enable a speedy and effective repair.
(4)
The Contractor shall not have access to the Employer's system manuals and or drawings.
The Contractor shall make repairs within an MTTR specified in the maintenance
contract.
(5)
The Contractor shall provide a detailed written report of the visit, which shall only be
certified by the designated maintenance engineer.
(6)
In the case of non-critical software errors or faults, the Employer will agree with the
Contractor on a mutually convenient time for the Contractor to attend the site and be
granted access to the System.
(7)
All successful Software Remedial Maintenance will be documented and included on all
system working and back-up copies of the software.
- 225 -

AND SPARES

(GTCL)

12.6.5 Consumables
The Contractor shall offer to provide all consumables such as printer paper, floppy disks,
printer ribbons, plotter pens, streamer tapes etc., with spare parts.

- 226 -

AND SPARES

(GTCL)
13.

IDENTIFICATION, MARKING, PACKING AND STORING

(1)
Each equipment / instrument shall be individually packed, tagged and protected.
(2)
All equipment inscription, labels, nameplates, tags, instruction and warning plates
necessary for the identification and safe operation of the equipment shall be in the
English languages.
(3)
Stainless steel plate with the following details engraved shall be permanently fixed on
the equipment / instrument
a)
Project identification no.
b)
Manufacturers name with model no. and serial no.;
c)
Tag number;
d)
Pressure and temperature design;
e)
Protection class of enclosure
(4)
Packing must be such to protect all goods from possible impacts and foreign matters;
moreover, it must limit the influence of both the climate and the environment, and be
suitable for the kind of shipping provided for.
(5)
In packing the equipment / instrument and accessories all necessary precautions will
have to be taken to avoid any damage to the accessories during transport and delivery.
(6)
All items supplied shall be packed for long storage under the climatic conditions
prevailing at the site. Small items shall be packed in sealed transparent plastic bags with
desiccator packs as necessary. Each item shall be clearly marked with its description,
purpose and site designation code as applicable. When more than one item is packed in
a single case a general description of the contents is to be shown on the outside of each
case and a detailed list enclosed. All cases and other packages must be suitably marked
and numbered for identification purposes.
(7)
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all the instruments are carefully
and / or suitably packed for shipment, so that they arrive at site in good condition and
remain so during storage at site. Before dispatch, all exposed surface shall be protected
by applying anti rust primer (two coats) and suitable cover shall be provided for the
instruments to be supplied
(8)
The Contractor will be responsible for all damages due to improper preparation of the
goods for shipment.
(9)
Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with acceptable commercial practices (for

domestic or foreign shipments) unless otherwise indicated in General Conditions of
Contract or Special Conditions of Contract.
(10) Contractor shall make shipment using the minimum number of shipping containers
consistent with the requirements of safe transit, available modes of transportation and
routing. It shall be Contractors responsibility to determine that packing as done is
adequate to assure that all equipment shall arrive at destination in an undamaged
condition and ready for the intended use.

- 227 -
IDENTIFICATION, MARKING,
PACKING AND STORING

(GTCL)
14.
TRAINING
14.1
INTRODUCTION

The Contractor shall provide a program of training courses and training to enable the
installation, operation, management and maintenance of the System to be effectively carried
out.
14.2
GENERAL COURSE REQUIREMENTS

(11) Courses shall consist of lectures, discussions, demonstrations and experience of the
equipment involved. Courses shall be prepared in advance and printed sets of course
notes shall be provided to all attendees.
(12) All courses shall be held in English and all course notes shall be written in English.
(13) All equipment to be used for training shall be provided by the Contractor, and its use
shall not interfere with any other use of the System, or with the program or time
schedules for commissioning or testing.
(14) The training staff of the Contractor shall have experience in giving training. The
Contractor shall provide evidence of the training experience and appropriate
accreditation of proposed staff six weeks prior to the start of the first course.
(15) The program of training courses shall be arranged to comply with the program for
implementation of the System and by arrangement with the Engineer.
(16) Courses shall provide attendees with sufficient skills to achieve a level of in-house
support required for the successful operation of the System.
14.3
CATEGORIES OF PERSONNEL REQUIRING TRAINING
14.3.1 General
Training shall be provided making due provision for the abilities and needs of the attendees.
To this end the following categories of user should be noted by the Contractor.
14.3.2 Managers
This group of personnel is those charged with responsibility for the safe and efficient running
of the plant. Knowledge on the System operation is needed to enable appreciation of the
benefits and limits of the information available and assist the decision making process. Their
involvement is essentially at an executive level.
14.3.3 Engineers
(1)
Engineers will require detailed knowledge of the supplied System to ensure that it
becomes a sustainable and supportable system.
(2)
Training in both software and hardware shall be given to cover both the maintenance
function and to deliver the capability for effecting future enhancements.

- 228 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)

14.3.4 Operators
(1)
Operators have knowledge of gas transmission operations and use of the System as their
main operational tool based at a control centre.
(2)
Their responsibility is continuous supervision of the National Gas Grid in a safe and
efficient manner and typical duties include:
a)
Reporting the performance of the pipeline operations, for example how much gas
is available, and from where.
b)
Monitoring maintenance operations, e.g. on valves.
c)
Carrying out appropriate actions when alarms are activated.
14.3.5 Technicians
Technicians perform maintenance and modification duties under the direction of an engineer.
Training should be given in all aspects of system support including planned maintenance and
minor configuration changes.
14.3.6 Trainers
In order to ensure effective in service training and to ensure sustainability of training after the
Contractor's warranty period is over, staff will be identified who in addition to other duties
will be designated as trainers and undergo a 'Training to the Trainers' program. These trainers
will then be assigned to provide in-service training to new staff.
14.4
TRAINING & SUPPORT SERVICES

The Contractor shall provide training and support services to Employers personnel to create
in-house maintenance and support capabilities for the hardware and software. The training
program shall be comprehensive and provide for interdisciplinary training hardware and
software. The required training Employers personnel shall be conducted by the Contractor in
English.
14.4.1 Free Maintenance Training on all equipment covered:

The Contractor shall provide hardware, software and operation maintenance training. The
courses shall familiarize Employers course participants with equipment installation; card /
circuit board level troubleshooting and repair procedures, and the recommended preventive
maintenance procedures for the equipment. Courses shall include use of the system
configuration and maintenance and shall demonstrate all facets of its operation. Courses shall
also include hands-on trouble-shooting experience with the RTUs and SCADA supplied by
the Contractor and shall cover any special equipment required for maintenance.
Actual equipment to be supplied under this Contract shall be used for training.
The Contractor shall also provide software training in the following areas:
a) SCADA & RTU configuration, modification and expansion
b) SCADA & RTU database generation and maintenance
c) SCADA & RTU software and operation including data flow

- 229 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)

In addition to SCADA & RTU system, the Contractor shall provide hardware, software and
operation maintenance training on other systems such as IP PBX, Video Conferencing etc.
14.4.2 Training Schedule:
The training schedule shall coincide with the delivery of the equipment to Employer. Training
shall be provided in at least three different sessions to accommodate personnel attendance.
The training course shall be an optimum mix of classroom and laboratory training.
14.4.3 Training course Requirement:
Employers Training course requirement are described below in terms of the contents of each
course to be provided. Training shall be provided on GTCL Data base for the application of
software course, the dispatchers training course and the associate training course.
14.4.4 Data base and Display building course:
The Data base and display building course shall be first course to be given in the overall
training sequence, it shall be a hands-on course using the GTCL systems. The course shall be
given immediately following delivery and installation of the system. The course shall be
designed to train Employers personnel in how to use the system to development the data
bases, displays, reports for each Control Centre computer system.
Course objectives shall include:-
a)
How to set up a display development system.
b)
How to identify data base fields, entries, records, table and contents.
c)
How to structure SCADA & RTU table definition.
d)
How to build table, arrays and reports formats.
e)
How to build displays.
f)
How to perform data base maintenance.
g)
How to generate data base from source information.
h)
How to maintain symbol libraries, display colour group and display string lists.
On course completion, all participants shall be able to prepare the necessary input data to
define the system operating environment, build the system data base and displays, and prepare
the data base administrator to maintain and modify the data base and its structures.
14.4.5 SCADA & RTU Course:
The contractor shall provide SCADA & RTU course that covers the following subjects as a
minimum:
f)
Theory of operation of all SCADA & RTUs function.
g)
Operational procedures for various mode of operation, including diagnostic tests and
interpretation of the associated tests results.
h)
Implementing and maintaining multiple communication courses.
i)
Converting an SCADA & RTU from one protocol to a different protocol.

- 230 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)
14.5

j)
Demonstration of complete SCADA & RTU tests set use, including tests sets connection
and set up for all possible modes of operation, all operational procedures, the exercise of
each command or feature associates with each mode of operation the interpretation of
results , and how to use the tests set to diagnose and isolate SCADA & RTU problems.
k)
Disconnection and replacement of all SCADA & RTU equipment, including all modules
within the SCADA & RTU.
l)
Diagnosing and isolating problems in contractor provided hardware associated with

SCADA & RTUs example transducers, multifunction meters and marshalling cabinet
wiring.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
14.5.1 Location and Methodology

(1)
The Contractor shall provide training in suitable premises at locations of their choice. It
is envisaged that the training will take place within Bangladesh and overseas locations
also.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide technology transfer training where members of the
Employers staff shall visit an overseas gas transmission company with an established
SCADA system in use for a total duration of ten (10) man-months.
(3)
The Contractor shall provide all accommodation, travel costs and subsistence for the
Employer's staff both for Bangladesh and abroad, except for Dhaka based training
where only travel and subsistence costs shall be provided. The Contractor shall maintain
records of topics covered, records of who has carried out training and who has attended.
14.5.2 Training Course during Installation and Commissioning

The Contractor shall provide technology transfer training course to demonstrate and lecture
the installation and commissioning of equipment at site for three months.
14.5.3 Training Course Structure for Operation & Maintenance
(1)
The Contractor shall provide technology transfer training for members of the
Employer's staff and visit to an overseas gas transmission company with an established
SCADA system in use. The visit shall consist of seminars, site visit and time spent
within control rooms viewing operations. The course shall demonstrate the benefits and
problems encountered when operating a complex gas transmission grid.
The training shall consist of
a)
SCADA Software & Hardware Maintenance Engineering
b)
Communication Software & Hardware Engineering
c)
SCADA Industry and Control Centre Visit and viewing live operations
d)
Project Planning & Management Training

- 231 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)

CODE
TITLE/CONTENT/OUTCOME
1
System Safety (1 day duration)
ATTENDEES
All Staffs
EXPERIENCE
None
This course shall cover the safe working of the

SCADA and necessary precautions.
Upon completion participants shall be aware of the

essential safety requirements.
Introduction to SCADA System (14 days duration) Operators,
Engineers,
This course shall familiarize participants with the
Maintenance
fundamentals of SCADA systems. It shall describe the
Technicians &
history of SCADA systems applications, and explain
Instrument
the elements of the technology that has been
Technicians
developed. The course shall also introduce participants
to the technology that is used.
Engineering
Degree Qualified.
Gas
Industry
experience
Upon successful completion, the participants shall be

able to identify the basic elements of a SCADA system
and the function which each performs.
Participants shall be able to describe how the SCADA

system enables them to supervise and control the plant.
Participants shall also be able to explain the roles of
the personnel involved in operating and maintaining
the system.
Managers,
Overview of SCADA System (7 days duration)
Support
This course shall provide an overview of the SCADA
Service
system and its functionality for those not practically
Personnel
involved in the operation or maintenance of the
system.
Sufficient
experience in the
gas
industry,
particularly gas
transmission.
It
shall familiarize
those
personnel with
responsibilities for managing plant operations or using
the data which is provided by the SCADA system.
Upon successful completion, participants shall be able

to describe how the SCADA system improves the
supervision and control of the plant. Participants shall
also be able to understand the activities required for
planning, specifying and supervising the operations
and maintenance of the plant. Participants shall also
know how to make further personal research into
SCADA Systems using the documentation provided
with the system.
Software
SCADA Software Engineering
Engineer
The course shall consist of three separate courses
covering :
Mimic Creation (1 week)
Software Engineering (2 weeks)
Attendance
at
Course
2
Engineering
Degree Qualified.
Gas
Industry
Experience
System Administration (2 weeks)

Upon completion participants shall be able to make
some modifications to the SCADA system software
- 232 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)
CODE
5

ATTENDEES
for expansion or simple variations to the system.
SCADA Hardware Maintenance (4 weeks duration) SCADA
Hardware
The course shall be designed for technicians and
Technicians
engineers who are responsible for hardware
and Engineers
maintenance and troubleshooting of the SCADA
system. Hardware configuration shall be covered.
Upon completion participants shall be able to repair
and maintain SCADA equipment and commission new
equipment.
Instrument Technicians Course (4 weeks duration) Instrument
Technicians
The course shall be designed to familiarize technicians
with equipment such as energy metering, gas analysis
and intrinsic safety devices.
Upon completion technicians shall be able to carry out
calibration and simple maintenance operations.
Store Keepers
Material Control - Handling (1 week duration)
The course shall cover the essential materials control
handing activities such as inventory control, safe
handling and custody of materials. Handling of
equipment and stock keeping.
10
EXPERIENCE
Attendance
at
Course 2 Degree
qualified
in
electronics
/
electrical
engineering.
Attendance at
Course 2
Electrical
Engineering
Diploma
Experience
in
store keeping and
security
Upon completion participants could be given control

of area store.
Commissioning Degree qualified
Communication Software Engineering
Engineers
in commissioning
(4 weeks duration)
related subjects
The course shall cover configuration, diagnostics and
performance monitoring.
Upon completion participants shall be able to make
some modifications to the communications systems
software for expansion or simple variations to the
system.
Commissioning Degree qualified
Communication Hardware Maintenance
Hardware
in commissioning
(4 weeks duration)
Technicians
related subjects
The course shall be designed for technicians and
and Engineers
engineers who are responsible for hardware
maintenance and troubleshooting of communications
systems. Hardware configuration shall be covered.
Upon completion participants shall be able to repair
and maintain communications equipment and
commissioning new equipment.
Inspectors
Basic Quality Control & Management
(2 weeks duration)
The course shall cover the basic elements of
calibration, preparation of work instructions and basic
auditing techniques.
Experience
gained within the
gas sector at the
supervisor level.
Upon completion participants shall carry out basic

- 233 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)
CODE
11

ATTENDEES
quality audits, manage the calibration process and
prepare simple work instructions.
Operators
Leak Detection (2 weeks duration)
The course shall cover the Leak Detection application
software.
12
13
EXPERIENCE
Attendance in
course 2.
Engineering
Degree qualified.
Gas industry
experience.
Upon completion of the course participants shall be

able to use the application software and the SCADA
system, in general, to monitor for leak detection and to
implement operational procedures for dealing with the
leak.
Operators
Attendance in
Load Balancing and System Scheduling
Supervisors & course 2.
(2 weeks duration)
Engineering
Managers
The course shall cover the Load Balancing and System
Degree qualified.
Scheduling application software provided with
Gas industry
particular emphasis on the Employers existing
experience.
operational and organizational involvement in this
area.
Upon completion the participants shall be able to use
the application software to implement load balancing
and system scheduling.
Supervisors & Attendance in
Training the Trainers
Managers
course 2.
(2 weeks duration)
Extensive
The course shall cover basic training skills necessary
experience of
for providing on the job training.
work within the
Upon completion the participants shall be able to train
gas industry.
new and existing staff in the main tasks for their area
of work.

- 234 -
TRAINING

(GTCL)
15.

PRICE BREAK UP AND EQUIPMENT LIST

PRICE BREAK-UP
(PRICE SCHEDULE 1, 2, 3 AND 4 OF PART 1 SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER FOLLOWING THIS TABLE)
SL.
NO.
1
DESCRIPTION
LOCAL
COST IN
BDT
COST IN
USD
(MILLIONS)
REMARKS, IF ANY
SCHEDULE 1
PLANT & MANDATORY SPARES
SUPPLIED FROM ABROAD
Equipment Cost for SCADA System
including Factory Acceptance Test
(FAT), Quality Management System
(QMS) and Material Handling
Charges (Refer Equipment List 1)
Equipment Cost for Instrumentation
System
including
Factory
Acceptance Test (FAT), Quality
Management System (QMS) and
Material Handling Charges (Refer
Equipment List 2)
Equipment
Cost
for
Telecommunication
System
Equipment Cost for Electrical
System
including
Factory
Equipment List 4)
Mandatory Spare Parts and Special
Tools & Tackle for SCADA,
Instrumentation, Telecommunication
and Electrical System
SCHEDULE 2
PLANT & MANDATORY SPARES
SUPPLIED FROM WITHIN THE
EMPLOYERS COUNTRY
Equipment Cost for SCADA System
Equipment Cost for Instrumentation
System
including
Factory
- 235 -

(GTCL)

PRICE BREAK-UP
SL.
NO.
3
a
b
c
d
e
f
4
a
b
c
DESCRIPTION
LOCAL
COST IN
BDT
COST IN
USD
(MILLIONS)
REMARKS, IF ANY

Equipment List 2)
Equipment
Cost
for
Telecommunication
System
Equipment Cost for Electrical
System
including
Factory
Equipment List 4)
Mandatory Spare Parts and Special
Tools & Tackle for SCADA,
Instrumentation, Telecommunication
and Electrical System
SCHEDULE 3
DESIGN SERVICES
Basic & Detail Engineering for
SCADA System including Site Visit
Instrumentation System
Telecommunication
System
including Radio Engineering Path
Survey Work for Radio path
propagation for wireless Access link
Electrical System
Basic & Detail Engineering for Civil
Works
All drawings and documents
including As-built drawings
SCHEDULE 4
INSTALLATION
&
OTHER
SERVICES
Pre-Installation Site Works
Temporary
Site
Facilities
/
Accommodation and Vehicles
Supply of Erection / Construction
Materials
including
Material
Handling Charges
Erection / Construction Work for
SCADA System
- 236 -

(GTCL)

PRICE BREAK-UP
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
LOCAL
COST IN
BDT
COST IN
USD
(MILLIONS)
REMARKS, IF ANY

Telecommunication System
Instruments
and
associated
Mechanical System
Electrical System
Civil Construction Work
Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
Commissioning & Start-up and post
implementation services
Training Cost
Two (2) years Operation &
Maintenance
Total
g
h
i
j
k
l
NOTES:
1.
For complete Scope of Work, Bidders are requested to refer other parts of Section-VI,
Part-2 of the Bid document.
2.
Bidder may add additional heads in the above table, if required to meet the entire scope of
work as available in Bid document.
3.
For Estimated BOQ, please refer to attached sheets. The items which are not covered in the
estimated BOQ but mentioned elsewhere in Section-VI, Part-2 of the Bid and any item
required to complete the scope of supply, works and services has to be included in the BOQ
of Bidder.
4.
Bidder may indicate price escalation and contingencies, if required.
5.
Contractor shall bring all installation tools, accessories, special tools, spares part etc. at his
own cost as required for the successful completion of the job.

- 237 -

(GTCL)

EQUIPMENT LIST 1
(PRICE LIST FOR EACH ITEM TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER FOLLOWING THIS BOQ)
Description
1.
Quantity
EQUIPMENT FOR SCADA

(a) MONITORING SYSTEM
(a1) Monitoring System 1 at Master Control Center (MCC)
(a1.1) SCADA Server (Main & Back-up)
Set
(a1.2) Historian Data Server
Set
(a1.3) SCADA Web Server with Firewall
Set
(a1.4) Application servers for Load Balancing and Leak Detection

along with operator stations
Set
(a1.5) HMI Work Station
Set
(a1.6) Engineering Work Station
Set
(a1.7) Laser Colour Printer (Size: A3 size, Print : 20 pages / minute &
Network compatible)
Set
(a1.8) Laser Monochrome Printer (Size: A3 size, Print : 20 pages /

minute & Network compatible)
Set
(a1.9) Larger Screen Monitor (67 inch diagonal) with operator station
(Type : Flat panel LCD monitor with LED backlight)
Set
(a1.10) Ethernet Cat-6 LAN Cables & Network components including

L3 core switch (1+1) configuration and L2 distribution switch (1+1)
configuration and patch panels, patch cords etc. in a redundant LAN
network
Lot
(a2.1) SCADA Server (Main & Back-up)
Set
(a2.2) Historian Data Server
Set
(a2.3) SCADA Web Server with Firewall
Set
(a2.4) Application servers for Load Balancing and Leak Detection

along with operator stations
Set
Set
Set
(a2.7) Laser Colour Printer (Size: A3 size, Print : 20 pages / minute &
Network compatible)
Set
(a2.8) Laser Monochrome Printer (Size: A3 size, Print : 20 pages /

minute &
Network compatible)
Set
(a2)
Monitoring System 2 at Auxiliary Control Center (ACC)

- 238 -

(GTCL)

(a2.9) Larger Screen Monitor (67 inch diagonal) with operator station
(Type : Flat panel LCD monitor with LED backlight)
(a2.10) Ethernet Cat-6 LAN Cables & Network components
including L3 core switch (1+1) configuration and L2 distribution
switch (1+1) configuration and patch panels, patch cords etc. in a
redundant LAN network
(a3) Monitoring 3 at Operating Companies HQ (OCT)
Set
Lot
(a3.1)
HMI Work Station
10
(a3.2)
Colour Laser Printer (A4 size)
10
Set
(a3.3)
UPS (230V, 1KVA and 50hz with 30 minutes)
10
Set
Set
Set
(a4.3) Color Laser Printer (A4 size)
Set
32
Set
54
Set
Set
25
Set
(a4)
Set
Monitoring System at Demra SCADA Office, GTCL.
(b) RTU
(b1) RTU (New Installation)
(b2) RTU (Remove and Installation)
(b3) RTU (Material Supply)
(b4)
Solar Panel
Set
EQUIPMENT LIST 2
Instruments
1)
Pressure Transmitter
193
Set
2)
Temperature Transmitter
142
Set
3)
Differential Transmitter
208
Set
4)
Flow meter (Turbine type)
33
Set
5)
Flow Computer (For orifice type meter)
127
Set
6)
Limit Switch Valve Status Monitoring
61
Set
7)
Solenoid Valve
52
Set
8)
Junction Box
92
Set
9)
2 Pair,1.0 Sqmm Armoured Signal cable (approx. length)
4000
meter

- 239 -

(GTCL)

10)
11000
meter
11)
3000
meter
EQUIPMENT LIST 3
EQUIPMENT FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(a) Communication System for MTS
(a1.1) 5.0-7.0 GHband IP radio & installation materials at MTS
location
11
Set
(a1.2) 24 dBi Directional Antenna & mounting hardware
11
Set
(a1.3) 100 mtr long LDF-550A Coaxial cable with connector &
Lightning Arrestor
(a1.4) Telemetry Radio(Master) 382-392 MHz & installation
materials
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Lot
11
Set
Set
(a1.12) PSU for Router-AC-DC with 10xE1 interface for MCC

and ACC
Set
(a1.13) STM-1 Optical SDH Equipment / L3 optical Router with

essential accessories for MTS
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Set
11
Lot
(a1.5) High gain Omni directional antenna & mounting hardware

(a1.6) 100 mtr long LDF-550A Coaxial cable with connector
(a1.7) DC-DC Converter-IP Radio:24V-12V
(a1.8) DC-DC Converter-UHF Radio:24V-12V
(a1.9) Router / L3 / L2 Switch with cables etc.
(a1.10) PSU for Router-AC-DC,50 Watt
(a1.11) Router with 10xE1 interface for MCC and ACC
(b) Communication System for AP

(b1.1) 5.0-7.0 GH band IP radio & installation materials at AP
location
(b1.2) 24 dBi Directional Antenna & mounting hardware
(b1.3) 100 mtr long LDF-550A Coaxial cable with connector &
Lightning Arrestor
(b1.4) IP-E1 Converter
(b1.5) DC-DC Converter-IP Radio:24V-12V
(b1.6) DC-DC Converter-IP-E1 Converter:24V-48V
(b1.7) DC-DC Converter-IP Radio:24V-12V
(b1.8) Router / L3 / L2 Switch with cables etc.
- 240 -

(GTCL)

(b1.9) PSU for Router-AC-DC

(b2.1) STM-1 Optical SDH Equipment with essential / L3 optical
Router accessories for AP
11
Set
11
Set
88
Set
88
Set
88
Set
88
Set
88
Set
88
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
(c) Communication System for RTU

(c1.1) Telemetry Radio(Slave) 382-392 MHz & installation
materials
(c1.2) Directional antenna & mounting hardware
(c1.3) 100 mtr long LDF-550A Coaxial cable with connector
(c1.4) DC-DC Converter-UHF Radio:24V-12V
(c1.5) GPRS Radio Modem with antenna
(c1.6) DC-DC Converter- GPRS Radio Modem:24V-12V
(c1.7) Telemetry Radio(Master) 382-392 MHz & installation
materials
(c1.8) 24 dBi Directional Antenna & mounting hardware
(c1.9) 100 mtr long LDF-550A Coaxial cable with connector
(d) Communication System for Interface Point
(d1.1) Router / L3 / L2 Switch with accessories
(d1.2) PSU for Router-AC-DC
(d1.3) Serial to Parallel Converter
(d1.4) Protocol Converter
(d1.5) DC-DC Converter-Protocol Converter:24V-12/48V
Set
(e) Communication System OCT

(e1.1) Router / L3 / L2 Switch with accessories
(e1.2) PSU for Router-AC-DC
(f)
10
Set
10
Set
Set
Communication system for interfacing with western zone SCADA

(f.1) GPRS Radio Modem with antenna
(f.2) DC-DC Converter- GPRS Radio Modem:24V-12V

(g) Communication System VOIP Telephone and Video
Conferencing System
(g1.2) VOIP Telephone sets

(g1.3) Video Conferencing System with accessories and end
points
- 241 -
Set
25
Set
Set
(g1.1) VOIP Server and system
25
Set
74
Set
Set

(GTCL)

h. Tower
h1.40 meter high 4 legged self- supported tower with foundation
h2. Guy wire & necessary nut bolt accessories
h3.Supply of Ear thing cables (50 rm)
h4. Aircraft warning light system (5 no light with controller) &
necessary electric cable
EQUIPMENT LIST 4
Set
Lot
km
17
Set
EQUIPMENT FOR Electrical SYSTEM
a.
Set
MCC, Agargaon, Dhaka.
1. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), 15 KVA

1
Set
Set
3. Battery of UPS system (SCADA & Communication System equipment)
Set
4. Battery of UPS system (Building Emergency Lighting System)
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
5. Control panel of Generator with Generator Accessories.
Set
Set
Set
Lot
Lot
(for SCADA & Communication System equipment)

(for Building Emergency Lighting)
b.
ACC, Ashuganj

c.
Demra SCADA office, GTCL (Old MCC)


- 242 -

(GTCL)

5. Control panel of Generator with Generator Accessories.
Set
d.
MTS location.
1.
Power Supply unit
10
Set
2.
Batteries
10
Lot
3.
AC power distribution board with necessary circuit breakers
10
Set
10
Lot
4.
e.
Power cable from existing distribution board of Gas office to

Radio room with necessary circuit breakers.
Providers AP location.
1.
Power Supply unit
10
Set
2.
Batteries
10
Lot
3.
AC power distribution board with necessary circuit breakers
10
Set
10
Lot
4.
f.
Power cable from Radio room to existing distribution board of

Gas office with necessary circuit breakers.
RTU sites.
1.
Power Supply unit
88
Set
2.
Batteries
88
Lot
63
Lot
25
Set
3.
4.
Power cable from existing distribution board of Gas office to

RTU with necessary circuit breakers.
Solar panel with chargers and batteries.
NOTES:
1.
Bidder may add additional items in the above tables, if required to meet the entire scope of
work as available in Bid document.


- 243 -

(GTCL)(A Company of Petrobangla)

(SCADA) of national gas grid under GTCL (Component-B of Bheramara Combined Cycle
Power Plant Development Project)
BID PROPOSAL SHEETS : TECHNICAL

TECHNICAL SCHEDULE TO BE
FILLED BY THE BIDDER


The information sought out in this Section shall be furnished by the Tenderer in the format specified by
typing out answers to the questionnaire at the appropriate spaces allotted. The authorized representative
of the Tenderer must properly sign these as verification of the data submitted. These signed pages shall
be a part of the Tenderers original Proposal. Other copies of the proposal shall contain prints of these
sheets duly filled in. Failure to comply with the above requirement may result in rejection of the
Proposal.
Additional sheets may be used, if necessary.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (RTU)
Sl.
No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
Make
Model No.
Processor
Communication Speed
RAM
Display Monitor
Connection to Portable Diagnostic

Test Unit
MTBF / MTTR
Data Time Stamping at RTU Level
10
Battery Back-up
11
Communication Ports
12
Communication Protocol
13
Analog Input Module

Signal Level / Range
No. of Inputs per Module
Accuracy
1 of 26

Sl.
No.

Description
Isolation
14
15
16
Bidder Compliance
Analog Output Module

No. of Outputs per Module
Load
Accuracy
Isolation
Digital Input Module

No. of Inputs per Module
Contact Bounce Protection
Isolation
Digital Output Module

No. of Outputs per Module
Contact Arrangement and Rating
Interposing Relays
17
Salient Features of RTU offered
18
Degree of Protection
19
Operating Temperature Range
20
Operating RH Range
2 of 26


Sl.
No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
21
RTU Cabinet Size
22
Doors
23
Terminal Blocks
24
Indicators
25
Space Heater and Thermostat
26
Whether hardware for 25% spares I/Os

for RTU included?
27
Maximum No. of I/O Modules per

RTU (each type to be indicated)
28
Brief Specification of Portable RTU

Configuration and Diagnostic Test
Unit
29
Power Requirement for a fully

equipped RTU
30
RTU Software Details in brief
PORTABLE DIAGNOSTIC TEST UNIT (*)

Sl.
No.
Description
01.
Make
02.
Model No.
03.
Operating System
04.
CPU (*)
05.
Cache (*)
06.
RAM (*)
07.
Hard Disc (*)
08.
Display
Bidder Compliance
3 of 26


Sl.
No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
09.
DVD drive
10.
Power Supply
11.
Expansion Slots
12.
Interface (*)
13.
Wireless Connectivity
14.
Keyboard
15.
Durability Features
16.
Security Features
17.
Software (All Licensed & Latest

Version) (*)
Note: (*) Bidder shall supply latest hardware and software configuration available at the time of actual
supply.
SCADA SERVER AND WEB SERVER (*)
Sl. No.
Description
01.
Make
02.
Model No.
03.
Operating System
04.
CPU (*)
05.
Cache (*)
06.
RAM (*)
07.
Hard Disc (*)
08.
Display
09.
DVD drive
10.
Power Supply
Bidder Compliance
4 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
11.
Expansion Slots
12.
Interface (*)
13.
Wireless Connectivity
14.
Keyboard
15.
Durability Features
16.
Security Features
17.
Software (All Licensed & Latest

Version) (*)
Note: (*) Bidder shall supply latest hardware and software configuration available at the time of actual
supply.
HMI WORK STATIONS
a)
CPU
Sl. No.
Description
01.
Processor
02.
Memory
03.
Hard drive
04.
Floppy drive
05.
Removable bulk storage
06.
Audio controller
07.
Operating system
b)
Bidder Compliance
Monitor
Sl. No.
Description
01.
Type
02.
Screen diagonal
03.
Display
Bidder Compliance
5 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
04.
Resolution
05.
Degree of protection
06.
External Controls
07.
Power supply
08.
Version
c)
Bidder Compliance
Key Board & Mouse
Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Type
02.
Life Expectancy
03.
Version
04.
Mouse
LASER PRINTER
Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Type
02.
Paper size
03.
Speed
04.
Resolution
05.
Duty cycle
06.
First page out time
07.
Paper input capacity
08.
Communication port
09.
Accessories
L3 CORE SWITCH SPECIFICATION

6 of 26


Port Density
Performance
VLAN
Multicast Support
Quality Of Service
Security
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
Resiliency
07.
Management Feature
08.
Electrical Approvals and Compliances
09.
10.
Environmental Specifications
11.
Approvals and Compliances
L2 ETHERNET DISTRIBUTION SWITCH SPECIFICATION

Number of port
LAN interface
Switching data transfer method
Access method
Address table
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
Routing and Multicast
06.
Security and other important features
07.
Reliability
08.
Quality of Service (QoS)
09.
10.
Processor &Memory
11.
Interface connector
12.
Power supply
13.
14.
15.
Power consumption
IPv6
Approvals and Compliances
7 of 26


FLOW COMPUTER
Sl.
No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
Make
Model No.
Processor
Input Signal Capability
Display Type
Interface
Keypad
Output
Computation
Standards Complied
10
Engineering Units
11
Scan Time
12
Security
13
Diagnostic
14
Power Supply
15
Degree of Protection
16
Operating Temperature Range
17
Operating RH Range
PRESSURE, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE, FLOW TRANSMITTER

Sl. No.
Description
01.
Working Principle
Bidder Compliance
:
8 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
02.
Type
03.
Output signal
04.
Signal Processing Unit
05.
Measuring element
06.
Element material
07.
Over Pressure
08.
Turn-down ratio
09.
Span and Zero
10.
Enclosure
11.
Output Indicator
12.
Body
13.
Operating Voltage
14.
Load
15.
Performance :a)
Accuracy
b)
Repeatability
c)
Response time
d)
Zero & Span drift
e)
Stability
16.
Process connection
17.
Sealing / Isolation
18.
Nameplate
19.
Process connection
20.
Sealing / Isolation
21.
Nameplate
22.
Accessories
9 of 26

Sl. No.

Description
Bidder Compliance
TURBINE FLOW METER

Sensor
Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Type
02.
Output Signal
03.
Material of Construction
04.
Flow rate range
05.
Linearity
06.
Repeatability
07.
Mounting
08.
Enclosure
Transmitter
Sl. No.
Description
01.
Electronics
02.
Power Supply
03.
Input
04.
Display
05.
Output
06.
Measuring Accuracy
07.
Totalized Value
08.
Housing
09.
Nameplate
Bidder Compliance
10 of 26

10.

Accessories
PRESSURE GAUGE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE

Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Type
02.
MOC Sensing & Socket
03.
Movement Material
04.
Case Material
05.
Dial Size
06.
Scale
07.
Window
08.
Range Selection
09.
Over-range Protection
10.
Adjustment
11.
Element Connection
12.
Process Connection
13.
Performance
14.
Safety Feature
15.
Accessories
16.
Applicable standard
17.
Electrical Contact rating
18.
Nameplate
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Sl. No.
Description
01.
Type
Bidder Compliance
:
11 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
02.
Sensing Element Material
03.
Stem Diameter
04.
Stem Material
05.
Thermometer connection to well
06.
Case Material
07.
Dial Size
08.
Scale
09.
Pointer
10.
Dampener
11.
Mounting
12.
Over range Protection
13.
Dial connection
14.
Range
15.
Zero adjuster
16.
Window
17.
Accuracy
18.
Enclosure Class
19.
Accessories
20.
Nameplate
RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR

Sl. No.
Description
01.
Type
02.
Resistance
03.
Base
Bidder Compliance
12 of 26

Sl. No.
Description
04.
Wiring
05.
Protecting Tube :-

Bidder Compliance
:
a)
O.D.
b)
Material
c)
Filling
06.
Calibration
07.
Characteristics
08.
Head :a)
Type
b)
Material
c)
Terminal blocks
d)
Cable connection
e)
Instrument connection to
well
f)
Others
09.
Accessories
10.
Nameplate
THERMOWELL
Sl. No.
Description
01.
Material
02.
Process connection
03.
Max Internal bored dia
04.
Bore Connection
05.
Identification Mark
06.
Surface Treatment
07.
Element Connection
08.
Certification
Bidder Compliance
13 of 26

Sl. No.
Description
09.
Accessories

Bidder Compliance
:
FIELD MOUNTED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

Sl. No.
Description
01.
Working Principle
02.
Type
03.
Input
04.
Isolation
05.
Output Signal
06.
Signal Processing Circuitry
07.
Span and Zero
08.
Enclosure Class
09.
Output Indicator
10.
Span Adjustability
11.
Nameplate
12.
Body
13.
Operating Voltage
14.
Load
15.
Performance :-
16.
Bidder Compliance
a)
Accuracy
b)
Repeatability
c)
Cold
Compensation
d)
Calibration
Junction
Accessories
:
:
:
14 of 26


UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY

Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Type
02.
Configuration
03.
Charger
04.
Charger output Regulation
05.
Battery
06.
Backup time
07.
Inverter capacity
08.
Overload capacity
09.
Sizing
10.
Inverter Output Regulation
11.
Harmonic
12.
Efficiency
13.
Synchronization limit
14.
Inverter protection
15.
Load sharing
16.
Static switch
17.
Bypass Voltage stabilizer &

Transformer
18.
Diagnostic alarms:
19.
Accessories
20.
Make & model no.
ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX

Sl. No.
01.
Description
Type of enclosure
Bidder Compliance
:
15 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
02.
No. of ways
03.
Material
04.
Type of cover
05.
Gasket
06.
Mounting
07.
Cable entry
08.
Grounding
09.
Number of Drain Holes
10.
Identification
11.
Accessories
12.
Make & model no.
CABLE GLAND
Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Type
02.
Entry Thread
03.
Material
04.
Finish
05.
Protection
06.
Accessories
07.
Make & model no.
PERFORATED CABLE TRAY

Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Material
02.
Thickness
16 of 26

Sl. No.

Description
Bidder Compliance
03.
Finish
04.
Perforation
05.
Cover
06.
Make & model no.
IP RADIO
Sl. No. Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Frequency band
02.
Output power
03.
Modulation method
04.
Interface
05.
Transmission speed
06.
Power supply & power consumption
07.
Power feeding of ODU
08.
Mechanical configuration
07.
Antenna size/gain
07.
07.
07.
Humidity
07.
Wind Survival
TELEMETRY RADIO
Sl. No. Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Operating frequency band
02.
Operation mode
17 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
Bidder Compliance
03.
Protection
05.
Output power
06.
Modulation method
07.
Output Impedance
08.
Interface
09.
Transmission speed
10.
Receiver Sensitivity
11.
Receiver Selectivity
12.
Duty Cycle
13.
Adjacent Channel Rejection
14.
Power supply & power consumption
15.
Transmitter rise up time
16.
Antenna size/gain
17.
18.
19.
Humidity
20.
Antenna mast at Additional Sites :

a) Height
b) Strength
c) Material
d) Foundation
e) Lightning system
f) Operating frequency band
GPRS RADIO MODEM

Sl. No. Description
Bidder Compliance
18 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
01.
Operation
02.
Antenna Connector
03.
05.
06.
Consumption during transmission (Tx)
07.
Max Power Output:
08.
EMC
09.
10.
Data Features
11.
Serial interfaces
12.
13.
14.
Humidity :-
15.
Operation
16.
Antenna Connector
17.
18.
19.
Consumption during transmission (Tx)
20.
Max Power Output:
21.
EMC
22.
23.
Data Features
24.
Serial interfaces
25.
26.
Bidder Compliance
19 of 26

Sl. No.
Description
27.
Humidity

Bidder Compliance
IP PABX
Sl. No. Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Outside lines
02.
Extension lines
03.
Power supply
05.
Backup battery
06.
07.
Features
a) Station Call
b) Abbreviated Dialing
c) Authorization Codes
d) Automatic Call Back
e) Voice Guided Assistance
Announcement System
f) Malicious Call Tracing / Record
g) Direct Inward / Outward Station
Access
h) Class of Service, Direct Inward /
outward Dialing
i)
Class of Restriction
j)
Auto Attendant
k) Day / Night Trunk Control

l)
Distinctive Ringing
m) Music on Hold
n) System Traffic Reports
20 of 26

Sl. No.

Description
Bidder Compliance
o) System Abbreviated Dialing

p) Uniform Numbering Plan
q) 4 Party conferencing
r) Message Announcement System
s) Voice Mail System
t)
Hotline Facility
u) Fixed-Mobile Interface
IP-E1 MEDIA CONVERTER

Sl. No. Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Converting signal protocol
02.
Number of required port
07.
EI signal format
09.
E1 Electrical Interface
10.
Jitter
11.
Ethernet Interface connector
13.
Ethernet standard
14.
Power supply
15.
Power consumption
16.
17.
Converting signal protocol
18.
Number of required port
RF LOW LOSS COAXIAL CABLE

Sl. No. Description
Bidder Compliance
01.
Weight of cables
02.
Tensile Strength
21 of 26


Sl. No.
Description
03.
Minimum bending radius
05.
06.
Cable Nominal Impedance
07.
Nominal Capacitance
09.
DC Resistance Inner/ Outer
10.
Nominal Attenuation
11.
12.
Outer Conductor Material/ Inner

Conductor Material
13.
14.
Nominal Size:
15.
Attenuation and Average Power

Ratings at 400 MHz
SEAL OF THE
COMPANY
Bidder Compliance
Signature
....................................................
Name
....................................................
Designation
....................................................
22 of 26


LIST OF TOOLS AND TACKLE

The Tenderer shall tabulate below the itemwise list of tools and tackle furnished by him for the
operation & maintenance and replacement of the equipment supplied under this Specification. Add
more sheets, if required. Tenderer shall strictly follow this format.
SL.NO.
DESCRIPTION / SPECIFICATION, MAKE & MODEL NO.
QUANTITY OFFERED
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
SEAL OF THE
COMPANY
Signature
....................................................
Name
....................................................
Designation
....................................................
23 of 26


DRAWING SUBMISSION SCHEDULE
The Tenderer shall tabulate below the item wise list of Drawings to be furnished by him for the
equipment / items supplied under this Specification. Add more sheets, if required. Tenderer shall strictly
follow this format.
Sl.No.
Submission of Drawings for Approval in weeks

after issue of Letter of Intent
Description of Drawings
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
The Tenderer shall also furnish the time in weeks for resubmission of reviewed / commented drawings
from Owner from date of receipt.
SEAL OF THE
COMPANY
Signature
....................................................
Name
....................................................
Designation
....................................................
24 of 26


PROGRESS SCHEDULE
The Bidder shall indicate the time required for different phases of work in the fashion below. Time shall
be mentioned in weeks taking the date of issue of Letter of Intent as datum.
TIME IN WEEKS FROM THE DATE

OF L.O.I
SL NO.
DESCRIPTION
01.
Start submission of drawing / data as specified for

approval.
02.
Complete submission of drawings / data as specified

for approval.
03.
Start manufacture
04.
Start issuing Purchase Orders for bought-out items.
05.
Complete issuing Purchaser Orders for bought-out

items.
06.
Complete manufacture
07.
Start testing at manufacturers works.
08.
Complete testing at manufacturers works.
09.
Start Shipment
10.
Complete Shipment
11.
Start Erection
12.
Complete Erection
13.
Start final check-up testing & commissioning
14.
Complete final check-up testing & commissioning
SEAL OF THE
COMPANY
Signature
....................................................
Name
....................................................
Designation
....................................................
25 of 26


DEVIATION SHEET
If the proposal submitted by Bidder has got any deviation from the stipulations in the tender document,
Bidder shall tabulate below the full particulars of these deviations and shall sign below. Additional
sheets may be added, if necessary. Terms such as refer covering sheet / catalogue etc. shall not be
accepted. In absence of any duly filled in complete Deviation Sheet, it will be understood and agreed
that Bidder has no deviation whatsoever with regard to specification and stipulation of the specification
will be binding on Bidder in case of any discrepancy between the specification and the proposal
submitted by Bidder. Bidder shall strictly follow this format.
Serial No.
Bid /
Specification
Section
Specification
Clause No. /
Page No.
Technical Deviation
Remarks
Notes:
1.
Bidder shall furnish a consolidated list of deviations / clarifications / comments of all sections of
the bid package, which for an appropriate offer are considered unavoidable by him.
2.
Deviations / clarifications mentioned elsewhere in the offer shall not be binding on the Client /
Consultant and any such deviations if indicated elsewhere other than this form will render the offer
non-responsive and shall liable to be rejected.
3.
Bidder shall state the reasons for the deviations in the Remarks column.
SEAL OF THE
COMPANY
Signature
......................................................
Name
......................................................
Designation
......................................................
26 of 26

GTCL Draft Specification Master Working Copy Latest

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTCL Draft Specification Master Working Copy Latest

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIDDING DOCUMENT

DESIGN, BUILD AND TURNKEY ENGINEERING, PROCUREMENT,

GAS TRANSMISSION COMPANY LIMITED (GTCL)

Gas Transmission Company Limited

Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION : PART 2

Gas Transmission Company Limited

Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

PROJECT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................... 2

Design Philosophy .......................................................................................................... 3

Project Geography .......................................................................................................... 5

Petrobangla and the Employer........................................................................................ 6

Operating Companies ..................................................................................................... 6

The National Gas Grid ................................................................................................... 8

Site Description .............................................................................................................. 8

Gas Pipeline Operation Philosophy ................................................................................ 9

Communication System ............................................................................................... 10

Valve Automation and Pressure Monitoring ................................................................ 13

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE NEW SYSTEM ........................................................................... 13

The SCADA System .................................................................................................... 13

The Communication System ........................................................................................ 14

Interface of the SCADA System .................................................................................. 15

APPLICABLE STANDARDS ..................................................................................................... 16

UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................... 22

SITE CONDITIONS AND AREA CLASSIFICATION ................................................................... 22

SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................................... 24

Gas Transmission Company Limited

PROJECT MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................... 28

SITE INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................ 29

ENGINEERING AND DETAILED DESIGN ................................................................................. 30

FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) ................................................................................... 31

PRE-INSTALLATION SITE WORKS ......................................................................................... 31

SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) ............................................................................................ 32

SYSTEM TAKING-OVER ........................................................................................................ 32

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT .......................................................................... 32

TEMPORARY SITE FACILITIES............................................................................................... 32

Local Site Facilities ...................................................................................................... 33

Office Facilities ............................................................................................................ 33

Living and Messing Accommodation .......................................................................... 35

Supply of Electricity and Water ................................................................................... 36

Inspection Equipment ................................................................................................... 36

CD-VAT Charges on Imported Items ...................................................................... 38

THE EMPLOYER'S SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................... 39

Rehabilitation and Expansion of Existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

CONTRACTOR'S KEY MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................. 40

ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS ................................................................................................. 40

Contractor's Documents ............................................................................................... 40

Design Submissions ..................................................................................................... 42

As-Built Documents ..................................................................................................... 43

Operation and Maintenance Manuals ........................................................................... 44

Drawings and Specifications ........................................................................................ 45

Method Statements ....................................................................................................... 46

Gas Transmission Company Limited

Systems Design Methodology ...................................................................................... 46

Coordination with Other Persons and Organizations ................................................... 48

Liaison with Authorities ............................................................................................... 48

PROGRAMMING AND PLANNING ........................................................................................... 49

QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (QMS)............................................................................ 51

Quality Control and Verification of the Works ............................................................ 52

System Monitoring and Performance Improvement .................................................... 53

QMS Reporting ............................................................................................................ 53

QMS Documentation .................................................................................................... 54

HEALTH & SAFETY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HSMS) ................................................. 54